PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleBook

Transcription

1 PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleBook

2 PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleBook SKU MAPLr8SP1B 1200 PeopleBooks Contributors: Teams from PeopleSoft Product Documentation and Development. Copyright 2001 by PeopleSoft, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. All material contained in this documentation is proprietary and confidential to PeopleSoft, Inc. and is protected by copyright laws. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including, but not limited to, electronic, graphic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior written permission of PeopleSoft, Inc. This documentation is subject to change without notice, and PeopleSoft, Inc. does not warrant that the material contained in this documentation is free of errors. Any errors found in this document should be reported to PeopleSoft, Inc. in writing. The copyrighted software that accompanies this documentation is licensed for use only in strict accordance with the applicable license agreement which should be read carefully as it governs the terms of use of the software and this documentation, including the disclosure thereof. PeopleSoft, the PeopleSoft logo, PeopleTools, PS/nVision, PeopleCode, PeopleBooks, and Vantive are registered trademarks, and PeopleTalk and "People power the internet." are trademarks of PeopleSoft, Inc. All other company and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

3 Contents About This PeopleBook Before You Begin... xi PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals... xi Related Documentation...xii Documentation on the Internet...xiii Documentation on CD-ROM...xiii PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions... xv Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues... xvii Page and Panel Introductory Table...xviii Comments and Suggestions... xix Chapter 1 Overview of PeopleSoft Production Planning What Is PeopleSoft Production Planning? Traditional MRP Approaches Material Requirements Planning Manufacturing Resource Planning Enterprise Resource Planning Using PeopleSoft Production Planning What PeopleSoft Production Planning Offers You Managing Business Processes and Data Flow Using Seamless Integration to Create Production Plans Moving and Balancing the Supply Chain Using PeopleSoft Production Planning to Manage Your Shop Floor Understanding Plans Working With Constraints Understanding the Interactive Approach to Supply Chain Management Using an Integrated Model of Material and Capacity Consuming Inventory Using Resources Supplying Inventory Linking PeopleSoft Production Planning to Your Enterprise Using the System of Record Understanding the Production DataLink P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C ONTENTS iii

4 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft Production Planning Collaborating With PeopleSoft Production Planning Establishing Supply and Demand Analyzing Your Supply Chain Model Creating Flexible Reports Maintaining Plan Data Using Workbenches, Graphical Charts, and Histograms Chapter 2 Setting Up Production Planning Before You Begin Defining PeopleSoft Production Planning-Specific Installation, User, and General Options Defining the Concatenation Code for Configured Items Setting Up Business Units for Your Production Planning System Establishing Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing Options Defining Inventory Attributes Defining Item Attributes by Units Defining Transfer Attributes Defining Forecast Items Setting Up Stocking Periods Setting Up Demand Priority Families Defining Order Management Options Defining Forecast Product Information Defining Purchasing Attributes Defining Manufacturing Options Manufacturing Data Used by Production Planning Defining Resource Changeover Penalties Defining Planning Resource Attributes Using Production Planning Resources in Aggregate or Detail Defining Production Planning Attributes Maintaining Aggregate Items Defining Product Forecast Percentages Defining Master Plan Data Defining Promise and Request Dates Defining Roll Forward Phases Overview of the Roll Forward Feature Setting Up Roll Forward Parameters Setting Up Roll Forward Phases Defining Planning Attributes Defining Work Center Attributes Prioritizing Demand C ONTENTS iv P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

5 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Defining Demand Priority Rules Defining Lateness Tolerances Sourcing Demand Overview of Sourcing Templates Solver Processing of Sourcing Template Data Setting Up Sourcing Templates Defining Sourcing Templates Loading Sourcing Options Generating Sourcing Templates (PLS5000) Verifying Sourcing Options Defining Sourcing Inquiry Selection Criteria Viewing Sourcing Template Details Viewing Sourcing Template - Production Option Details Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details Viewing Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details Defining the Line Schedule Editor Defaults Setting Up Item Changeover Families Defining the Line Schedule Editor Color Scheme Setting Up the Line Schedule Editor General Defaults, Colors, Dimensions, and Time Periods Defining LSE General Settings Defining LSE Dimensions Defining LSE Color Settings Defining LSE Time Periods Setting Up Line Schedule Editor Resource Entries Defaults Defining LSE Balancing Defaults Defining LSE Bar Colors Defaults Defining LSE Filters Defaults Setting Up Bar Item Filters Setting Up Bar Color Filters Viewing the LSE Chart Verifying Production Planning Data Understanding the Data Verification Process Generating the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) Chapter 3 Setting Up the Production DataLink Overview of the Production DataLink Process Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink Reviewing Time Fences Used by Solvers P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C ONTENTS v

6 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Pegged Chain Processing for Solvers Using Solvers to Process a Plan Overview of the Material Planning Solver Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver Verifying Current Supply and Demand Quantities Satisfying Unmet Demand Verifying Demand Priority for Frozen Tasks Ensuring Positive On-Hand Quantity at the Early Fence Sourcing Allocations and Options to Reduce Lead Time Reducing Excess Inventory Making the Plan Capacity Feasible Determining Weighted Priorities for Capacity Planning Improving Plan Quality Checking Effectivities Overview of the LP Solver Enforcing Constraints Planning Features Processed by the LP Solver Overview of Iterative Repair/Optimizer Using the Production DataLink to Create a Master or Material Plan Setting Up Run Types, Plan Types, Time Fences, and WIP/Roll Forward Options Defining General Time Fence Information Defining Frozen Fence Offsets Defining WIP/Roll Forward Details Including Demand and Supply in the Production DataLink Run Defining Demand Options Defining Supply Options Setting Planning Run and Solver Options Selecting a Solver for Plan Generation Defining Material Planning Options Defining Feasible Planning Solver Options Defining Linear Programming Options Defining Iterative Repair Settings Setting Up Command File and Source File Information Verifying Planning Server Connection Settings Chapter 4 Generating the Production Plan Overview of the Production Plan Process Before You Begin Generating the Production Plan C ONTENTS vi P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

7 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Running Planning Solvers Defining Global Preferences Creating a Material Plan Creating a Feasible Plan Generating a Plan Using Linear Programming (LP) Chapter 5 Managing the Master and Material Plans Overview of the Master and Material Planning Process Master Plan Process Flow Material Plan Process Flow Before You Begin Maintaining Master and Material Plans Defining the Master or Material Workbench Search Parameters Using the Master or Material Plan Summary Changing Server Settings Changing Row Types Drilling Down to Maintain Scheduled Receipts Showing Supply Showing Demand Drilling Down to Add or Change Planned Orders Adding Production Orders Adding Purchase Orders Adding Transfers Maintaining Production Orders Maintaining Purchase Orders Maintaining Transfer Orders Analyzing the Master or Material Plan Reviewing the Master or Material Plan Summary Viewing the Master or Material Plan Detail Reviewing Master or Material Plan Exceptions Selecting Exceptions for Review Defining Advanced Filters Reviewing the Results Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Master or Material Plan Overview of the Planning Scorecard Using the Planning Scorecard Page Reviewing Request Date Constraint Violations Reviewing Safety Stock Constraint Violations Reviewing Promise Date Constraint Violations P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C ONTENTS vii

8 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Chapter 6 Reviewing Excess Stock Constraint Violations Reviewing BI Shortage Constraint Violations Reviewing RM Shortage Constraint Violations Reviewing Aggregate Capacity Constraint Violations Reviewing Forecast Fulfillment Constraint Violations Reviewing Transfer Shipment Date Constraint Violations Filtering Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data Managing the Capacity Plan Overview of the Capacity Planning Process Before You Begin Maintaining the Capacity Plan Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters Using the Capacity Summary Viewing the Resource Load Adding Production Viewing the Production Details Viewing the Production Outputs Analyzing the Capacity Plan Viewing the Capacity Plan Summary Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Capacity Plan Filtering Capacity Plan Scorecard Data Viewing Capacity Violations Chapter 7 Committing the Production Plan Overview of the Commit Plan Process Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000) Identifying Planning Message Options Verifying Planning Server Settings Using Unprocessed Messages From a Previous Plan Using the Master Plan Data Page Creating Planning Reports Understanding Planning Report Options Creating Your Own Layout Generating Supply and Demand Detail Understanding Simulation and Master Plan Reporting Generating the Planning Report (PLS2001) Before You Begin C ONTENTS viii P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

9 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Defining Selection Criteria Defining Report Options Specifying Row Types Using the Planning Messages Report (PLS4001) Defining Message Selection Criteria Defining Production, Purchase Order, and Inventory Transfer Message Reporting Options Displaying Planning Item Use Up Information Displaying Planning Use Up Information Generating the Planning Use Up Report Chapter 8 Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management Overview of the Production Messages Review and Application Process Before You Begin Reviewing Production Messages Selecting Production Messages for Review Reviewing the Production Message Summary Reviewing the Production Message Summary Production Details Reviewing Production and Operations Detail Viewing Additional Production Details Viewing Operation Details Reviewing Production Exceptions Reviewing Production Exception Details Applying Production Messages Applying Production Messages Chapter 9 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory Overview of the Inventory Messages Review and Application Process Before You Begin Reviewing Inventory Transfer Messages Selecting Inventory Transfer Messages for Review Reviewing the Inventory Transfer Message Summary Details Displaying Message Details Applying Inventory Transfer Messages Reviewing Inventory Exceptions Reviewing Inventory Planning Exceptions Viewing Inventory Exception Details Reviewing Material Stock Request Messages P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C ONTENTS ix

10 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Selecting Material Stock Request Messages Reviewing the Material Stock Message Summary MSR Details Reviewing Material Stock Request Exceptions Viewing Material Stock Request Exception Details Chapter 10 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing Overview of the Purchasing Planning Messages Review and Application Process Before You Begin Reviewing Purchasing Messages Selecting Purchasing Messages for Review Reviewing the Purchasing Message Summary: PO Details Reviewing Purchasing Exceptions Reviewing Purchasing Exception Details Applying Purchase Messages Chapter 11 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management Overview of the Order Management Planning Messages Review Process Before You Begin Reviewing Sales Order Messages Selecting Sales Order Messages for Review Reviewing the Sales Order Message Summary Reviewing Message Summary: Sales Order Details Reviewing Sales Order Exceptions Reviewing the Sales Order Exception Details Chapter 12 PeopleSoft Production Planning Report Descriptions PeopleSoft Production Planning Standard Reports Standard Financial Reports Index C ONTENTS x P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

11 A BOUT T HIS P EOPLEB OOK The book provides you with the information you will need for implementing and using PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can order the online version by requesting SKU FSCMB8SP1R0, or the hard-copy version by requesting SKU MAPLr8SP1B This section describes information you should know before you begin working with PeopleSoft products and documentation, including PeopleSoft-specific documentation conventions, information specific to the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, how to order additional copies of our documentation, and so on. Before You Begin To benefit fully from the information covered in this book, you need to have a basic understanding of how to use PeopleSoft applications. We recommend that you complete at least one PeopleSoft introductory training course. You should be familiar with navigating around the system and adding, updating, and deleting information using PeopleSoft windows, menus, and pages. You should also be comfortable using the World Wide Web and the Microsoft Windows or Windows NT graphical user interface. Because we assume you already know how to navigate around the PeopleSoft system, much of the information in this book is not procedural. That is, it does not typically provide step-by-step instructions on using tables, pages, and menus. Instead, we provide you with all the information you need to use the system most effectively and to implement your PeopleSoft application according to your organizational or departmental needs. This book expands on the material covered in PeopleSoft training classes. PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals The PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleBook provides you with implementation and processing information for your PeopleSoft Production Planning system. However, there is additional, essential information describing the setup and design of your system that is contained in a companion volume of documentation called PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals. PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals consists of important topics that apply to many or all PeopleSoft applications across the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line. Whether you are implementing only PeopleSoft Production Planning, some combination of products within the product line (for example, PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, Inventory, Purchasing, and Manufacturing), or the entire PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management system, you should be familiar with the contents of this central PeopleBook. It is the starting point for fundamentals such as setting up control tables and administering security. In the PeopleSoft Applications Fundamentals PeopleBook, we've included common information pertinent to all applications in the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, such as P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P REFACE xi

12 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 defining general options. If you're upgrading from a previous PeopleSoft release, you may notice that we've removed some topics or topic headings from the individual application PeopleBooks and consolidated them in this single reference book. You ll now find only application-specific information in your individual application PeopleBooks. This makes the documentation as a whole less redundant. Throughout each PeopleBook, we provide cross-references to PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals and other PeopleBooks. Below you ll find a list of those PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals sections that apply specifically to PeopleSoft Production Planning. Defining Financial and Supply Chain Management General Options describes how to set up your basic structure and processing rules for PeopleSoft Financials and Supply Chain Management applications using pages in the Define General Options menu. Securing Your System explains how to set up application security for your system. The chapter provides you with an overview of the PeopleSoft approach to application security and explains the choices you must make in deciding what level of security to put in place throughout your system, what key fields to secure, and whether it will be done by user IDs or user classes. Maintaining Vendor Information explains how vendor information is positioned in the control hierarchy, and guides you through the process of setting up vendors in the system. It also discusses how to search for, inquire on, approve, inactivate, delete and report on vendors. Structuring Procurement Options explains how to and where to enter basic system and default information that doesn t change or is used repeatedly throughout the systems for many aspects of your payables and purchasing systems. Working With Items discusses how to search for and work with items in the PeopleSoft components. The topics covered include setting up and using substitute items, managing item status, and defining quantity precision rules for item transactions. Defining Item Control Values discusses how to set up item attributes using the Define Item Controls menu. These attributes become the defaults or selection options for new items. Defining Items discusses how to define items for PeopleSoft setid and business unit levels. Items must be defined before you can use them in any PeopleSoft application. Finding Item Information discusses the Inquiry and Report pages under the Define Items and Define Item Control Data menus. Working with Warehouse Management Systems describes the implementation of a full integration between PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Payables, PeopleSoft Order Management, PeopleSoft Inventory and a third-party warehouse management system (WMS). Integrating PeopleSoft with a WMS can help you streamline your order-to-cash and procure-to-pay business processes, which in turn can help you reduce costs, improve service levels, and generate more revenue. Related Documentation To add to your knowledge of PeopleSoft applications and tools, you may want to refer to the documentation of other PeopleSoft applications. You can access additional documentation for P REFACE xii P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

13 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK this release from PeopleSoft Customer Connection ( We post updates and other items on Customer Connection, as well. Important! Before upgrading, it is imperative that you check PeopleSoft Customer Connection for updates to the upgrade instructions. We continually post updates as we refine the upgrade process. Documentation on the Internet You can order additional copies of the PeopleBooks CDs through the Documentation section of the PeopleSoft Customer Connection Web site: You ll also find updates to the documentation for this and previous releases on Customer Connection. Through the Documentation section of Customer Connection, you can download files to add to your PeopleBook library. You'll find a variety of useful and timely materials, including updates to the full PeopleSoft documentation delivered on your PeopleBooks CD. Documentation on CD-ROM Complete documentation for this release is provided on the CD-ROM PeopleSoft Financials/Supply Chain Management PeopleBooks, SKU CD-FSCMB8SP1R0. Your access to PeopleSoft PeopleBooks depends on which PeopleSoft applications you've licensed. You may not have access to some of the PeopleBooks listed here. The CD includes the following PeopleBooks (presented in HTML format) that you can print in whole or in part: PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for Financials and Supply Chain Management PeopleSoft Asset Management PeopleSoft Billing PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleSoft Budgets PeopleSoft Contracts PeopleSoft Cost Management PeopleSoft Deduction Management P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P REFACE xiii

14 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 PeopleSoft Demand Planning PeopleSoft ebill Payment PeopleSoft Engineering PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning PeopleSoft eprocurement PeopleSoft eproduct Management PeopleSoft estore PeopleSoft esupplier Collaboration PeopleSoft Flow Production PeopleSoft General Ledger PeopleSoft Inventory PeopleSoft Inventory Planning PeopleSoft Mobil Time and Expense PeopleSoft Order Management PeopleSoft Order Promising PeopleSoft Payables PeopleSoft Product Configurator PeopleSoft Production Management PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleSoft Projects PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleSoft Quality PeopleSoft Receivables PeopleSoft Remote Order Entry PeopleSoft Resource Management PeopleSoft Treasury PeopleTools Setting Up Your Manufacturing System P REFACE xiv P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

15 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Using PeopleSoft Applications Using PeopleBooks PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions Throughout our product documentation, you will encounter fields or page elements that are used on many application pages or panels. This section lists the most common page elements and provides standard definitions. Field or Page Element As of Date Description Effective Date Definition The last date for which a report or process includes data. Freeflow text up to 30 characters. Date on which a table row becomes effective; the date that an action begins. For example, if you want to close out a ledger on June 30, the effective date for the ledger closing would be July 1. This date also determines when you can view and change the information. Pages or panels and batch processes that use the information use the current row. For more information about effective dates, see PeopleSoft Using PeopleSoft Applications PeopleBook, Working With Pages. EmplID (employee ID) Language or Language Code Process Frequency group box Report ID Unique identification code for an individual associated with your organization. The language in which you want the field labels and report headings of your reports to print. The field values appear as you enter them. Language also refers to the language spoken by an employee, applicant, or non-employee. Designates the appropriate frequency in the Process Frequency group box: Once executes the request the next time the batch process runs. After the batch process runs, the process frequency is automatically set to Don't Run. Always executes the request every time the batch process runs. Don't Run ignores the request when the batch process runs. The report identifier. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P REFACE xv

16 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Field or Page Element Report Manager Process Monitor Run Definition This button takes you to the Report List page, where you can view report content, check the status of a report, and see content detail messages (which show you a description of the report and the distribution list). This button takes you to the Process List page, where you can view the status of submitted process requests. This button takes you to the Process Scheduler request page, where you can specify the location where a process or job runs and the process output format. For more information about the Report List page, the Process List page, and the Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basic. Run Control ID User ID SetID Short Description Standard Unit of Measure (UOM) Unit (Business Unit) A request identification that represents a set of selection criteria for a report or process. The system identifier for the individual who generates a transaction. An identification code that represents a set of control table information or TableSets. A TableSet is a group of tables (records) necessary to define your company s structure and processing options. Freeflow text up to 15 characters. A type of unit used for quantifying in PeopleSoft systems, and usually associated with items. Depending on the application, units of measure might describe dimensions, weights, volumes, or amounts of locations, containers, or business activities. Examples include inches, pounds, workhours, and standard cost dollars. An identification code that represents a high-level organization of business information. You can use a business unit to define regional or departmental units within a larger organization. P REFACE xvi P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

17 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues To help you locate and interpret information, we use a number of standard conventions in our online documentation. Please take a moment to review the following typographical cues: monospace font Bold Indicates PeopleCode. Indicates field names and other page elements, such as buttons and group box labels, when these elements are documented below the page on which they appear. When we refer to these elements elsewhere in the documentation, we set them in Normal style (not in bold). We also use boldface when we refer to navigational paths, menu names, or process actions (such as Save and Run). Italics Indicates a PeopleSoft or other book-length publication. We also use italics for emphasis and to indicate specific field values. When we cite a field value under the page on which it appears, we use this style: field value. We also use italics when we refer to words as words or letters as letters, as in the following: Enter the number 0, not the letter O. KEY+KEY Cross-references Indicates a key combination action. For example, a plus sign (+) between keys means that you must hold down the first key while you press the second key. For ALT+W, hold down the ALT key while you press W. The phrase "For more information" indicates where you can find additional documentation on the topic at hand. Capitalized titles in italics indicate the title of another PeopleBook. For example: For more information about billing, see PeopleSoft Billing PeopleBook. Capitalized titles in italics followed by chapter title in quotes refer to a chapter in another PeopleBook. For example: For more information about establishing rate templates, see PeopleSoft Projects PeopleBook, Integrating With PeopleSoft Billing and PeopleSoft Contracts. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P REFACE xvii

18 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Capitalized titles in quotes refer to another chapter of this PeopleBook. For example: For more information about contract status security, see Securing Your PeopleSoft Contracts System. Capitalized titles refer to sections within this chapter of this PeopleBook. For example: For more information about Defining Contract Statuses, see Defining Your Own Contract Statuses. Text in this bar indicates information that you should pay particular attention to as you work with your PeopleSoft system. If the note is preceded by Important!, the note is crucial and includes information that concerns what you need to do for the system to function properly. Text in this bar indicates cross-references to related or additional information. Text within this bar indicates a crucial configuration consideration. Pay very close attention to these warning messages. Page and Panel Introductory Table In the documentation, each page or panel description in the application will include an introductory table with pertinent information about the page. Not all of the information will be available for all pages or panels. Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Describes how you would use the page or process. Gives the system name of the panel or process as specified in the PeopleTools Application Designer. For example, the Object Name of the Detail Calendar panel is DETAIL_CALENDAR1. Provides the path for accessing the page or process. Specifies which objects must have been defined before you use the page or process. Specifies the keys and other information necessary to access the page. For example, SetID and Calendar ID are required to open the Detail Calendar page. P REFACE xviii P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

19 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Comments and Suggestions Your comments are important to us. We encourage you to tell us what you like, or what you would like changed about our documentation, PeopleBooks, and other PeopleSoft reference and training materials. Please send your suggestions to: PeopleSoft Manufacturing Product Documentation Manager PeopleSoft, Inc Hacienda Drive Pleasanton, CA Or send comments by to the authors of the PeopleSoft documentation at: [email protected] While we cannot guarantee to answer every message, we will pay careful attention to your comments and suggestions. We are always improving our product communications for you. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P REFACE xix

20

21 C HAPTER 1 Overview of PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleSoft Production Planning offers an advanced planning system that uses Web-based access to enable simultaneous optimization of plant-level procurement and production. Using a powerful Planning engine, the application simultaneously solves material, capacity, inventory targets, and customer request and promise dates to produce supply chain schedules. Breaking the traditional mold of ERP systems, PeopleSoft built a planning application around the concepts of constraint-based optimization. The decision to embed advanced planning and scheduling technology, instead of building traditional MPS and MRP planning systems, has resulted in a system that provides advanced planning solutions to help respond to today s quickchanging business environment. The application s interface structure makes it easy for you to follow a logical business process flow. PeopleSoft Production Planning focuses on a clearly defined business process that makes it possible to work with a production plan at every stage of the planning cycle. For example, you can look at demands and at constraints on meeting those demands throughout your supply chain. Then you can efficiently create an optimal Master or Material Plan that highlights and resolves exceptions within the supply chain. What Is PeopleSoft Production Planning? PeopleSoft Production Planning is an integrated suite of intelligent agent applications that helps you plan and schedule your enterprise production plans. It gathers information from other PeopleSoft applications using the Production DataLink and loads it into a memory-resident data model so you can easily create and solve your production plan. After processing your data, PeopleSoft Production Planning presents plans and schedules to you that you can review, approve, and then apply back to your PeopleSoft database. PeopleSoft Production Planning is an intelligent assistant, showing you potential problems with the plan and schedule. It graphically depicts exceptions, enabling you to drill-down to find out what could be keeping your operation from meeting its objectives. Working with the application, you resolve these exceptions. You can make manual changes to the plan with an easy-to-use graphical interface or you can let PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically resolve the exceptions with its intelligent exception-based solvers. The more successful an enterprise is in controlling its supply chain, the more responsive it can be to the constantly changing demands placed on it by the marketplace. PeopleSoft Production Planning makes it possible for you to interact in real time with the planning model. As you P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-1

22 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 interact with the planning model, you can evaluate the impacts of changes to the plan and quickly respond. Traditional MRP Approaches Traditional planning approaches, Material Requirements Planning (MRP) and Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II), were used as early as the 1970s and were aimed at making the production environment more predictable and, ideally, increasing bottom-line profits. Material Requirements Planning MRP was the first major breakthrough in attempting to control the supply chain. The advent of computing technology enabled companies to be more effective at demand management. It was easier for manufacturers using MRP to view a production facility s bills of material, inventory data, product lead times, and master production schedule. MRP consists of three major components used to organize information: The current finished goods demand, represented by the Master Production Schedule (MPS). The required items and their order of assembly, represented by the bill of material (BOM). Inventory item files that track current allocations and storage location. The information from these three sources enabled manufacturers to become more productive by reducing investments in inventory, facilities, and management efforts. Manufacturing Resource Planning MRP II provides effective planning of all resources in a manufacturing company. MRP II measures operational planning in units and dollars. It also provides a simulation capability to answer what-if questions. MRP II is made up of a variety of functions that are linked together. MRP II consists of four major components: Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) Master Production Schedule (MPS) Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP) Demand Requirements Planning The information generated by MRP II is used throughout the company: Production uses it to schedule production; Finance receives total cost information; Order Administration receives current production data and inventory information as input for Available To Promise (ATP); and Human Resources accesses the information on employee costs and utilization. The evolution of MRP to MRP II resulted in even better supply chain management, with companies becoming more responsive to ever-changing demands. 1-2 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

23 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK However, it was a bit cumbersome and at times difficult to manage. The information that needs to flow through the MRP II system is extensive. Additionally, each step doesn t consider the constraints in the next step of the planning cycle. MRP II process flow doesn t consider the cumulative impact of constraints on each consecutive step of the planning cycle The cyclical process of developing a master production schedule (MPS), rough-cut capacity plan (RCCP), materials resource planning (MRP), resource requirements planning (RRP), and detailed capacity requirements planning (CRP) may take days to perform. Furthermore, detailed problems uncovered in the MRP and CRP process might necessitate changes to the MPS. Enterprise Resource Planning Using PeopleSoft Production Planning With our vision of reinventing the planning process for the enterprise, PeopleSoft continues to align best practices with leading-edge technology. We ve streamlined the old planning paradigm into a single model that considers capacity and material simultaneously and eliminates the need for distinctly different planning processes like MPS, RCCP, MRP, and CRP. PeopleSoft s Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solution leads a trend in globally enabled enterprise Web-based manufacturing systems. It is one of the first manufacturing application suites to embed advanced planning and scheduling capabilities (APS) for solving the supply chain and providing planning feasibility at the plant and enterprise levels. Focusing on the principle that advanced planning and scheduling are essential to a complete and competitive package, PeopleSoft s strategy enables manufacturers to seamlessly blend planning and execution activities. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-3

24 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 PeopleSoft Production Planning considers both supply and demand as it considers resource and material constraints when generating and solving a production plan for your enterprise PeopleSoft Production Planning provides interactive decision support tools for planners. The system also provides integrated solutions for procurement, production, and distribution resources. Moving ahead of traditional MRP and ERP solutions, PeopleSoft Production Planning is built around the concepts of in-memory constraint-based solvers. The decision to embed advanced planning and scheduling technology, instead of building traditional MPS and MRP planning systems, has produced an application with the management and production flexibility required to respond proactively to changes on the production floor, from the customer, and from the market. What PeopleSoft Production Planning Offers You To maintain a competitive advantage in today s global marketplace, you need a single software solution to manage and synchronize your entire supply chain. PeopleSoft Production Planning consists of tightly knit and rich functionality that simplifies, automates, and augments your business processes and data flow to provide a comprehensive, global supply chain planning solution. PeopleSoft Production Planning offers maximum flexibility to handle all phases of your planning needs. You can make planning decisions that take into account multiple constraints you ve defined. You can also quickly create multiple what-if scenarios that enable you to assess and prepare for critical alternate situations. 1-4 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

25 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Managing Business Processes and Data Flow Using PeopleSoft Production Planning adds simplicity to the planning process. The flow of planning data helps you manage the planning process by dividing it into a series of sequential processes that include different types of plans to meet your enterprise needs. With a focus on practical business processes and the flow of data, the application assists you in developing planning models, generating production plans, and intervening to make adjustments to the plans. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following types of production plans to assist you in supply chain planning: Master Plan Material Plan Capacity Plan Focuses on the manufacture of the items. It looks at the top-level demand to produce a schedule of planned orders and order quantities for items at each manufacturing site. The plan tells you if you can meet the forecasted demand and provides you a production schedule. Focuses on the availability of raw materials, subassemblies, and substitutes to meet top-level demand at each manufacturing site. Provides a way for you to ensure the capacity of critical resources to meet demand. With the plan, you can bucket aggregate capacity by days, weeks, or months, and use alternate resource capacity rather than moving tasks forward or backward in time to meet capacity. Material requirements are maintained during the processing of the plan. Regardless of the type of plan you use to meet business requirements, you ll use an incremental business process that logically takes you from one stage to another until you have a completed, ready-to-use, and feasible plan. Several steps are required to create these plans. To develop simulated, master, material, or capacity plans, use the following steps: 1. Establish production-planning data for other PeopleSoft applications. This data ranges from business units, items, and general options to inventory policies and aggregate resource attributes and sales and purchase data. You also set up data specifically for PeopleSoft Production Planning, such as sourcing preferences and demand priorities. 2. Set up the production-planning model using the Production DataLink. The DataLink provides you a wide variety of options and the flexibility to develop a plan that explicitly meets your enterprise s production-planning goals. Using the Production DataLink, you can indicate which types of supply and demand parameters should be included in the data model. In addition to setting up the model, you incorporate solver settings at this stage of the process. Solver settings enable you to automatically generate an initial plan upon loading of the model into memory. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-5

26 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY Generate a production plan using the planning model. If you want to override how solvers process the plan, you can make manual adjustments during this stage. After an initial production plan is created, use this stage to run iterations to the plan to improve its quality. You can also generate simulated plans. You use these plans to perform what-if simulations. You can t send a simulation plan back to the PeopleSoft database for execution, only for reporting. At this point of the business planning process, you must ensure that a Planning server is running and that you are linked to it. The server needs to be running for the remainder of the business process stages. A facility is provided at each stage of the process to link to the server. 4. Review the production plan using tools available in the PeopleSoft Production Planning interface. These include workbenches; Planning Scorecards; plan summaries, details, and exceptions; and detailed reports. Each tool provides different approaches to plan information and enables you to view the plan from a different perspective. You can review additional details and use graphical interfaces (such as spreadsheets and Gantt charts) using the advanced planning client. 5. Maintain the production plan using workbenches and summaries. Manual intervention enables you to make the planning decisions that system data can t handle. Using the Planning server, you can also use spreadsheets and Gantt charts to maintain the plan. After you are satisfied with the changes, you can run one or more iterations of the plan to fine-tune its quality. 6. Commit the production plan using planning messages that are sent from the Planning server and that reside in your PeopleSoft Production Planning interface to finalize elements of your master or material Plan. The preceding process stages apply to any Master, Material, or Capacity Plan you might be developing. Using Seamless Integration to Create Production Plans PeopleSoft Production Planning is part of an integrated suite of intelligent-agent applications that help you develop Master, Material, and Capacity Plans for your entire supply chain. The applications run in conjunction with a powerful Planning engine that efficiently handles relatively large amounts of data. In this integrated system, PeopleSoft Production Planning imports data from PeopleSoft Order Management, Inventory, Purchasing, Demand Planning, and Manufacturing and sends critical data to PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, and Production Management. The results from PeopleSoft Production Planning are also included in the data model used by PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. 1-6 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

27 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Production DataLink enables you to pull data from other PeopleSoft applications and place it in the PeopleSoft Production Planning system. You have the flexibility to run the Production DataLink as often as you need. Using the PeopleSoft Production Planning interface, you can run this engine using a Planning server without leaving the interface. In addition, you use seamless integration to determine how you want the production-planning model processed by solvers. Solvers make up a set of planning tools that generate Master or Material Plans ranging from simple material plans or material- and capacity-feasible plans to more advanced plans that make manufacturing decisions through a series of iterations and plan violation repairs. Planning solvers are designed for you either to automate the planning process or to assist you in a seamless interactive mode to develop a feasible Master or Material Plan. This capability helps you make planning decisions from a business-unit level down to the manufacturing floor with minimal navigation, easy data entry, and an intuitive interface structure. The following diagram displays how you control planning solvers using your workstation. Web-based user interface versus Windows-based interface Two user interfaces are available for interacting with the PeopleSoft Production Planning model. One is Web-based and enables access to planning information through standard Internet browsers. Data in the Web browser is presented in traditional spreadsheet formats but is powered by the advanced planning solvers available in the Planning server. The other user interface is Windows-based and enables a graphical display and maintenance capability of the planning model. This includes spreadsheet formats available in the Web-based interface along with interactive Gantt charts and histograms. You can also run iterations of the plan to improve its quality from the workstation before committing the plan. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-7

28 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Moving and Balancing the Supply Chain A supply chain for an item includes the top-level demand, such as a forecast or sales orders, for the item. In addition, the chain is made up of the supplies to meet the demand, which might include production or purchase orders. To facilitate keeping demand and supply balanced for production plans, PeopleSoft Production Planning uses pegged chains. Pegged chains tie top-level demand together with the tasks that produce supplies for the demand. In doing so, solvers in the Planning engine can explicitly move, track, and record which supplies they are using to satisfy that demands. This means that you can track the production or sourcing of demand for a specific sales order or forecast. Using Planning servers, you can also view this link graphically. Using workbenches in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can review the pegged demand and supply. The visibility and ease of maintenance help you make decisions about what production tasks you can move to better expedite special orders, make the best use of resources, or improve the efficiency and quality of your production plan. Using PeopleSoft Production Planning to Manage Your Shop Floor In a manufacturing environment, you are constantly juggling so many objectives that managing them can seem to be an impossible task. As a planner, you re asked to: Keep inventory at a minimum. Maintain quality. Maintain an even load on available resources. Produce to the plan. Meet shipment due dates. Keep costs down. Using PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can maintain a full model of material and capacity. You model how to replenish every time you have a shortage. Using production options to build items, transfer options to transfer material where it is needed, and purchase options to indicate when and where to purchase items, the system can build and solve a production plan that gets the material and resources where you need them when you need them. The planning system makes possible the combination of multiple resources into single planning runs, such as material and capacity or material and costs. A wide selection of resources can be combined. You can create predictive data models, which can be optimized with one another. Synchronized with supply chain execution processes (such as rescheduling, production order creation, purchasing, transfers, or capacity leveling), advanced planning creates a system capable of supporting faster manufacturing cycles. 1-8 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

29 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Traditional Planning Process Planning Interactively Master Scheduling Rough Cut Capacity Planning MPS RCCP MRP CRP Detailed Material Planning (MRP) Detailed Capacity Planning (CRP) Scenarios Scenarios Scenarios Scenarios Scenarios Executable Plan Executable Plan Traditional Process PeopleSoft Production Planning -Bucketed logic -Time consuming sequential process -I/O intensive -Provides data instead of information -Does not view constraints at next level -Interactive process -All dependencies are considered -Realtime capability -Adaptable to changing business needs -Graphical workbench -Unlimited simulations Comparing the traditional MRP planning process to the advanced planning and scheduling process embedded in PeopleSoft Production Planning. By solving factory-specific planning and detailed schedules in your production facilities, PeopleSoft Production Planning focuses on such situations as the following: What customer demand should be fulfilled above others when supply isn t enough to meet all demands? If material arrives late, what s the impact going to be on the entire schedule? How can the impact be minimized? A line goes down. Where can production be rescheduled? Can promise dates still be met? It s quarter end. How do you ship the most revenue for this week? Sales orders are exceeding projected forecasts. Are the material and capacity available to meet this additional demand while still observing material lead times? The key to feasible and optimized planning is the ability to simultaneously balance multiple business constraints. Constraints are schedule limits that, when violated, must be repaired to produce a valid schedule. But constraints, by their nature, are often in conflict with one another: minimizing capacity issues may cause promise-date constraint violations; minimizing promisedate violations may cause problems with material availability constraints. With each constraint P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-9

30 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 battling the others, the planner s role is producing a schedule that best meets the business objectives of the day. PeopleSoft Production Planning: redefining the planning paradigm With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can recognize shorter planning process cycle times, shorter what-if scenario cycle times, forward modeling of key inventories, and a single source of planning data. PeopleSoft Production Planning helps speed the planning process, reduces inventory carrying costs, and gets you closer to realizing the utmost capacity on your factories floors. Understanding Plans PeopleSoft Production Planning represents plans in memory to enable fast computation. There s no indication of running a consolidation job to compute projected on-hand balances, netted requirements, or any of the other background processes such as in MRP systems. PeopleSoft Production Planning always computes the ramifications of scheduling an event. A plan is a set of tasks that consumes inventory, supplies inventory, or uses capacity resources. Tasks model production, purchasing, transferring, and shipping. Each task has a start time and an end time: For production tasks, these are the start and end of the production IDs and schedules. For purchase orders, these are the order date and the delivery date. For interunit transfers, these are the ship date and arrival date. For shipments, these are the ship date and the delivery date for forecast demand and for customer orders and quotes. PeopleSoft Production Planning dynamically keeps track of the availability of inventory and capacity as these start and end times change within the data model. It does so by transforming BOMs and bills of resources (BORs) into constraints when you create new tasks or orders. The application maintains the effect of constraints on the schedule as you create, delete, or change tasks or orders. It then designates constraint violations on the Planning Scorecard O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

31 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The receipt of material based on a scheduled purchase order delivery is a real-world event that PeopleSoft Production Planning represents as a PO delivery task. This task has an effect on the projected on-hand balance of material for the delivered item. The system immediately calculates the change in the projected on-hand quantity of the delivered material when the PO delivery is added to the schedule. No consolidation or netting process is required. When you add a production task to the schedule, the system computes its effects on available balances of material and capacity availability. A transfer order or interunit transfer represents both a shipment and receipt of inventory between two business units. Production planning recognizes the impact on inventory for both the shipping and receiving sides of a transfer order. A sales order represents the shipment of material to a customer from a location under PeopleSoft Production Planning s control. The system represents this as a shipment of material and changes the projected on-hand balance in the future. Working With Constraints PeopleSoft Production Planning stores planning and scheduling knowledge in objects called constraints. Constraints test for exceptions and have intelligent heuristics for repairing exceptions. When PeopleSoft Production Planning explodes production and assigns times to operations on the schedule, it attaches constraints to the operations. It then refers back to the tasks causing the exceptions. You view the violated constraints of the system by viewing a Scorecard. When PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically resolves exceptions, it needs to know what trade-offs it can make in over-constrained scenarios. There are many options available when running the PeopleSoft Production Planning solvers to resolve violated constraints associated with material and capacity. For more information about solvers available in PeopleSoft Production Planning, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Understanding the Interactive Approach to Supply Chain Management PeopleSoft Production Planning vastly improves the way you interact with your company s information systems. Formerly, you would enter order and inventory transactions into your MRP or ERP system on a daily basis, and the system would keep track of inventory balances and order status. Either weekly or monthly, you would create a material requirements plan with a background transaction that could take many hours to run: overnight or even over a weekend. When you came back into the office, you would have to manually search through a massive printout to find exceptions. You would have to devise reactions to the exceptions and execute them manually without any opportunity to simulate the ramifications of your decisions on the supply chain. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-11

32 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Now, PeopleSoft Production Planning helps you quickly identify your operational exceptions and provides assistance in delivering optimal responses to those exceptions. You can immediately ask for your exceptions, such as capacity overloads, late orders, or inventory shortages. A Planning Scorecard provides you with this information. You drill down, using the constraint tabs, to find specific order, item, or capacity problems. PeopleSoft Production Planning is eventdriven. You no longer need to spend enormous amounts of time analyzing situations to identify problems, they are simply presented to you to drill down and reconcile. Fixing problems is easy with PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can change plans and schedules in a number of ways: You can move production orders around on Gantt charts. You can review production quantities in spreadsheets. You can use Material and Capacity workbenches. You also use PeopleSoft Production Planning to change due dates or delete planned production, purchase, or transfer orders. You can automatically resolve exceptions. As you resolve problems and make a production plan feasible, you use solvers that make it possible for you to alternate between automated and manual control of plans as shown in the following diagram: 1-12 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

33 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK You can mix manual and automatic optimization to control PeopleSoft Production Planning For more information about using Solvers, see Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Using an Integrated Model of Material and Capacity PeopleSoft Production Planning operates as your intelligent assistant by maintaining a full model of material and capacity. You draw on this model to determine how to replenish items when you have shortages. PeopleSoft Production Planning knows about building items through production options, transferring items through transfer options, and purchasing items through purchase options. Tasks in the system consume inventory, use resources, and supply inventory. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-13

34 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Although you maintain production options in the system of record (PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management), you can use the production option pages for viewing data structures such as production options, bill of material (BOM) entries, bill of resources (BOR) entries, and supply entries. You can also use this form to change the data structures to perform what-if simulations. Consuming Inventory Each operation in a production option can consume inventory. You enter the option data, in this case the bill of material (BOM) and routing, in PeopleSoft Bills and Routings. PeopleSoft Production Planning ties the BOM and routing entries to the operations of a build option. Each build option operation consumes items. PeopleSoft Production Planning ensures that the appropriate material is consumed depending on when you schedule the operation. Component effectivity dates enable you to model engineering change orders (ECOs). PeopleSoft Production Planning includes a buildable inventory (BI) constraint and a raw material (RM) constraint. Use the BI constraint for finished goods items and their buildable subassemblies. Use the RM constraint to model purchased items. Using Resources The bill of resource (BOR) transactions associate resource requests with routing operations. Each entry asks for a class of resource and a quantity. PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically ensures that the instance of the resource assigned to an operation is a member of the BOR s assigned resource class. Supplying Inventory Each operation in a routing can supply inventory. Supplies are represented as production outputs within planning. For more information about outputs, see PeopleSoft Production Management PeopleBook, Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules. Linking PeopleSoft Production Planning to Your Enterprise PeopleSoft Production Planning uses data extracted from PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management. You maintain all data within the associated applications, including static data (such as item attributes and bills of material) and dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production orders). As activity occurs, the planning system receives relevant data using the Production DataLink. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses static data from PeopleSoft Bills and Routings and Production Management and dynamic data from PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, Order Management, and Production Management O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

35 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK PeopleSoft Production Planning works with other PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management applications to provide a comprehensive, constraint-based production plan PeopleSoft Production Planning gathers data from other PeopleSoft applications through the Production DataLink and converts the data to an object-oriented form in memory. PeopleSoft Production Planning performs batch extracts or incrementally grabs the net changes from your databases. After processing your data, the system presents you with plans and schedules. It can also tell you what s wrong with the plans and schedules. These exceptions are graphically depicted on a Planning Scorecard panel. Working with PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can resolve these exceptions. You make changes to a plan or schedule with an easy-to-use graphical interface, or you can have PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically resolve exceptions with its solvers. Using the System of Record The PeopleSoft Production Planning server is an in-memory application. Creating the production plan in memory enables you to plan multiple scenarios very quickly. However, the in-memory system provides no permanent storage of data. This happens in the PeopleSoft database applications that interact with PeopleSoft Production Planning. All items, for example, are added through PeopleSoft Inventory and then sent to the planning in-memory server. The PeopleSoft database applications are the system of record. The user interface for PeopleSoft Production Planning can receive direct user input in memory without going through the system of record. New items, for example, can be added through the user interface in PeopleSoft Production Planning, but for simulation purposes only. However, new planned orders and changes to order quantities and dates are passed from the Planning server back to the system of record. The only records that can be added to the user interface and passed back to the system of record are for planned supply orders. If you enter a new planned purchase order online in a planning session, it will be passed back to the Purchasing application as a new planned supply order. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-15

36 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Changes to existing supply orders can also be made online in PeopleSoft Production Planning with respect to start and end dates. These changes are passed back in the Receive Planning Messages process. Any other changes will not propagate back to the system of record. Understanding the Production DataLink PeopleSoft Production Planning uses data extracted from your Supply Chain Management databases. You maintain all data within these associated applications, be it static data (such as item attributes and bills of material) or dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production orders). When you want to generate and analyze a plan, you ll move the data to the Planning server and a planning in-memory engine using the Production DataLink. To create appropriate input for PeopleSoft Production Planning, the system combines DataLink programming elements into scripts. Use these scripts to: Extract information from PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, Order Management, Product Configurator, Production Management, and Bills and Routings. You use Process Scheduler to run the DataLink. Transform the data into transactional commands that PeopleSoft Production Planning understands. Load a command file into memory on the Planning server. The following diagram illustrates the process used by the Production DataLink to produce a plan you can analyze, maintain, and commit. PO Staging Load Review Transfer Messages Apply Transfers SQR PLS1000 Exported.Command File In Memory Optimization Review/ Approve Purchase Messages Updating the System of Record Process Planning Messages Review/ Approve Planning Messages PeopleSoft Manufacturing Database SQR PLS2000 Running the Planning Process Planning Server Exported Schedule Client Station PeopleSoft Production Planning cycles PeopleSoft Production Planning cycles separately from the PeopleSoft system of record: accepted plans and schedules are sent back to the system of record through a streamlined export process. The application maintains the data input as well as the optimization results in memory. When the planning session completes, you invoke utilities to extract and load these results from memory into ASCII files. A PeopleSoft SQR verifies the data against the data already in the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management database and loads it into planning message tables for your review in 1-16 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

37 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Inventory, Purchasing, and Order Management. You then review, approve, and apply planning messages in each area. Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft Production Planning Planning solvers are designed for you to automate the planning process or to assist you in an interactive mode to develop an executable plan. The capability of this set of planning tools ranges from developing a simple material and capacity planning to helping you make advanced sourcing decisions. Solvers help you make planning decisions from an enterprise level down to the manufacturing floor. You use solvers to create viable medium-term material and capacity requirement plans that are easy to understand and use. For medium-term planning, you can use solvers available in the Production DataLink to determine what is required to meet all demands and make your plans material- and capacity-feasible. Material feasibility means that the longest cumulative lead-time exists within a doable time frame where there are no material shortages. Capacity feasibility means that there are no critical capacity violations for aggregate resources that are marked for repair in the planning time period. The following solvers are available: Material Planning Solver This solver provides a simple plan that resolves material shortages. It also provides a variety of options, such as capacity smoothing, generating fixed-period requirements, and consolidating purchase orders. The Material Planning Solver provides a good starting point for generating a feasible plan. You can create a material plan for any combination of master- or material-planning items in PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can start the Material Planning Solver when you generate a plan or run the Production DataLink. For more information about running this solver, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Feasible Planning Solver This solver tries to resolve all material and capacity exceptions and to meet all due dates, using demand priority and minimizing lateness as much as possible. The solver also minimizes excess inventory and tries to maintain just-in-time scheduling and preserve existing supply-demand relationships. You can start the Feasible Planning Solver when you generate a plan or run the Production DataLink. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-17

38 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about running this solver, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. LP Solver (Linear Programming Solver) This solver is a more complex planning tool that models the supply chain and computes schedules that optimize a selected objective while satisfying a set of specified constraints on operations. It is especially designed to work with reasonably large data sets. The modeling process extracts basic supply chain information from the Planning engine data structures and generates an aggregated supply chain model in linear programming form. The solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacityfeasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions that feed into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan. You can start the LP Solver when you generate a plan or run the Production DataLink. For more information about running this solver, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Iterative Repair Iterative Repair is an advanced planning tool available for creating a plan or detailed schedule. It is also called the Optimizer, and you can run it by itself or as part of the overall planning process. While we do not recommend it, you can run the Optimizer as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning Solver. Iterative Repair starts an analysis of a plan and seeks to repair each problem it finds, at the same time attempting to minimize the impact of its improvements on other aspects of the schedule. You use the Production DataLink to start the solver and define its settings. For more information about running this solver, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Collaborating With PeopleSoft Production Planning In many organizations today, teams at plant locations around the world conduct production meetings on a weekly or daily basis: planners, product management specialists, and procurement specialists wrestle with competing constraints to balance supply and demand. Supply chain planning requires multisite coordination, and PeopleSoft Production Planning provides around O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

39 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK the-world collaboration capabilities to help satisfy demand with the inventory and capacity of the whole enterprise. Planners can easily conduct an online planning session from their own business unit, each able to see what changes others are suggesting. The result is a completely new approach to enterprisewide planning that dramatically reduces planning cycle time and ensures that all critical personnel can participate in the process. Applying a collaborative architecture, planners from around the world can create global supply chain plans to resolve supply chain conflicts You can access a remote Planning server using a standard modem. The planning client can also fully interact with the server over ordinary phone lines. This enables remote desktop and portable systems to participate fully in the planning process from home or on the road. You can provide this access to key suppliers, field sales staff, or potential customers who need the latest information on product availability. Establishing Supply and Demand PeopleSoft Production Planning creates the demand plan for a single plant, including production schedules, material requirements plan (MRP), and capacity requirements plan (CRP). The application calculates a time-phased production schedule that is passed on to Production Management for execution. It also creates purchase order recommendations for Purchasing to ensure sufficient supply. The production plan is calculated using demand in the form of forecasts, customer orders and quotes, production component demand, and transfer demand less supply in the form of quantityon-hand balances in inventory, outstanding purchase orders in PeopleSoft Purchasing, and work in process in PeopleSoft Production Management. It then applies constraints (such as capacity constraints, inventory target levels from inventory, automatic replenishment, and due dates for the production) to generate a feasible plan. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-19

40 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Sales Quotations Sales orders Forecasts-- item and product Transfer orders Material stock requests Component list Planning parameters Bills of material Routings Demand PeopleSoft Production Planning Planning model Supply Quantity on order Quantity on hand Capacity crews machines tools Production orders Purchase orders Transfer Orders PeopleSoft Production Planning brings incoming demand together with your manufacturing planning parameters and current quantities to generate required supply Analyzing Your Supply Chain Model A number of inquiries are available for you to view and analyze data before either committing the plan or running another iteration of the plan. PeopleSoft Production Planning provides the following inquiries: Plan Summary Details The Master or Material Plan Summary provides you with an aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and demand for a business unit item. You can use the summary as part of the workbench where you can make changes to the plan or as a stand alone display-only detailed review. The Master or Material Plan Detail Inquiry displays the sequence of supply and demand over time for an item. You use the inquiry when you review the sequencing of demand and supply for an item O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

41 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Exceptions Planning Scorecard Use the Master or Material Plan Exceptions Inquiry to review exceptions for individual items in a plan. An exception is a condition that prevents the master or material plan from being feasible. The Exceptions Inquiry and Planning Scorecard display the same data. The main difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to review all exceptions for an item in the same grid, while the Planning Scorecard provides some summary features by exception type. The inquiry also displays additional problems that may not be in the Planning Scorecard, such as planned demand before current time. Use the Planning Scorecard to review the efficiency of your overall production plan. It displays constraint violations, the number of violations, and a score for the violations. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint violations in a schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is. You can also quickly analyze and troubleshoot your production plans for your supply chain through Planning servers using the Supply Chain Viewer. This graphical tool builds a block diagram of your supply chain model, from where you can see detailed information about problems by drilling down on a business unit node. The Supply Chain Viewer maps your business units and all possible connections between them. You can perform a query using the Planning Scorecard and view a business unit s inventory movement or resource usage by clicking that business unit to bring up standard pages, such as spreadsheets and graphical charts. You can also view transfer and purchase options, as well as vendor and business unit information and pegged supplies and demand. When you use the Supply Chain Viewer: A diagram is automatically generated from the business unit, supplier, and production-order data in the server. You ll work with a local copy of the diagram. Filters help limit the number of objects displayed. You can use separate check boxes to prevent displaying vendor or customer sites. You can display the Vendor or Business Unit pages, as well as a Planning Scorecard for a business unit, by right-clicking the vendor or business unit. You can display the Production Option page by double-clicking an arc in the diagram. The colors of the business units correspond to the scoring scenario you choose. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-21

42 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Creating Flexible Reports A critical measure of an effective, enterprise-wide planning system is its ability to produce accurate and timely reports with a minimum effort. With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can take advantage of innovative relational reporting of all your PeopleSoft Production Planning data. You can create your own reports quickly and easily, dramatically enhancing productivity. PeopleSoft Production Planning offers you a wide range of query and reporting possibilities. You can use any of our standard reports as delivered, or alter them to suit your specific needs. Also, our relational data structure enables you to create your own reports easily and quickly. PeopleSoft Production Planning is event-driven. You no longer need to spend enormous amounts of time analyzing situations to identify problems: they are simply presented to you to drill down and reconcile. With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can: Generate planned purchase order and reschedule message reports. Determine current and future inventory levels graphically and highlight problem areas with histograms. Use the Planning server to access Gantt charts to visualize what tasks are necessary to complete a schedule, determine the length and quantity of the tasks, and reschedule the task using drag and drop. Report horizontal planning data by selecting and naming only row types that you want to see. Row types can include supply, demand, on-hand quantities, and available to promise. You can dynamically select the data to be reported. Maintaining Plan Data Using Workbenches, Graphical Charts, and Histograms You can work with planning data using a number of tools, beginning with Master and Material Plan Workbenches. You can use the pages to make changes to the plans. You can change production, purchase, and transfer order dates and quantities for the plans. You use the respective workbenches to access single items to work with. The workbenches display exceptions, planned actions, and planned transfers for the replenishment of distribution or master items. The Capacity Plan Workbench makes it possible for you to search all resources and identify those that have capacity violations. You first use the workbench to view the rough-cut capacity plan details based on certain selection criteria. After you identify overloaded resources, you can view the loads in a bucketed format over time from the capacity summary, making manual adjustments to the plan to resolve capacity problems. PeopleSoft Production Planning s graphical tools enable you to easily drag and drop time-based information to manipulate plans and run quick, interactive simulations. Using Planning servers, you can efficiently reschedule tasks in plans, update planned orders, and release orders. The planning system provides histograms you can use to visually determine inventory levels. Using 1-22 O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

43 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK the servers, you can also maintain tasks with Gantt charts and make use of several time-based spreadsheets. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL O VERVIEW OF P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING 1-23

44

45 C HAPTER 2 Setting Up Production Planning Before you use PeopleSoft Production Planning, you must define attributes in PeopleSoft Production Planning as well as in other applications within the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management application suite. This section details the key setup pages and components and describes how they affect PeopleSoft Production Planning. Before You Begin Before you begin defining key data elements to support the PeopleSoft Production Planning process, you ll need to verify that your installation options are complete, your planning-specific general options are defined, and your PeopleSoft system backbone attribute settings are correct. Defining PeopleSoft Production Planning-Specific Installation, User, and General Options Before you get started actually setting up planning data, there are several planning-related pages you need to set up and maintain in the Define General Options menu. Most of the data you set up using these pages you should already have entered when you set up other PeopleSoft applications, such as PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Inventory, Purchasing, and Order Management. In addition, you should: Define forecast sets to create what-if scenarios with different versions of the material and capacity plan based on different forecasts using the Forecast Sets page. Define planner codes so you can use them to filter information for most pages and processes in PeopleSoft Production Planning using the Planner Code page. Create Planning server templates using the Planning Server Definition page. Planning server templates enable you to automatically transfer the transaction data and plan parameters directly to the Planning engine to generate, analyze, and implement your plan. These templates make it easy for you to change the host machine or database you are linked to. Define installation default Planning server information based on Planning server templates using the Installation Options - Planning page. Select your own user default Planning servers based on your user preference using the User Preferences - Planning page. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-1

46 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about setting up General Options, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management General Options. Defining the Concatenation Code for Configured Items If you re using PeopleSoft Product Configurator, you need to define a concatenation code to pass the necessary configuration information for the item to PeopleSoft Production Planning. If the item uses configuration codes, the item and configuration code are concatenated together (based on the concatenation code information you define) in the Production DataLink. You define this concatenation code using the Installation Options - Planning page in the Define General Options menu. All attributes for configured items come from the Item Attributes by Unit value defined for the generic item. These definitions are passed to PeopleSoft Production Planning for each configuration code. This means that the planning attributes established for the generic configured item will be used for all configurations of the item. We strongly suggest that you run the Production Configuration process before running the Production DataLink process. For more information about the product configuration process, see PeopleSoft Product Configurator PeopleBook, Establishing Items and Products for Configuration. Setting Up Business Units for Your Production Planning System With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you don t need to set up business units specific to PeopleSoft Production Planning. Instead, you need to make sure that you create business units to support supply chain information sharing. To implement PeopleSoft Production Planning, you should at the minimum create one Inventory business unit and define it also as a Manufacturing business unit. In addition, you might need to create Order Management and Purchasing business units. Because of the way PeopleSoft Production Planning works with other PeopleSoft applications, your business units should already be set up as part of your PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, Order Management, or Manufacturing systems. If you want to set up Inventory business units Manufacturing business units Purchasing business units Order Management business units For more information, see PeopleSoft Inventory PeopleBook Setting up Your Manufacturing System PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook PeopleSoft Order Management PeopleBook 2-2 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

47 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Make sure you set up your Inventory business unit first. If you have installed PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, you can decide where to build the master plan when you establish your business units. To identify the master-plan items to be planned in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, you use the MFG Business Units Options page in the Manufacturing Options component of the Define Business Rules menu. If you select the Master Items in EP check box, the DataLink will send all the master-plan items for the corresponding business units to PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. Otherwise, PeopleSoft Production Planning will plan for the master-plan items. Depending on your implementation strategy, you may or may not want the master-plan items to be planned in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. You need to consider the following before you decide to create your master plan in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning: PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning will create a supply schedule for the master-plan items. You can optionally bring back the supply schedule via the Enterprise DataLink when you receive the planning messages. This supply schedule can include transfers, purchase orders, or production IDs or schedules. By including the master-plan items, PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning will be able to calculate loads on Rough Cut Capacity Resources and perform capacity planning at aggregate level. If the PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning model is too large, you may encounter sizing constraints. In that case, you might want to plan for the master-plan items in PeopleSoft Production Planning. If one business unit feeds the key components to another business unit, then we recommend that you plan your master-plan items in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. If the manufacturing business units are independent of each other, then we recommend that you plan your master-plan items in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Establishing Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing Options To run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you need to set up several options in PeopleSoft Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing. Defining Inventory Attributes In order to use PeopleSoft Production Planning, you need to set up the following attributes in PeopleSoft Inventory. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-3

48 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Defining Item Attributes by Units For each item, you need to define the following information using the four Item Attributes by Unit pages that support PeopleSoft Production Planning: General planning information for an item, such as whether the item is planned by distribution planning, master planning, material planning, or is not planned. The item changeover family, which is used by the Line Schedule Editor (LSE) to group items based on their common production resource usage. Planning time fences, planning message parameters, safety stock and excess stock parameters, lead times, new order fences, and other general information on how you will generate supply for inventory items. PeopleSoft Production Planning generates recommendations for new orders, reschedules, or order cancellations and then routes these recommendations to PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, Order Management, and Production Management. In many cases, the volume of changes number in the thousands. To help manage this activity more effectively, the system enables you to define a time fence and filters to control the message review and approval process. Item-level parameters to control forecast consumption and incremental material supply and consumption. Transfer, purchasing, and manufacturing order quantities, order multiples, and increments. For more information about defining item attributes for PeopleSoft Production Planning, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Items. Defining Transfer Attributes To plan transfer for items between business units, you need to define transfer attributes. Using the Transfer Attributes page, you can define transfer attributes for individual items. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these attributes to help fulfill your material needs. Transfer attributes can then be used to set up sourcing templates for an item in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Sourcing templates for an item can include transfer, purchase, or production options. The options are initially evaluated based on least cost; however, you can use sourcing templates to select default options and to prioritize them when an item has more than one sourcing option. For more information about sourcing templates, see Generating Sourcing Templates (PLS5000). 2-4 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

49 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Defining Forecast Items Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Forecast Items page to associate items with forecast sets. When you run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you select a forecast set you want to use. FORECAST_INV Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Forecast Items You must define Forecast Sets before you associate items to forecast sets. Enter a Forecast Set, Business Unit, and Item ID. Control Inventory - Forecast Items page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Std UOM (standard unit of measure). The Forecast Set, Unit, and Item ID are default values from the selection criteria you entered to access this page. The default Source Code appears for the item. Enter a Date and a forecast Quantity for each date for which you want an item forecast. In PeopleSoft Demand Planning, the item forecast tables can be automatically populated based on the features in that application. For more information about PeopleSoft Demand Planning, see the PeopleSoft Demand Planning PeopleBook, Understanding the Basics of PeopleSoft Demand Planning and Inventory Planning. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-5

50 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Setting Up Stocking Periods You use the Stocking Periods page to set up time-phased safety stock and excess stock levels. The information you enter using this page supersedes any stocking level information you entered on the Item Attributes by Unit - Planning: Order Modifiers page. For more information about setting up stocking periods, see the PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Item Control Values. Setting Up Demand Priority Families You use the Demand Priority Family page to group like items to establish a common priority for all items within a single group. The demand priorities can then be established for PeopleSoft Production Planning. For more information about setting up Demand Priority Families, see the PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Item Control Values. Defining Order Management Options If you are using PeopleSoft Order Management, you may want to define product forecast information. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses forecast sets to define different versions of a forecast. When you run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you select a forecast set that you want to use. Products are associated with forecast sets when you enter product forecasts in PeopleSoft Order Management. For planning purposes, you can split product forecasts across multiple inventory business units as defined on the Forecast Percentages page. Defining Forecast Product Information Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Forecast Products page to maintain forecast information by product for PeopleSoft Production Planning. FORECAST_PROD Manage Sales Activities, Analyze Orders, Use, Forecast Products Enter a Forecast Set, Order Management Business Unit, and Product ID. 2-6 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

51 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Manage Sales Activities - Forecast Products page The Forecast Set, Unit, Product ID, and Item ID are default values from the selection criteria you entered to access this page. Enter a Date and forecast Quantity for each date for which you have product forecast information. Defining Purchasing Attributes If you are using PeopleSoft Purchasing, use the Purchasing Attributes component to enter a variety of data that Production Planning needs. In particular, you need to do the following: Access the Purchasing Attributes page to define the lead time and the primary buyer for the purchased item. The Production DataLink uses the Lead and Standard Price fields from this page. The Lead Time specified on this page overrides the lead time indicated for the purchasing attributes. Access the Item Vendor page to specify or change a vendor and the lead time for the vendor. Using this page, you can specify a specific vendor or vendors for PeopleSoft Production Planning for a purchased item. The application then recommends this vendor to PeopleSoft Purchasing for each planned order. If you don t specify a vendor for a purchased item, PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a planned order without a vendor. You can then use the purchase order load process to assign a vendor to the item. PeopleSoft Production Planning also ranks multiple vendors for the same item based on priority. Define a Ship To Location that represents an Inventory business unit (IBU). However, the Inventory business unit and the Ship to Location don t have to share the same name. You can t define a Ship To Location unless the item has purchasing attributes. If an item has purchase attributes defined but no Ship To Locations, it will be assumed that the item can be ordered at any IBU. If any Ship To Locations are defined for an item, then each IBU to which the user wants to order the item must be defined with a Ship To Location. You can set the lead time that PeopleSoft Production Planning uses for a purchased item at either the item or vendor level. If you assign a specific vendor to an item in PeopleSoft Purchasing, define the lead time at the vendor level. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-7

52 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about maintaining purchasing attributes, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Items. Defining Manufacturing Options There are several parameters available in PeopleSoft Manufacturing to help you define how you want Production Planning to use work centers and resources. Manufacturing Data Used by Production Planning PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following data from PeopleSoft Manufacturing: Data Work Centers Resources Routings Bills of Material Production Planning A work center can consist of one or more people and/or machines; it can represent a logical grouping of machines, a department, or a cost center. For a routing, you can assign to each operation or task a work center where the operation or task takes place. You can also assign one or more resources (crew, machine, or tool) to each work center. Resources are the crews, machines, and tools assigned to work centers to complete tasks. When analyzing capacity for planning and scheduling, PeopleSoft Production Planning considers the individual resources that you assign to the work centers and schedules them accordingly. A routing defines the sequence of steps needed on the shop floor to create the assembled item. Based on the routing definition, you can determine the lead timelead-times for manufactured items, which, in turn, determine the start and end dates for production. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the planning bill of material for aggregate forecasting or aggregate reporting purposes. You can create and maintain (on a summary level) all components that comprise a planning BOM for a group of assembly items or product families in a business unit. 2-8 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

53 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about setting up this data, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Overview of PeopleSoft Bills and Routings. Defining Resource Changeover Penalties The time required to prepare a resource for production is often dependent on the previous production run. For example, at a printing machine, you might require more time to flush lines of black paint prior to using white paint than to flush lines of white paint prior to using black. You can express this changeover factor as a penalty. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the changeover cost constraint to sequence production in the proper order for a resource. Prior to establishing the changeover penalties, you must group your items into unique attribute groups. For more information about resource changeover penalties, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Resources. Defining Planning Resource Attributes You can model planning resources from work centers, machines, crews, and tools. By defining parameters using the Work Center Maintenance or Resource Maintenance components: You can indicate that a work center or resource represents multiple instances of the same resource. You can indicate whether operations within a work center are wrapping or non-wrapping. Task wrapping refers to the ability of a specific operation to be stopped and started up again when crossing a nonscheduled work period, such as a weekend. You can define whether or not resources are available for tasks at other work centers during the wrapping task s nonscheduled work period. The Machine Resources and Crew Size fields, which represent the number of resources you need for each task performed in the work center, function differently than Planning Instances. PeopleSoft Cost Management uses machine resources and crew size to perform cost roll-ups. For more information about planning attributes for resources, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Resources. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-9

54 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Using Production Planning Resources in Aggregate or Detail In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you have the option to plan resources in aggregate or detail. When you plan in aggregate, the system analyzes capacity loads for a resource in daily, weekly, or monthly buckets. The number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as long as there are available hours in the bucket. When you plan in detail, the system scores capacity loads in a bucketless method. This means that the planning system will note any capacity overload where the number of scheduled tasks exceeds the number of resources available. There is a tremendous amount of flexibility when modeling capacity in PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can decide to mix the aggregate and detailed capacity options with respect to the different resources modeled. For example, you might model most crews and machines as aggregate, whereas you would model certain tools that are highly utilized as detailed capacity. Make this decision on a resource-by-resource basis. Detailed capacity creates higher quantity schedules but will likely increase the amount of time required for optimization and maintenance of the plan. Use the Planning Options page to specify each resource (crews, machines, and tools) as an aggregate resource. If you don t define aggregate options on this page, then the resource is considered a detailed capacity resource. For more information about planning resources in aggregate or detail, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Resources. Defining Production Planning Attributes Before you can generate a plan, you may need to define aggregate items, promise and request dates, Roll Forward phases, and overall planning and work center attributes. These attributes provide key indicators for how the Production DataLink should process a plan s data. Maintaining Aggregate Items Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Aggregate Items page to identify which items to include in the forecasting family. PL_AGG_DMD_ITEM Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Maintain Aggregate Items Enter a Business Unit and Parent Item ID S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

55 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Plan Production - Aggregate Items page The Business Unit and Parent Item ID are values for which you selected to maintain aggregate items. Aggregate Items Select an Item ID. The item Description appears and is for display only. If you want to do a search of all available items, click the transfer button and then click the Item Search link to access the Item Search page. Defining Product Forecast Percentages Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Forecast Percentages page to define how much of a product forecast quantity should be directed to a PeopleSoft Inventory business unit. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses this percentage to allocate the forecast (defined in the Order Management business unit) among many inventory business units. PL_OM_FCST_PCT Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Forecast Percentages Enter an Inventory Business Unit and Order Management Business Unit if you are allocating percentages by business unit only. Enter the Inventory Business Unit, Order Management Business Unit, and Product ID if you want to allocate the forecast percentage by product and business unit. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-11

56 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Plan Production - Forecast Percentages page The IN Unit (Inventory business unit), the OM Unit (Order Management business unit), the Product ID, and Description appear based on the business unit and product combination you entered to access this page. Enter the Effective Date for the forecast percentage. Indicate the Status (Active or Inactive) of the forecast percentage for the business unit or product/business unit combination. To allocate a specific forecast percentage to the business unit or product/business unit combination, enter the Forecast Percentage. The percentage can be any number; even if you define more than one effective-dated percentage, the percentages don t have to total 100% and can total more than 100%. You can link an Order Management business unit to more than one Inventory business unit. For example, you could allocate the forecast percentage as follows: Order Mgmt Business Unit Inventory Business Unit GBR01 GBR01 50% GBR01 GBR02 25% GBR01 CAN01 25% Forecast Percentage Defining Master Plan Data Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Master Plan Data page to review the status of the Production DataLink when you generate your master plan. PL_MASTER_PLAN Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Master Plan Data Define a Business Unit for your search S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

57 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Plan Production - Master Plan Data page The Unit field displays the business unit for which the master plan exists. The DateTime value is when the previous master plan was generated, regardless of whether it was an iteration or an initial run. This value also appears in the Production DataLink page in the Previous Master Plan group. The Net Change value is the last time that you ran a net change to the plan. This run type refreshes only planning data created or changed since the last time you ran a master plan using the Production DataLink. PeopleSoft Production Planning applies net-change data to a session already running on the Planning server. The Net Change function applies to only new items, forecasts, transfer orders, material stock requests, production orders, production schedules, planned production, purchase orders, and sales orders. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn t use net change for other static data such as bills, routings, and calendars. You can set the following values on the page by selecting or clearing the check boxes: Processed Lockout Process Status This check box tells others that you have processed the master plan. When the check box is selected, you can t run receive messages again. If you need to run the Receive Planning Messages process again, you need to clear this check box and run the Production DataLink again. Otherwise, an error message appears to indicate that you have already run receiving messages. The system selects this check box when you run the Production DataLink. This prevents other users from converting planned orders from the previous run of the Production DataLink. For example, if you run the Production DataLink for Group Code A, bring the messages back, and then run the Production DataLink again for Group Code A, at that point you can t convert the messages from the original Production DataLink run. This indicates that a more current planning iteration is taking place. When you use the Receive Planning Messages option, the Lockout check box is cleared. This check box indicates that the Production DataLink is currently running. It is intended to alert other users who try to run the Production DataLink while you are running it. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-13

58 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 When you are ready to convert planned orders after you have run the Production DataLink, you want to freeze the database so that other users can t convert planned orders by approving the planning messages. Defining Promise and Request Dates Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Promise/Request Dates page to assign penalty weights to promise and request date violations on customer shipments. The system uses these weights to calculate the score for the promise date and request date constraints on the Scorecard while optimizing the production plan. PL_PR_DATES Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Promise/Request Dates Enter a Business Unit and select one of the Penalty By options: either Promise Date or Request Date. Plan Production - Promise/Request Dates page The system uses promise and request dates to monitor commitments to customers. The dates help you track critical shipments. You use this option to emphasize the importance of meeting these commitments. Promise dates represent the dates and times that you promised a customer that a shipment would arrive. The sales order shipment is scheduled to ship on the date you committed to ship. Request dates represent the dates that a customer has requested to receive a shipment. A sales order line is scheduled to ship based on this request date. The Unit and Penalty By are display-only fields. In the Offset field, enter the number of days (early or late) for the date violation S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

59 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Offset field value can be a negative number for penalties applied to early shipments. Then, enter a Penalty Factor using a numeric value. The value can be greater than 0 but must be less than The penalty factor is cumulative but never exceeds For example, an early or late shipment is never scored higher than 1.00, even if the cumulative penalty value is greater than Using the data on the screen shot as an example, a missed shipment with an offset of 3 or greater would by default result in a penalty factor for the offset of A missed shipment with an offset between 1 and 2 would by default result in a penalty factor for the offset of Defining Roll Forward Phases You use Roll Forward phases to reschedule tasks that are past due. Past-due tasks are those that were scheduled to be completed prior to the current time but remain open. PeopleSoft Production Planning moves tasks from the past and rolls them forward into the current or a future schedule or plan. Then you can view and work with them before running solvers to fine-tune the plan. After you establish active phases, use the Production DataLink to indicate whether the Planning engine should run active Roll Forward phases after loading data into the Planning server. Overview of the Roll Forward Feature Often tasks in a plan aren t completed on time. For example, a purchase order is delayed that affects whether you can meet forecasted demand on time. Or, possibly, a production line might be closed for several hours, leaving some existing production operations incomplete. Using Roll Forward phases, you resolve material movement needs using time periods rather than fixed dates. Time periods, for example, include early time fences or current times, whereas a fixed date is a specific time such as 3:30 p.m. on October 10. Time periods can be used over and over and are associated with fixed dates through planning models. To determine which moveable tasks to roll forward and where to roll them, PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following parameters: The time period from which you want to roll tasks forward, beginning with the time period defined in the planning model as the start time. The target time period to which you want to roll tasks. This could be the current time or some time after the current time. The status and types of task being rolled forward, such as the different behavior for planned orders versus frozen orders across transfers, production, and purchases. PeopleSoft Production Planning never rolls tasks backward, regardless of the parameters you define for the Roll Forward utility. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-15

60 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about maintaining Roll Forward phases in the Planning engine, see PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, Using the Advanced Planning Client. Setting Up Roll Forward Parameters This section describes how you establish filters that define which tasks to reschedule and when to reschedule them. You create a Roll Forward phase that contains the parameters for rolling pastdue tasks forward. The following example shows several tasks that are past due and a production task (operation) that must be rescheduled because materials won t be available to complete the task in the current planning horizon. Scheduling Horizon Planning Horizon Production Task Rescheduled Production Task Transfer Task Rescheduled Transfer Task Purchase Task Rescheduled Purchase Task Current Time Target Time Start of Time Early Time Fence Late Time Fence End of Time Rescheduling a task using Roll Forward phases You are planning for tasks that are past due in the scheduling horizon and you want to reschedule them to the next planning cycle. The times and fences are the filter elements available for you to use when you create a Roll Forward phase. The dates for this time line are determined by time fences defined when running the DataLink. You can select to move tasks that are in a Frozen status, but you can t move tasks in a Canceled status. You use three fields that combine to define the parameters. The following table shows how the production task in the preceding example was selected for rescheduling using the three fields. Roll Forward Selection Field Select task that Field Value End 2-16 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

61 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Roll Forward Selection Field Field Value On or before Early Time Fence Third field No entry (default is 0) The next table shows values for the target time. Roll Forward Target Field Roll task to On Third field Field Value Start Early Time Fence Plus (2 days) In the example, all tasks are scheduled to start at the same time. So the Roll Forward target field values are the same for each. Let s look at the past-due transfer task. It was scheduled to begin prior to the start of time. Suppose you wanted to include all tasks that started within a day of the start of time. To select tasks in this planning condition, use the following selection parameters: Roll Forward Selection Field Select task that On or before Third field Field Value Start Start of Time Minus (1 day) The start of time is the earliest time the system uses to select tasks to be rescheduled. If a task begins before the start of time and ends after the time, it can be rescheduled. In the case of the transfer, it was scheduled one day prior to the start of time. Using the filters, you limit which tasks the system selects to reschedule. The selection parameters for defining the purchase task in the earlier example are in the following table: Roll Forward Selection Field Select task that On or before Field Value End Current Time Third field No Entry (default is 0) After you define parameters for Roll Forward phases, you can roll tasks forward based on individual phases or on all phases. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-17

62 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Setting Up Roll Forward Phases Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Roll Forward Phase page to set up PeopleSoft Production Planning so that you can roll forward past-due tasks to current or future production plans. PL_ROLLFORWARD Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Roll Forward Phase Enter or select the Roll Forward phase name that you want to add or maintain. Plan Production - Roll Forward Phase page You use this page to add or maintain a Roll Forward phase in PeopleSoft Production Planning. After it s created, the phase can be run by the Roll Forward utility in the Planning engine. The utility is used to reschedule a selected group of past-due tasks to a defined target at a later time. Enter or update the Roll Forward Phase Name to define the code used to maintain and retrieve data related to a set of roll forward specifications. The field is required and the name you enter must be unique. The Phase Description field is a short description of the phase. Select the Active check box to indicate that the Planning engine should use this phase when it calculates late tasks. Using the check box, you can create a number of Roll Forward phases in advance, while activating only the phases that you intend to use for the next roll forward run. If the check box is clear, the phase isn t used by the system when you select to roll forward active phases during the Production DataLink run. Roll Forward Selection Selections are the types of tasks the system considers for rescheduling during Roll Forward phase processing. You designate which type of supply and demand task the system processes when it rolls forward active phases by selecting the check box adjoining the task S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

63 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Roll Forward phases don t reschedule tasks that are in a Canceled status. You can reschedule frozen task by selecting the Include Frozen Task check box. You use a series of fields to define date and time filters that determine which tasks the system considers for movement. Using the Select Tasks field, you define tasks based on the time period that they exist in the schedule. You can use either their start or end date and time. The default is the task s end time. The On or Before field is made up of entries that filter tasks based on their relative position to a time fence, rather than a hard-coded date. This enables you to keep Roll Forward phases valid for reuse as time goes forward. You use this field in conjunction with the remaining fields to apply time filters. The following values are available: Start of Time Current Time Early Fence Late Fence The earliest time for which the system can select tasks to be rescheduled. Tasks that end after this time or start after this time are eligible for rescheduling. The time considered to be the present planning time. The system can reschedule tasks that end before the current time or that begin after the current time. This value is the default value for the field. This time represents the beginning of a planning interval and is used with the late fence to define the range of time. The system uses the early fence time to reschedule tasks that start or end on or before this time. This time represents the ending of a planning interval and is used with the early fence to define the range of time. The system uses the late fence time to reschedule tasks that start or end on or before this time. You use the second On or Before field with the third field. The third field enables you to specify a time offset from the selected time fence date. This offset can be either added or subtracted from the date. Using the second field, you determine whether you are going to add time (plus) to the offset or subtract time (minus) from the offset. Using the third On or Before field, PeopleSoft Production Planning stores the offset time as Minutes, Hours, or Days. The offset default is in minutes. The next group box contains the supply and demand tasks you can roll forward. If a box is selected, those supply or demand tasks are included when the system rolls forward active phases. The following tasks are available for rescheduling: Sales Order Shipments Downtime Tasks Includes shipment parents that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. Includes downtime tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-19

64 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planned Production Existing Production Planned Transfers Existing Transfers Planned Purchase Orders Existing Purchase Orders Includes production operation tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers an operation planned if the production parent that it belongs has a status behavior of PLANNED. The system doesn t reschedule production parents; it reschedules only those production operations that meet the date filter criteria. Includes production operation tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers an operation planned if the production parent to which it belongs has any status behavior other than PLANNED or CANCELED. Includes transfer tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers a transfer task planned if it has a status of PLANNED. Includes transfer tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers a transfer task existing if it has any status behavior other than PLANNED or CANCELED. Includes purchase order line delivery tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers a purchase task planned if it has a status behavior of PLANNED. Includes purchase order tasks and possibly purchase order line delivery tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll Forward phase. These purchase tasks are considered existing if they have any status behavior other than PLANNED or CANCELED. Select the Frozen Tasks check box to include frozen tasks for rescheduling by the Roll Forward utility. If the check box is selected, all frozen tasks that meet the filter criteria are included in the Roll Forward process. Roll Forward Target Use this group box to define the date and time to which tasks are rescheduled during the Roll Forward phase processing. You define the Roll Forward target using a set of configurable specifications maintained for each Roll Forward phase. You use a series of fields (the same as the ones you used to select when past-due tasks should be moved) to define date and time filters that determine when tasks are rescheduled. Using the Roll Tasks to field, you define whether tasks will be rescheduled so that they either start or end on the target date. The default is the End time, meaning that selected tasks will be rescheduled so they are completed on the specified target date. The On field is made up of entries that filter tasks based on their relative position to a time fence, rather than a hard-coded date, allowing you to keep Roll Forward phases valid for reuse as time 2-20 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

65 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK goes forward. You use this field in conjunction with the remaining fields to apply time filters that determine the target time. The following values are available: Start of Time Current Time Early Fence Late Fence The earliest time for which the system can select tasks to be rescheduled. Tasks that end after this time or start after this time are eligible for rescheduling. The time considered as the present planning time. The system can reschedule tasks that end before the current time or that begin after the current time. This value is the default value for the field. This time represents the beginning of a planning interval and is used with the late fence to define the range of time. The system uses the early fence time to reschedule tasks that start or end on or before this time. This time represents the end of a planning interval and is used with the early fence to define the range of time. The system uses the late fence time to reschedule tasks that start or end on or before this time. You use the second On field with the third field. The third field enables you to specify a time offset from the selected time fence date. This offset can be either added or subtracted from the date. Using the second field, you determine whether you are going to add time (plus) to the offset or subtract time (minus) from the offset to arrive at a rescheduled date. Using the third On field, you define the offset UOM (unit of measure) as Minutes, Hours, or Days. Defining Planning Attributes Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planning Attributes page to share an associated object with a group of objects that have the same characteristics. This page is optional. The DataLink will create the attributes it needs to support the model that it creates. PL_ATTRIBUTE Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Planning Attributes Plan Production - Planning Attributes page You can use Planning Attributes to map entities such as transfer options and sourcing templates to items. This is accomplished first by creating a global repository of attributes, then associating P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-21

66 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 the values of those attributes to entities and items. Finally, you map the entities to items using attribute value matching. For example, you can look up the transfer options that map to a given item based on the common attributes that contain Transfer Option as their Planning Attribute Category. Select a Planning Attribute Category. Your options are Material Flow and Resource Changeover. Enter a Planning Attribute Name associated with the attribute. Assign a Planning Attribute Value to the attribute. Defining Work Center Attributes Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the WC Attributes (Work Center Attributes) page to associate a work center with a planning attribute. PL_WC_ATTRIBUTE Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Work Center Attributes You need to have already defined those work centers for which you want to create work center attributes. You also need to have Planning Attribute Names and Planning Attribute Categories defined. You define Planning Attributes using the Planning Attributes page. Enter a Business Unit. Plan Production - Work Center Attributes page Select a Work Center from the prompt. Select a Planning Attribute Category, Planning Attribute Name, and Planning Attribute Value to be associated with the selected work center. Prioritizing Demand When demand exceeds supply and you don t have the available inventory on hand, you need to define a set of rules to prioritize the distribution of demand. The rules are called demand 2-22 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

67 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK priority rules because they are used to determine the order in which you fulfill independent demand. In addition, you can use the priority rules to define the lateness tolerance rules. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you define the demand prioritization rules specific to a business unit that you model. The Production DataLink will use the demand priority rules to generate the priority for a given independent demand. Once the priority is established, the DataLink passes the independent demands with different priority codes to the Planning engine. A demand priority code can range from 1 to 999, with 1 the most important. The priority value of 0 is reserved for the system. The Planning engine uses the demand priority code to determine which independent demand to fulfill first, so that higher priority demands are fulfilled before lower priority demands, in situations where there isn t enough available supply or capacity to meet the various demands. Lateness tolerance represents how sensitive your customers are to their orders not being fulfilled on time. Lateness tolerance is expressed in terms of the number of days after which the customer becomes seriously concerned about the independent demand not being met. Before you can define the lateness tolerance rules, you must first establish the demand priority values for your independent demands. You can then specify the lateness tolerance rules to associate with various ranges of demand priority value. Each lateness tolerance rule is defined by two values: a demand priority range and a lateness tolerance value that is expressed in days. All of the demands with priorities in a given range are assigned the lateness tolerance value. The Production DataLink passes the lateness tolerance rules to the Planning engine, which uses these rules to determine which demands to delay in situations where there isn t enough available supply to meet the various demands. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you define the lateness tolerance rules specific to a business unit that you model. Here s an example of how the two values are combined. If the demand priority is less than or equal to Then the number of days for the lateness tolerance is In this example, all independent demands are assigned a lateness tolerance (in days) based on the demand priority range. Demands of: 1-19 days are assigned 1 day of lateness tolerance days are assigned 2 days of lateness tolerance days are assigned 4 days of lateness tolerance. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-23

68 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY days are assigned 5 days of lateness tolerance days are assigned 7 days of lateness tolerance are assigned 14 days of lateness tolerance days are assigned 20 days of lateness tolerance. The Feasible Planning Solver and the Linear Programming Solver (LP Solver) use the lateness tolerance rules and the demand priority values to determine which demands to delay in situations where there isn t enough available supply to meet the various demands. The following are three different lateness conditions that are associated with the lateness tolerance: Not late Late but within tolerance Late beyond tolerance A demand that isn t late is one that is met on time (on or before the order request date, depending on which date the planner is trying to meet). A demand that is late but within tolerance is one that has been scheduled after the order request date or promise date, but before the lateness tolerance associated with that order. A demand that is late beyond tolerance is one that has been scheduled after the lateness tolerance associated with that order. Based on the lateness tolerance that you define, the solvers use these lateness tolerance conditions to determine which demands to delay in situations where demand outpaces supply. Defining Demand Priority Rules Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Priority Rules page to assign a priority ranking based on the demand source. PL_PRIO_DEMAND Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Demand Prioritization, Priority Rules Depending on the demand source you re using to establish the priority rules, you must define Demand Priority Family, Customer Groups, and the Destination Business Units. Enter a Business Unit S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

69 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Plan Production - Demand Prioritization: Priority Rules page The Unit you selected to access this page appears. Priority Rank defines the priority to be assigned to each independent demand that satisfies a given priority rule. The lower the value you select, the higher the priority. The highest value is 999, which is the lowest possible priority, and the lowest value is 1, which is the highest possible priority. A priority rank value of 0 is reserved for the system. Priority Rank is a required field. The Demand Source represents the source of independent demand to which the prioritization rule applies. Your options are: Forecasts Inter-Unit Transfers Other Stock Requests Quotations Safety Stock Sales Orders Forecasts are total expected sales to all customers that you can maintain at the product, inventory-item, or planningitem level. At the planning-item level, sales are forecasted by families and exploded to inventory items through planning bills of material. Refers to outbound transfers that represent independent demand in the planning model. Material stock requests that come from inventory and aren t transfers. Could be internal or external fulfillment. An order management quotation. Quotations are considered demand and are sent to Planning when the quotation success percentage is over the planning success percentage on the Production DataLink run control. The intended inventory level designed to protect against stockouts. Deviation from this level is tolerable within a margin defined by the safety limit and excess limit. When stock level drops below the safety limit, new supplies are generated to bring the stock back to the desired level. Represents the shipment of material to a customer from a location under Planning s control. The system represents this as a shipment of material and changes the projected on-hand balance in the future. You can define the Demand Priority Family in PeopleSoft Inventory. A planning priority family represents an item or a group of items that can be used as criteria for prioritization. This is an optional field. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-25

70 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reservation Status is available if you select Sales Orders, Inter-Unit Transfers, or Material Stock Requests as the demand source. Your options are Reserved and Unreserved. Reserved orders are those that have been reserved against available/projected quantity on-hand at the business unit/item level. This is an optional field. Customer Group, or Customer Allocation Group, is a group corresponding to one or more shipto customers. You can select a Customer Group only when you select Sales Orders or Quotations as the demand source. This is an optional field. Priority is a valid parameter only when you select Sales Orders as the demand source. For sales orders, the order priority is a calculated field that is generated during the reservation process. An order priority value can range between 1 and 999, which is the default. For a given priority rule, all sales orders with an order priority less than or equal to the value in the Priority field are considered to match this parameter. For example, if a value of 100 is entered, all sales orders with an order priority of 100 or less will be evaluated as matching this parameter. This is an optional field. Dest Unit (destination unit) is used only when you select Inter-Unit Transfers as the demand source. You can use this value to prioritize demand for interunit transfer to a particular destination business unit. This is an optional field. Although Demand Source, Demand Priority Family, Reservation Status, Customer Group, Order Priority, and Dest Unit are all optional fields, you must enter at least one of them, along with the Priority Rank, to create a priority rule. Defining Lateness Tolerances Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Lateness Tolerance Rules page to define the lateness tolerance rules based on the demand priority. PL_PRIO_LATE_TOL Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Demand Prioritization, Lateness Tolerance Rules Enter a Business Unit. Plan Production - Demand Prioritization: Lateness Tolerance Rules page 2-26 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

71 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Unit is the business unit that you entered to access this page. Priority is the priority rank from the priority rule definition. Lateness Tolerance (days) indicates the number of days after which the customer becomes seriously concerned about the independent demand not being met. Sourcing Demand Sourcing demand is the process the Planning system uses to determine how the supply for an item s demand is going to be filled. The system sources demand using sourcing options. These options define parameters for manufacturing, purchasing, or transferring an item to meet demand. You define these options when you set up an item. Overview of Sourcing Templates You use sourcing templates to define how PeopleSoft Production Planning should generate supply for an item. A sourcing template contains a sequenced list of sourcing options (purchase, transfer, or production) based on the attributes defined throughout PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, and Bills and Routings for the item. You can let the system load the options automatically, or you can set up sourcing templates manually and maintain the options. These templates are needed when multiple sourcing options exist for an item. When you assign multiple sourcing options to a single item, you create a more flexible planning situation by providing the Planning engine with more information to source demand. Material availability, resource capacity, and lead time can create exceptions that influence the engine s sourcing selection. When you provide several options, the Planning engine has more opportunities to find an option that resolves an exception. For example, if a purchase option doesn t have adequate lead time, the engine can go to the next prioritized option to see if that option can be used to meet the demand. There are other advantages of creating sourcing templates. You can review sourcing options before the Production DataLink run. Also, the DataLink doesn't have to create sourcing templates for every run, thereby reducing processing time. When you indicate to the system that you want to maintain sourcing templates manually, it prevents the Create Sourcing Templates batch job from overwriting any sourcing templates when the Manually Maintained check box is selected. The system uses the following sourcing options to source demand for an item: Production Option Transfer Option This is a combination of a bill of material and routing code that can be effective-dated for seasonal mix variations. The option defines which material and resources are required to make a specific item. This option defines the transfer attributes, such as cost or transfer time, that are associated with transferring an item from one business unit to another. You create the option by defining transfer attributes for an item. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-27

72 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Purchase Option This option defines item and vendor attributes, such as cost, lead time, and order modifiers. You create the option by defining item and vendor relationships on the Item Purchasing Attributes page. When you create a sourcing template, you sequence the options and define a default option for use if the Planning engine can t find an adequate option using prioritization. The Planning engine uses fixed-priority sourcing logic to determine which sourcing option to use to meet the demand. Solver Processing of Sourcing Template Data When you generate a plan, you can use different solvers to process sourcing information. The following list describes the processing: The Material Planning solver always selects the sourcing template s default option. The Feasible Planning Solver, when used to generate an initial plan, also selects the default sourcing option. However, the solver uses the fixed-priority sourcing template to source transfers or purchases again during the material phase. It also uses the sourcing templates during the Lateness Reduction Phase to source items again. The LP Solver (Linear Programming Solver) uses the fixed-priority sourcing template to guide its decisions on which routing option to select, but it ultimately makes decisions based on the bigger cost trade-off picture. The Iterative Repair/Optimizer evaluates each sourcing option when the fixed-priority sourcing logic is invoked. It processes the options in their order of priority until one passes all of the selection criteria. The first option that meets all of the criteria is the one that is used. If all of the sourcing options have been evaluated and none passed the selection criteria, then it uses the default. If you don t define a default option, the Optimizer uses the option with the highest priority as the default. The highest-priority option is the one with the lowest number. Setting Up Sourcing Templates A sourcing template provides a list of production, purchase, and transfer sourcing options you can use to source the demand for an item. Using PeopleTools, you can set a default option and a priority sequence for all the options available for the item. You can also delete options from the template. You can generate the template in three ways: 1. You can let the system automatically generate templates for items during each Production DataLink run. The DataLink loads and prioritizes options based on their costs. Lower-costs options have priority over higher-cost options. The option with the lowest cost will be set as the default option. 2. You can manually load and create the template. You manually create a sourcing template for each item that you want to control. You use the sourcing template and buttons to select which options you want to load into the sourcing template. You define the priority of each 2-28 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

73 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK option and which one is the default option. To protect your settings, you indicate to the system that options for the item are maintained manually. Then, when the Production DataLink is run again, it doesn t override manual settings. However, remember that if you indicate all templates are to be regenerated during the DataLink run, then manually created templates are removed and refreshed by system-generated templates. 3. You can run the Create Sourcing Templates batch job to generate templates for all or a range of items. Then, you can maintain individual templates using Sourcing Template maintenance. If you select to maintain the sourcing template manually, it prevents the Create Sourcing Templates batch job from automatically overwriting your templates. The DataLink and the Batch Generation process create a sourcing template for an item only when there is more than one sourcing option available for the item. The Production DataLink creates new templates, when necessary, for items that don t have templates. Defining Sourcing Templates Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Sourcing Template page to load and define the default for sourcing options manually and to establish the priority of the options when more than one option is available. You can also select to work with and review specific types of sourcing options, including production, purchasing, and transfer options. PL_SRC_TEMPLATE Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Sourcing Template, Sourcing Details In order to create a sourcing template, you must have a valid inventory item defined along with attributes for generating supply (transfer attributes, purchase attributes, production options, or bills of material and routings). Use the Click to add a new value option to assign sourcing options for an item. Enter a Business Unit and Item ID to access the Sourcing Template page. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-29

74 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Plan Production - Sourcing Template: Sourcing Details page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Planning System and Std UOM (standard unit of measure). When you add a new sourcing template using the Sourcing Template page, you must first either use the Sourcing Template Load button or use the Production, Transfer, and Purchase buttons to load sourcing options manually. After adding sourcing options to the template, you can change the priorities and define a default option. When the Planning engine processes the plan, it uses the default option according to if solvers process the templates. If the template is used in processing, solvers use the highest-priority option first and go through all the remaining options. If a sourcing option can t be found in the template to meet the demand, then solvers normally use the default option. For more information about how the sourcing template is processed by solvers, see Solver Processing of Sourcing Template Data. Use the Search Depth field to define how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine will explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each sourcing option represents a single level in the supply chain. For example, suppose part A is made up of part B and part B is made up of parts C and D. To explode all levels, you would enter a 3 in the Search Depth field. The search depth you define is used as the default for this item for processing all the sourcing options in the sourcing template. Resch Early Lmt (reschedule early limit) indicates the maximum number of days early that you want to allow solvers to move tasks in order to satisfy a demand when sourcing the demand. You can either allow the Production DataLink or the Create Sourcing Template batch job to update and assign sourcing options automatically or you can control how the options are used. You select the Manually Maintained check box to indicate that the sourcing template is to be maintained by users. When the check box is selected, the DataLink and the Create Sourcing Template batch job don t overwrite any options in the template. You can t delete a sourcing template. You can add and delete the options associated with it S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

75 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK You use the Description field to describe the sourcing template as it is used for this item. To change the priority, enter the number in the priority field. The Planning engine processes the priority sequence first. Select the Default check box to define the default sourcing option for the Planning engine when all others fail. Initially, this is the lowest-cost option. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information You use buttons to select the sourcing options that you want to load into the sourcing template. You load the number of production, purchasing, and transfer options that your business requires for sourcing demand. These options provide you flexibility in planning at the item level. Click the Sourcing Template Load button if you want to delete the existing sourcing options and replace them with the current available sourcing options. Click Yes to refresh with the current sourcing options. Click No to keep the sourcing options as they appear on the page. Click the Production button to go to the Update Production page if you want to select production options for the item. Click the Transfer button to go to the Update Transfer page if you want to select transfer options for the item. Click the Purchasing button to go to the Update Purchasing page if you want to select purchase options for the item. The following fields appear as common fields in the Sourcing Template page: Default Select this check box to indicate that you want to use this sourcing option as the default value when the Planning engine sources demand for the current plan. You can select one sourcing option as the default for the template. The default option is used to source demand, after the Planning engine goes through all sourcing template entries, based on their planning priority, but can t select any of them because of problems such as capacity or material shortages. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-31

76 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Priority Enter a numerical value that defines the priority you want the Planning engine to place on using a sourcing option to meet demand. You can enter any positive number up to 999 and the number must be unique. The Planning engine considers all the sourcing template options (production, transfer, and purchase) using their priority in ascending sequence until it finds a template that can meet the demand without creating planning exceptions. If the engine can t find a template without exceptions, then it uses the default template. Option Type Option Name Defines whether the demand is supplied by a production task, purchase order, or by a transfer task. Displays the name the system uses to track this particular sourcing option. For more information about each option type and where they are defined, see the corresponding option discussions later in this section. Sourcing Details tab Viewing the Sourcing Details tab The following information appears on the tab: Effective Date Unit Cost Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective. Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the item defined in the sourcing template. When generate sourcing templates automatically, the system uses the cost as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The lower an item s cost the higher the sourcing priority. Sourcing priorities are defined using lower numbers than those with higher priorities S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

77 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production tab Viewing the Production tab As you select different Sourcing Template tabs, the sourcing options remain the same; however, data for each type of option changes depending on the tab you select. The Production page displays additional information associated with any production type sourcing option. For more information about loading initial information for the Production page, see Loading Sourcing Options. The following information appears on the Production tab: BOM Code Routing Code Associated Primary BOM This is the bill of material identifier for the production option within the template. Production options can be predefined or created based on defaults specified at the item attributes by unit level. This is the routing identifier for the production option within the template. This column is empty if routings aren t being used. The routing code also doesn t apply to production options used in PeopleSoft Production Planning. When an item is a co-product on multiple primary BOMs, then one of the items must be assigned as an associated primary BOM. This allows the Planning engine to explode the co-product to the next level when it processes sourcing options at greater search depths. If an item has an associated primary item different from itself and also has its own BOM, then the Planning engine imports production options for both the item itself and the associated primary item. For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Production Options. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-33

78 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Purchasing tab Viewing the Purchasing tab As you select different Sourcing Template tabs, the sourcing options remain the same; however, data for each type of option changes depending on the tab you select. The Purchasing page displays vendor information. Options that appear on the Purchasing page are combinations based on the definitions in the Item/Vendor table. Vendor Set ID Vendor ID The SetID in which the vendor information was defined. Identifies a specific vendor as defined on an item/vendor definition. Transfer tab Viewing the Transfer tab The Transfer page shows active transfer options available for use by the Planning engine. The following information appears on the Transfer page: Source Business Unit Ship Via Code This is the unit that is going to ship the item. This code identifies the method used for shipping the item. Loading Sourcing Options You use buttons to define the sourcing options that you want to load into the sourcing template. You load the number of production, purchasing, and transfer options that your business requires for sourcing demand. These options offer you flexibility in planning at the item level. This section describes how to select and load production options and where the options originate S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

79 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Sourcing Details page contains four buttons for loading sourcing options. You use three of these buttons to select the options and the fourth to load the options. You select the button to see the options that have been created for items. Using the page, you then select the options you want to include in the sourcing template. After you select the options that you want to load, click the OK button. The options you load into the sourcing template for an item remain in the template until you delete them. As long as you select for the template to be maintained manually, the Create Sourcing Templates batch job and Production DataLink won t overwrite an item s sourcing options. Click the Delete button next to the option on the Sourcing Details page to remove the options you load manually. If you decide you no longer need a manually maintained sourcing template, you can clear the Manually Maintain check box at the top of the page. The next time you run the Create Sourcing Template batch job or the Production DataLink when it is set to regenerate sourcing templates, the system overwrites the current sourcing template, including the options you ve defined. After you select the options, you can use the Sourcing Details page to define the priority in which you want the Planning engine to use the options to source demand. You also define a single default option. Loading Production Options Click the Production button to select production options. Sourcing Template - Select Production page PeopleSoft Production Planning production options define how an item is produced. They originate from Item Maintenance settings at the business unit level. A production option can be created for each BOM and routing code combination. You can define the BOM code and routing code and how production options are created and used at the business unit level. For more information about setting up and using production options, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Production Options. You can also maintain options for an item when their planning rates aren t maintained at the routing level. Use the Maintain Items option to access Item Attributes by Unit. Then access the Planning page. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-35

80 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Production options are updated immediately when, for example, you change a BOM for an item. The changes are available in the Select Production page and the Sourcing Inquiry. For more information about data that appears in the Select Production page, see Verifying Sourcing Options. Use the Select check box to select the option or options that you want to load when you return to the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box. After you select the production options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you return to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected production options will be added to the sourcing template. Loading Transfer Options Click the Transfer button to select transfer options. Sourcing Template - Select Transfer page Transfer options define how an item is moved between business units. They originate from the transfer attributes that you define for the item. To access the Transfer Attributes page use the following link: Transfer Attribute page. Transfer options are updated immediately when, for example, you change the transportation cost for an item. The changes are available on the Update Transfers page and the Sourcing Inquiry. For more information about data that appears on the Update Transfer page, see Viewing Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details. Select the Select Cost check box to define the option or options that you want to load when you return to the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box. After you select the transfer options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you return to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected transfer options are added to the template S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

81 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Loading Purchase Options Click the Purchasing button to select purchase options. Sourcing Template - Select Purchase: Vendor Details page Two tabs are available for selecting purchase options. The Vendor Details page displays vendor information for the item. Using the two pages, you can only change the Select check box to select or clear an option. For more information about information that appears on the Vendor Details page, see Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details. Sourcing Template - Select Purchase: Order Modifiers page Purchase options define how an item is procured. They originate based on a variety of settings in PeopleSoft Purchasing. Among the considerations for defining purchase sourcing options are vendor selection criteria, such as lead time and pricing. For more information about data to create purchasing sourcing options, see PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook, Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing. Purchase options are updated immediately when, for example, you change the item vendor priority for an item. The changes are available on the Update Purchasing page and the Sourcing Inquiry. For more information about information that appears on the Order Modifiers page, see Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-37

82 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Select the Select check box to define the option or options that you want to load when you return to the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box. After you select the purchase options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you return to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected purchase options are added to the sourcing template. Generating Sourcing Templates (PLS5000) Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Sourcing Templates page to define criteria that you want the system to use when it sources demand automatically. RUN_PLS5000 Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Process, Create Sourcing Templates Enter a Run Control ID and Business Unit. PLS5000 SQR Plan Production - Sourcing Templates page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Run. You use the Sourcing Templates page to load production, transfer, and purchasing options automatically into the sourcing template for a single business unit at a time. The priority of each option is based on lowest cost. After you run the process to load the sourcing options into the template, you can maintain the priorities and the default option manually. Using the Create 2-38 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

83 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Sourcing Templates batch job is an optional step. You can create and maintain a sourcing template without running the background process. A sourcing template isn t required to source an item. However, it does make it possible to modify sourcing options and it reduces the amount of Production DataLink processing time. If an item has a sourcing template, then the system uses entries in the template. If the item doesn t have a template, then the Production DataLink dynamically and temporarily creates the sourcing template for that one-time use. Plan Currency The Currency Code represents the base currency for the specified business unit. It is used to calculate costing information for setting the priorities of sourcing options for the sourcing template. You can t change the field. The Rate Type determines the exchange rate the system uses to convert costs from other currencies to the single currency code in the Currency Code field. Examples of exchange rates include spot (immediate), current, negotiated (discount and premium forward rates), average, and historical rates. Planning System You can establish a sourcing template for either PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning or both. When you select a specific system, the Create Sourcing Template builds the sourcing templates for items for the corresponding planning system. Sourcing Options The Sourcing Options group box contains available options that can be used in the sourcing template. You can select all or any combination of options. You must select at least one option. Unselected options remain in any currently existing templates. For example, if you select only the Purchase Options check box, then Transfer and Production options remain unchanged in any template that they belong to when the templates are refreshed. Purchase options will be completely refreshed for the items you select in the Item Option group box. The following sourcing options are available: Production Options This is a combination of a BOM and routing code that can be effective-dated for seasonal mix variations. The option defines which material and resources are required to make a specific item. For more information about where production options are defined for an item, see Loading Production Options. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-39

84 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Transfer Options This option defines the transfer attribute, such as cost or transfer time, that is associated with transferring an item from one business unit to another. You create the option by defining transfer attributes for an item. For more information about where transfer options are defined for an item, see Loading Transfer Options. Purchase Options This option defines item and vendor attributes, such as cost, lead time, and order modifiers. You create the option by defining item and vendor relationships on the Item Purchasing attributes page. For more information about where purchase options are defined for an item, see Loading Purchase Options. Item Option Use the Item Option group box to define which items you want to include in Create Sourcing Template processing. The following options are available: All Range Only New Items Date Added Select this option to include all items with defined sourcing options in the processing. All is the default. To clear it, you must select the Range option. Select this option to specify a range of items to be included. You use the adjoining entry fields to define a From and To range for item IDs. The system creates sourcing options only for those items that are within the range. These fields are required if you select the Range option. Select this option if you want to include only those items that have been established since the last sourcing template was created. You must also enter a date from which you want the system to consider new items. Enter the date from which you want the system to consider new items. The system creates sourcing templates for any items that were established after this date. This is a required field if you select Only New Items S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

85 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Click Run to run the Create Sourcing Templates process (PLS5000). Process Scheduler runs the process at user-defined intervals. For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. Verifying Sourcing Options You can review an item s sourcing template and sourcing options by using the Sourcing Inquiry component. The inquiry shows the sourcing template for the item, along with data from production, purchasing, and transfer options. You use the Sourcing Inquiry pages before you run the Production DataLink to review sourcing options that will be sent to the Planning engine. If a sourcing template doesn t exist for the item, then the Sourcing Template page is empty and the options appear on the Production, Purchase, and Transfer Option pages, according to which ones have valid options assigned to them. Defining Sourcing Inquiry Selection Criteria Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the Item Planning Inquiry page to define the item for which you want to review sourcing options. PL_PLAN_INQ Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing Inquiry, Item Planning Inquiry For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a sourcing template for the item. Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Item Planning Inquiry page You can define filters for the following values: Business Unit This is a required field. Either type or select the business unit to which the item belongs. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-41

86 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Item ID System Base Currency Rate Type This is a required field. Either type or select the item for which you want to see associated sourcing options. Defines the planning system in which the item is being planned. You can select the PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning system. If you leave the field empty, sourcing options for both systems appear in the inquiry. If you plan for an item using different currencies, you can select the currency for which you want to review the item s sourcing options. The field isn t required. Defines how the exchange of currency from one business unit to another is calculated. For example, you might use a spot rate, which is the immediate rate, versus a negotiated rate that might provide an exchange discount. The field isn t required. Click the Search button to retrieve the sourcing information for the item. Viewing Sourcing Template Details Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Sourcing Template page to view sourcing options for an item along with their priority, default option, and basic details about the option. Use the remaining tabs to see additional details for each type of option. PL_SOURCE_DTL Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing Inquiry, Sourcing Template For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a sourcing template for the item. You must define a Business Unit and Item before you access inquiry data. Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Sourcing Template page 2-42 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

87 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Std UOM (standard unit of measure). When a sourcing template exists for an item, then the sourcing options appear in the Sourcing Template. If a template doesn t exist and valid sourcing options are available, you must use the Production, Purchase, and Transfer Options tabs to review the options. The Search Depth field displays how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine will explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each routine option represents a single level in the supply chain. Resch Early Lmt (reschedule early limit) indicates the maximum number of days that you want to allow solvers to move tasks up in order to satisfy a demand when sourcing the demand. The Sourcing Template check box indicates whether a sourcing template exists for the item. When the check box is selected, a sourcing template has been created for the item and the Production DataLink doesn t include this item when it creates sourcing templates automatically. Options appear regardless of whether a sourcing template has been created. The following information appears on the Sourcing Template page: Default Defines the sourcing option used as the default value when the Planning engine sources demand for the current plan. Only a single default option can exist. The default option is used to source demand, after the Planning engine goes through all sourcing template entries, based on their planning priority, but can t select any of them because of problems such as capacity or material shortages. Priority Defines the priority you want the Planning engine to place on using a sourcing option to meet demand. The lower the number, the greater the priority. The Planning engine goes through the sourcing templates based on their priority until it finds a template that can meet the demand without planning exceptions. If the engine can t find a template without exceptions, then it uses the default template. Option Type Option Name BOM (bill of material) Defines whether the demand is supplied by a production task, purchase order, or transfer task. Displays the name the system uses to track this particular sourcing option. This is the bill of material identifier for the production option within the template. Production options can be predefined or created based on defaults specified at the item-attributes-by-unit level. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-43

88 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Production Options. Routing Effective Date Vendor ID Source Business Unit Ship Via Code Unit Cost This is the routing identifier for the production option within the template. This column is empty if routings aren t being used. The routing code also doesn t apply to production options used in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective. Identifies a specific vendor as defined on an item/vendor definition. This is the unit that is going to ship the item or product. Identifies the method used for shipping the item. Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the item defined in the sourcing template. When you generate sourcing templates automatically, the system uses the cost as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The lower an item s cost, the higher the sourcing priority. Viewing Sourcing Template - Production Option Details Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Production Options page to view detailed production sourcing information about the item. PL_PROD_DTL Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing Inquiry, Production Options For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a sourcing template for the item. Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the production option information S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

89 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Production Options page The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only fields and default based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page. Valid options that have been established for sourcing production appear on this page, including the following production option information: BOM (bill of material) This is the bill of material identifier for the production option within the template. Production options can be predefined or created based on defaults specified at the item attributes by unit level. For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Defining Production Options. Routing Effective Date Obs Date (obsolescence date) Description Unit Cost Batch Cost This is the routing identifier for the production option within the template. This column is empty if routings aren t being used. The routing code also doesn t apply to production options used in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective. Displays when the option becomes obsolete. Describes the item to which this sourcing option belongs. Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the item defined in the sourcing template. When you automatically generate sourcing templates, the system uses this cost as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The lower an item s cost, the higher the sourcing priority. Displays the cost of producing a planned quantity of this item. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-45

90 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Purchase Options page to view detailed purchasing sourcing information about the item. PL_PURCH_DTL1 Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing Inquiry, Purchase Options For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a sourcing template for the item. Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the purchase option information. Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Purchase Options page The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only fields and default based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page. Valid options that have been established for sourcing purchases appear on this page, including the following purchase option information: Vendor Set ID Vendor Vendor Name Priority Groups purchasing business units that share vendor, purchase order, and receiving information with PeopleSoft Payables in the same SetID. Identifies a specific vendor within a vendor set. Name of the vendor as defined during vendor maintenance. Displays the preference of which vendor to use to supply this item. The vendor with the lowest priority number is the most preferred. The Planning engine doesn t use this priority to source demand. If two vendors have the exact same price, you can use the vendor priority as the tiebreaker to determine which one has a higher template priority S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

91 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Lead Time Days Std Price (standard price) Min Order Qty (minimum order quantity) Max Order Qty (maximum order quantity) Order Multiple Purchase Yield This is the purchasing lead time specified for the vendor or item/vendor relationship. This represents the amount of time it takes to get inventory from the vendor. Displays the standard price for the item. This value becomes the default price in transactions where another price, such as a vendor price or a contract price, isn t defined for the item. Displays the minimum amount that can be placed on a purchase order. Displays the maximum amount that can be placed on a purchase order. Displays the multiple the system uses to determine an order quantity. For example, if you have a demand for 28 and the multiple is 10, then the system generates a planned purchase order for 30. Defines the usable output from the purchase. The value is expressed as a percentage. Purchase yield is used in planning to inflate the planned quantity on purchases to account for any loss that may occur during the purchase process. Viewing Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Transfer Options page to view detailed transfer sourcing information about the item. PL_TRANS_DTL1 Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Inquire, Sourcing Inquiry, Transfer Options For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a sourcing template for the item. Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the transfer option information. Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Transfer Options page P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-47

92 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only fields and are defaults based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page. Valid options that have been established for sourcing transfers appear on this page, including the following transfer information: Source BU (source business unit) Total Cost Ship Via Min Order Qty (minimum order quantity) Max Order Qty (maximum order quantity) Order Multiple Transfer Yield Displays the unit that is going to ship the item or product. Displays the total amount it costs to ship the item using the shipping method defined in the Ship Via Code field. Displays the minimum amount that can be placed on a transfer order. Displays the maximum amount that can be placed on a transfer order. Displays the multiple the system uses to determine an order quantity. For example, if you have a demand for 28 and the multiple is 10, then the system generates a planned transfer order for 30. Defines the usable output from the transfer. The value is expressed as a percentage. The transfer yield is used in planning to inflate the planned quantity on transfers to account for any loss that may occur during transport. Defining the Line Schedule Editor Defaults The Line Schedule Editor (LSE) is a graphical interface screen that displays production tasks for multiple items on multiple resources across multiple periods of time. In addition, the LSE enables you to modify the production schedule by changing the scheduled time or resource assignments of the production tasks. With the Line Schedule Editor, you can: Display resource utilization percentage in a given time period. Display overlapping production tasks. Display multiple bar definitions. Freeze, unfreeze, join, split, compress, and expand production tasks. Balance the utilization of resources by time periods and individual resources. Dispatch production tasks by sequencing and assigning task times S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

93 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Setting Up Item Changeover Families Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Item Changeover Family page to associate a SetID with an item changeover family. PL_LSE_FAMILY Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Item Family Group Enter a SetID. Plan Production - Item Changeover Family page SetID is a display-only field that represents a set of control table information or TableSets. A TableSet is a group of tables (records) necessary to define your company's structure and processing options. Enter the name of the Item Changeover Family with a long Description and Short Description. The LSE uses the item changeover family to combine items based on their common production resource (work center, machine, tool, or crew) usage to help visually identify sequencing and changeover points within the production plan. Using the changeover family, you can group items that can sequentially run on the same resource without incurring a changeover. Defining the Line Schedule Editor Color Scheme Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Line Schedule Colors page to establish colors for LSE objects. PL_COLORS Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Colors P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-49

94 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Plan Production - Line Schedule Colors page You can create a new color by changing the color name of an existing color and its corresponding RGB (red, green, and blue) values. Each RGB value can range from 0 to 255 (inclusive). However, you can t add a new row to the color legend. Once you ve defined the LSE colors, you can then assign colors to the LSE objects. Setting Up the Line Schedule Editor General Defaults, Colors, Dimensions, and Time Periods To create an LSE template, you need to define several attributes and maintain them in the transaction system. Through the DataLink, you transfer the LSE data to the Planning engine, from where you can display the LSE chart. Once in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can modify the original settings of the LSE. However, changes that you make to the LSE definition in the Planning Client aren t permanent; therefore, changes must be made in the transaction system for the changes to be saved for future use. If changes are made to the LSE definition in the transaction system, these changes will be modeled in the Planning engine only when the Production DataLink is run in Regenerative mode, not Net Change mode. Defining LSE General Settings Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the General - General page to define the general parameters of the LSE. PL_LSE_GENERAL Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, General, General Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

95 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Line Schedule Editor - General: General page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Select the Copy LSE to Planning check box to include the LSE in the DataLink run (at least one resource and one time period must be defined). If you don t select this check box, no data for this LSE will be transferred to the Planning engine. Select an Above Line Definition from the available options. The Above Line, which appears when there is a capacity shortage, is displayed above the production bar. Your options are No Above Line and Capacity Shortage. The default is No Above Line. Select a Below Line Definition from the available options. The Below Line, which appears when there is a material shortage or unmovable bar, is displayed below the production bar. Your options are No Below Line, Material Shortage, or Unmovable Bar. The default is No Below Line. The Bar Split Duration enables you to define a duration of time that can be used to split up a group of overlapping or continuous tasks that are represented by a single bar in the LSE chart. The duration can be expressed in Days, Hours, and Minutes. The default is 1 minute. The following example illustrates how the Bar Split Duration is used. Suppose you have a bar that represents eight continuous or overlapping production tasks, and suppose you have defined a Bar Split Duration of 1 hour. If you decide to split this bar, then this bar will be divided into two bars such that the last task of the first bar and the first task of the second bar are rescheduled so that they are one hour apart. The Header Format determines where you want the utilization percentage to appear within a cell. Your options are Right, Left, and Center. The default is Right. Select a Date Format for the time period. Your options are Date Only, Hours, Minutes, and Seconds. The default is Date Only. The Cell Over Maximum enables you to specify the pattern that will appear in the cell when the capacity usage in the cell exceeds the maximum utilization percentage. Your options are Forward Diagonal, Backward Diagonal, Cross, Diagcross, Horizontal, Vertical, and None. The default is Forward Diagonal. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-51

96 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Cell Under Minimum enables you to specify the pattern that will appear in the cell when the capacity usage in the cell falls below the minimum utilization percentage. Your options are: Forward Diagonal, Backward Diagonal, Cross, Diagcross, Horizontal, Vertical, and None. The default is Backward Diagonal. If you are creating an Aggregate LSE, you need to specify the Bucket Size. Only aggregate resources with a bucket size equal to the bucket size value specified on this page can be assigned to the LSE. In addition, the bucket size determines the size of the LSE time periods; this is done to ensure that the time periods match the bucket size of the aggregate resources shown in the LSE. Your options are Daily, Weekly, and Monthly. The default is Daily. Defining LSE Dimensions Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the General - Dimensions page to define the display dimensions of the LSE. PL_LSE_DIMS Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, General, Dimensions Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - General: Dimensions page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. The following dimensional characteristics are available for use: Cell Height Cell Width The height of the cell. The default is 180 pixels. The width of the cell. The default is 280 pixels S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

97 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Bar Height The height of the bar. The default is 12. Bar Space Vertical spacing of the bar expressed. The default is 8 pixels. Column Label Height Column Font Height The height of the column irrespective of the font. The default is 26 pixels. The vertical space of the font in the column expressed in number of points. The default is 14 pixels. Row Label Width The width of the row with the label. The default is 100 pixels. Row Font Height The vertical space of the font in the row expressed in points. The default is 16 points. Magnify Cell Height Magnified version of the cell height. The default is 500 pixels. Magnify Cell Width Magnified version of the cell width. The default is 850 pixels. Magnify Bar Height Magnified version of the bar height. The default is 15 pixels. Magnify Bar Space Magnified version of the bar height. The default is 8 pixels. Bar Line Space The amount of space between the bar and the line above or below it. The default is 1 pixel. Magnify Bar Line Space Magnified version of the bar line space. The default is 1 pixel. Row Font Name Column Font Name The name of the font used for the row. The default is Arial. The name of the font used for the column. The default is Arial. Defining LSE Color Settings Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the General - Color Settings page to define the color of LSE objects. PL_LSE_COLORSET Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, General, Color Settings Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-53

98 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Line Schedule Editor - General: Color Settings page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Before you can select a color for the LSE object, the color must exist in the LSE color legend. You can add a color to the legend using the LSE Colors page in the Line Schedule Colors component. By changing the RGB (red, green, blue) color value (0-255 inclusive), you can create any color you desire. The following color schemes are available for you to use: Downtime Color Default Bar Color Above Line Color Below Line Color Cell Color Time Period Color Resource Entry Color Resource Entry Offload Color Cell Under Min Pattern Color Cell Over Max Pattern Color Time Period Over Min Color Default is Gray. Default is Red. If you don t specify the color, then all the bars in the display will appear red. Default is Orange. Default is Cornflower Blue. Default is Light Gray. Default is Light Gray. Default is Light Gray. Default is Teal. Default is Goldenrod. Default is Light Coral. Default is Yellow S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

99 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Time Period Over Max Color Default is Red. Defining LSE Time Periods Time periods form the x-axis of the Line Schedule Editor. Essentially, a LSE time period is an offset of the current time. To display the LSE chart, you must first set up at least one time period for the LSE. Because time periods for a detailed LSE and aggregate LSE are set up differently, you need to define them on two separate pages. Setting Up Time Period for Detailed LSE Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the General - Time Periods Detailed page to define the time periods for a detailed LSE. PL_LSE_TIME Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, General, Time Periods Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - General: Time Periods (Detailed) page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Enter a Start Date Offset (Days) for the first LSE time period as an offset (in days) from the current time. For example, if today s date is 5/5/00 and you want the start day to be one week from now, you would enter 7. Enter a quantity for the Daily Time Periods and Weekly Time Periods. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-55

100 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For Daily Time Periods, specify one Minimum Utilization % (minimum utilization percentage) and one Maximum Utilization % (maximum utilization percentage) to be assigned to each time period. Similarly, for Weekly Time Periods, enter a Minimum Utilization % and Maximum Utilization % for each time period. The default value for the Minimum Utilization % is 0, and the default value for the Maximum Utilization % is 100. Select the Always Start Weekly Periods On check box to indicate that the weekly periods should always begin on a certain day of the week. If you don t select this check box, then the weekly periods will begin immediately after the daily periods end. If you select this check box, then extra daily periods will be added so that the first weekly period begins on the day of the week that you select from the available options. Setting Up Time Period for Aggregate LSE Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the General - Time Periods Aggregate page to define the time periods for an aggregate LSE. PL_LSE_TIME Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, General, Time Periods Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - General: Time Periods (Aggregate) page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Enter a Start Date Offset (Days) for the first LSE time period as an offset (in days) from the current time. For example, if today s date is 5/5/00 and you want the start day to be one week from now, you would enter 7. Specify the number of Time Periods for the LSE. For the time periods, specify one Minimum Utilization % (minimum utilization percentage) and one Maximum Utilization % (maximum utilization percentage) to be assigned to each time 2-56 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

101 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK period that you create. The default value for the Minimum Utilization % is 0, and the default value for the Maximum Utilization % is 100. Setting Up Line Schedule Editor Resource Entries Defaults Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Resources page to view or edit a resource entry and its corresponding bar definition. PL_LSE_RESOURCE Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, Resources Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - Resources page LSE resource entries are placeholders for the resource, and they form the y-axis of the graphical editor. To display the LSE chart, the LSE must contain at least one resource entry. You can add a resource entry any time after you ve created the Line Schedule Editor. Both detailed and aggregate resources can be used as LSE resource entries. The order in which resource entries are added to a Line Schedule Editor determines the order in which they appear in the chart. A detailed resource displays one task at a time and shows how each one is scheduled. Conversely, an aggregate resource shows all tasks scheduled at the same time. The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Select a Resource Type from the available options: Crew, Machine, Rough Cut Resource, Tool, Workcenter, or Workcenter (Subcontract). Select a Resource Code from the prompt. Select a Bar Definition from the following options P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-57

102 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Gantt Item Item Changeover Family Item Utilization Item Changeover Family Utilization This bar represents a single production task. Each bar must be displayed alone on its own cell row, which is similar to the existing task Gantt charts in the PC client. This bar represents a sequence of production tasks for the same item so that no temporal gap exist between the tasks. This means that either each task in the sequence overlaps with the previous and next task of the sequence, or the task is scheduled exactly next to the previous and next task of the sequence. This bar is similar to the Item bar, except that it represents a sequence of production tasks for items that belong to the same item changeover family such that no temporal gaps exist between the tasks. This bar represents all production for a specific item in a cell. Each utilization bar starts at the beginning of the cell and ends according to how much of the resource it consumes for that cell. For example, a bar that takes 50% of the cell utilization will end in approximately the middle of the cell. This bar represents all production for a group of items in a cell that belong to the same item changeover family. Each utilization bar starts at the beginning of the cell and ends according to how much of the resource it consumes for that cell. For example, a bar that takes 50% of the cell utilization will end in approximately the middle of the cell. For a detailed resource, the default bar definition is Item. Aggregate resource uses Item Utilization as the default. Defining LSE Balancing Defaults Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Balancing page to add or edit the balancing parameters for a resource. PL_LSE_LINEBALANCE Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, Balancing Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

103 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Line Schedule Editor - Balancing page PeopleSoft Production Planning provides a set of line balancing utilities that balance the utilization of equipment resources by assigning resources (lines) to production tasks. The primary goal of a line balancing utility is to avoid or reduce overallocation of resources. Line balancing supports both detailed and aggregate resource. However, you can balance only one type of resource at a time. Line balancing utilities provide a flexible mechanism to associate tasks during balancing. You can associate production tasks by item, item-slot values, or demand priority of a pegged chain. In addition, you can determine the order in which you balance the associated production. With line balancing, you can: Balance the utilization of resources by time periods. Balance the utilization of individual resources. Clear all of the production from a resource by time period, grid period, or resource. Offload just enough production according to specified criteria. Move a specific percentage of production from a source grid period to the destination grid period. The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Select a Move Bar Definition from the available options using one of the following options: Fill Move Task Move enough production tasks from one cell to another so that the maximum utilization percentage of the source cell isn t reached. Move tasks around to balance utilization of individual resources. This is the default. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-59

104 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Offload Move the resource from the source row to the destination row. You must first select the source row and move it to another resource row (destination). You can move every cell in the grid into one bar definition row. Select a Dispatch Order from the available options. The dispatch order is crucial to the development of a capacity plan, as it determines how you sequence and assign tasks. The primary purpose of the dispatch utility is to reduce changeover cost and changeover time of the items. Your available options are Changeover Cost, Changeover Item, and Changeover Time. The default is Changeover Cost. The dispatch order applies only to detailed LSE. There is no dispatch order for aggregate LSE. Defining LSE Bar Colors Defaults Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Bar Colors page to assign a color to an item and item changeover family. PL_LSE_CHGOVER Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, Bar Colors Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor -Bar Colors page LSE uses the item changeover family as a criterion to dispatch detailed resources. Items that belong to the same changeover family have the same bar color. Before you can associate an item with an item changeover family, you must first define the changeover family at the SetID level using the Item Changeover Family page in the Item Family 2-60 S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

105 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Group component. Once you have created the changeover family, you can then associate it with an item and color. The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Select an Item ID and Item Changeover Family from the respective prompt. Select a Color Name from the available options. For more information about item changeover families, see PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, Changing Products and Items. Defining LSE Filters Defaults The Line Schedule Editor provides the capability to include and exclude certain bar items and bar colors in the LSE chart. You can choose to turn the filtering feature on and off. Setting Up Bar Item Filters Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Filters - Bar Item Filters page to include certain production items that will be displayed in the LSE. PL_LSE_ITEMFILTER Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, Filters, Bar Item Filters Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - Filters: Bar Item Filters page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-61

106 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Select the Use Bar Item Filter check box if you want to use the bar item filter in PeopleSoft Production Planning. If you don t select this check box, then all bar items will be sent to Planning. Select an Item ID from the available options. The Description appears when you click the field heading or select the Use Bar Item filter check box. Setting Up Bar Color Filters Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Filters - Bar Color Filters page to include certain colors that will be displayed in the LSE. PL_LSE_COLORFILTER Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule Editor, Filters, Bar Color Filters Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and LSE Name. Line Schedule Editor - Filters: Bar Color Filters page The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header of the page and are display-only fields. Select the Use Bar Color Filter check box if you want to use the bar color filter in PeopleSoft Production Planning. If you don t select this check box, then all the bar colors associated with items of changeover families will be displayed in the LSE. Select a Color Name from the available options. You can add as many colors as you want into the grid, as long as the color has been defined in the color legend. Viewing the LSE Chart If you want to view the LSE chart, you must access the Planning client. You can then use the LSE pages for the Planning client to further define the LSE parameters before displaying the chart. In addition, when you display the chart, you can manipulate the LSE objects to generate what-if scenarios S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

107 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about configuring the LSE in the Planning client, see PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, Using the Line Schedule Editor. Verifying Production Planning Data Before you run the Production DataLink, you ll want to verify that the planning data you re sending to the Planning engine is accurate. Understanding the Data Verification Process The Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) enables you to identify items to be planned and validates the items that are currently planned. Using the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000), you can: Identify any PeopleSoft Production Planning components whose routing sequence number is invalid or zero. Identify any manufactured PeopleSoft Production Planning items that have no routing in the routing table. Verify that the master-plan items have only master and material components. Verify that the material plan items have only material components. Identify the Item/Production Areas that have no valid routing. Identify the routings that have no Item/Production Areas. Report routings that have no planning times. Identify items with routings that have no default Production Areas. Generating the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) to report any problems in the planning data. RUN_PLS3000 Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Report, Planning Data Inconsistency Report Enter a Run Control ID. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING 2-63

108 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Process Name Process Type Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) SQR Plan Production - Planning Data Inconsistency page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Language, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Run. Select the business Unit for which you want to generate the Planning Data Inconsistency Report. Click Run to run the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) using Process Scheduler. For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. For examples of this and other reports in your application, see the PDF files published on CD-ROM with your documentation S ETTING U P P RODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

109 C HAPTER 3 Setting Up the Production DataLink One of the powerful features of PeopleSoft Production Planning is the ability to link your enterprise system closely with the advanced planning and scheduling system. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses data extracted from your PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management databases. You maintain all data within these associated applications, including static data (such as item attributes and bills of material) and dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production orders). When you want to generate and analyze a plan, you move the data into the PeopleSoft Production Planning in-memory engine using the Production DataLink. Extracting information from your PeopleSoft database is the first step you perform to generate a production plan. Using the Production DataLink, you extract required data from PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, Order Management, Production Management, and Bills and Routings. The Production DataLink creates the data model that drives the planning solvers and algorithms in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Overview of the Production DataLink Process You use the Production DataLink to define which options you want to include in your master or material plan. These options range from time fences to the types of tasks that you want to include in your plan. You can set up and rerun the DataLink as often as necessary to create a feasible plan and to improve the quality of plans that are already feasible. The Production DataLink generates command files that are sent to Planning servers which, in turn, process the files and send action messages regarding supply and demand back to PeopleSoft Order Management, Inventory, Purchasing, and Production Management. A number of command files exist to set up data for the Planning server, including items and demand and supply files. For example, an Environment file contains the transactions required to define general parameters such as time fences for the planning model while a Procurement file contains the transactions required to set up purchase orders. Planning servers use solvers to process your plan. These planning tools are designed for you to automate the planning process, or they assist you in an interactive mode to develop an executable plan. The capabilities of the solvers range from developing a simple material plan to helping you produce advanced material- and capacity-feasible plans. Solvers help you make planning decisions from an enterprise level down to the manufacturing floor. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-1

110 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 You can run planning solvers several times and in several ways for a given PeopleSoft Production Planning data model. This includes automatically setting up and running a solver to generate a plan when you load the initial data or manually specifying parameters and initiating the solvers. Also, you aren t limited just to one solver for each planning model. It might be necessary to control the PeopleSoft Production Planning process by solving finished-goods material problems before solving lower-level capacity issues. Using the DataLink, you can define which items you want to plan for in both PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning and PeopleSoft Production Planning as well as the types of demand and supply you want to include in your plan. Flow of data between the PeopleTools transaction system and Planning servers The Production DataLink is instrumental in bringing together item and inventory data from other PeopleSoft applications, including Order Management, Purchasing, Inventory, and Manufacturing. The DataLink creates a planning model that it sends to Planning servers. Dynamic data that is moved in the example is constantly changing and flexible. This type of data is made up of demands, such as forecasts, and supplies, such as transfer orders. 3-2 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

111 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning servers might contain manufacturing and inventory business units whereas the PeopleSoft Production Planning servers focus on only a single manufacturing site. When the DataLink creates a planning model, it includes but isn t limited to the following data: General planning parameters. Business unit definitions and item definitions. Inventory balances and policies. Production and closure calendar information. Transfer and purchasing attributes. Manufacturing bills and routings. Demand and supply transactions. After the Production DataLink produces the data model and the Planning solvers generate a master or material plan, the system returns results in the form of planning messages that you can use to commit the plan back to PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, Production Management and Order Management. For more information about reviewing planning messages, see Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management. Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink When you set up the Production DataLink, you can define which solvers you want to use to process the plan after you load the data model into the Planning engine. The Planning engine runs the solvers based on the controls you define. You use solvers to create viable medium-term material and capacity requirement plans that are easy to understand and use. For medium-term planning, you can use solvers available in the Production DataLink to determine what is required to meet all demands and make your plans material- and capacity-feasible. Material feasibility means that the longest cumulative lead-time exists within a doable time frame where there are no material shortages. Capacity feasibility means that there are no critical capacity violations for aggregate resources that are marked for repair in the planning time period. Four solvers are available for you to run automatically during the loading of the data model into the Planning server. The ultimate goal of the solvers is to produce a plan that doesn t contain material shortages or capacity violations. In addition to producing material- and capacity-feasible plans, solvers identify and report on unavoidable instances in which the plan is jeopardized. For P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-3

112 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 example, perhaps material cannot be sourced or when there is insufficient lead time to satisfy a demand. In determining feasible plans, solvers use pegged chains that tie tasks and top-level demand together. In doing so, solvers can explicitly track and record which supplies they are using to satisfy which demands. The Production DataLink uses the following solvers to assist you in producing a viable plan: Material Planning Solver Feasible Planning Solver LP Solver (Linear Programming Solver) Provides a simple plan that resolves material shortages. It also provides a variety of options, such as capacity smoothing, generating fixed-period requirements, and consolidating purchase orders. Using the Material Planning Solver provides a good starting point for generating a feasible plan. You can create a material plan for any combination of master and material-planning items in Production Planning. Tries to resolve all material and capacity exceptions and to meet all due dates, using demand priority and minimizing lateness as much as possible. The solver also minimizes excess inventory and tries to maintain just-in-time scheduling and preserve existing supply and demand relationships. Serves as a more complex planning tool that models the supply chain and computes schedules that optimize a selected objective while satisfying a set of specified constraints on operations. It is especially designed to work with reasonably large data sets. The modeling process extracts basic supply chain information from Production Planning data structures and generates an aggregated supply chain model in linear programming form. The solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacityfeasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions that feed into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan. 3-4 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

113 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Iterative Repair Also called the Optimizer, this advanced planning tool is available for creating a plan or detailed schedule. You can run Iterative Repair by itself or as part of the overall planning process. Iterative Repair doesn t use pegged chains or demand priorities. Although we don t recommend it, you can run Iterative Repair as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning Solver. During each of its phases, the Optimizer runs a series of iterations and repairs a series of violations. After you run an iteration, the Optimizer scores the schedule and determines whether or not to continue working on that iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative Repair to determine which constraints are violated as well as the order in which the violated constraints should be repaired. Reviewing Time Fences Used by Solvers Fences play an important role in how solvers analyze supply and demand. These fences represent points in time before or after which solvers take certain actions. Solvers use fences to determine how far supply or demand tasks can be moved forward or backward to meet planning needs. Planning and scheduling problems occur within four periods of time. Time fences help define the following types of planning periods: Today s schedule that has been released to the manufacturing floor. Short-term scheduling on a time line with shift or daily bucket planning. Medium-term planning. Long-term planning. Solvers are best applied to medium-term planning. This planning period typically focuses on tactical planning issues such as meeting due dates, managing inventory levels, planning material deliveries and resource loads, and making sourcing decisions. Capacity- and material-feasible planning occur across medium- and long-term planning. You use the following types of fences when using solvers: Start of Time This is the beginning time boundary, before which time doesn t exist. Orders and changes aren t recognized before this point in time. Used with the end of time, the region defines the time period within which the system recognizes orders and changes. Solvers don t recognize times before the start of time. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-5

114 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Early Fence Current Time Capacity Fence Late Fence End of Time This is the beginning time of the interval within which solvers process the elements of the material- and capacityfeasible plans. You usually set the early fence to the current date. This is the current date and time as set by the system. This fence is used to define various time offsets respected by the planning solvers. The date and time that solvers begin ignoring capacity violations. After the date, the Material Planning, Feasible Planning, and LP Solvers ignore violations; however, the Optimizer doesn t use this date when it processes capacity violations. If the capacity fence intersects an aggregate capacity bucket, then aggregate capacity violations are respected for the current bucket interval but ignored for the succeeding bucket intervals. The LP Solver and Iterative Repair Solver use this fence as a point to distinguish the planning horizon. They cannot schedule task after this fence. This is the concluding time boundary. Time doesn t exist after this date. Solvers don t recognize orders or changes after this date. The planning horizon for the Material Planning and Feasible Planning Solvers spans the time between the early fence and the end of time. The planning horizon for the LP Solver and the Optimizer spans the time between the early time fence and the late time fence. Each solver is designed to behave in certain ways with respect to fences. For example, the Material Planning Solver is set to respect the early time fence by not rescheduling any tasks that begin before the fence. Planning servers also contain several utilities that use time fences. The Expand utility reschedules tasks as close to the late fence as possible without creating material or capacity violations. The Compress utility reschedules tasks as close to the early fence as possible without creating material or capacity violations. The early fence provides a boundary before which solvers, the Optimizer, and the Compress and Expand utilities cannot move tasks. As a general rule, the region before the early fence is frozen to the planning solvers. Each solver and the utilities process planning conditions work with time fences. You also maintain tasks within time fences. 3-6 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

115 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Planning Conditions Reschedule tasks before Early Fence Move orders before Early Fence Create new orders before Early Fence Respect Late Fence Recognize violations before Early Fence Respect Capacity Fence Beginning Fence Ending Fence Boundaries Material Planning Solver No No No Feasible Planning Solver By Exception By Exception By Exception LP Solver Optimizer Expand/ Compress Utilities No No No Yes No No No Yes No By Exception No No Yes Yes Yes No NA No No No NA NA Yes Yes Yes No No No Early Fence End of Time Early Fence End of Time Early Fence Late Fence Early Fence Late Fence No Early Fence Late Fence Manual Resched. NA Start of Time End of Time Pegged Chain Processing for Solvers In determining feasible plans, the solvers use pegged chains that tie tasks and top-level demand together. In doing so, solvers can explicitly track and record which supplies they are using to satisfy what demands. The following diagram shows an example of how demand is linked with its supply through pegged chains. Although the diagram suggests a left-to-right flow, pegged chains appear in the Supply Chain Viewer on a time line that flows backward from how the example appears. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-7

116 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Pegged chain example In the example Task A, the sales order shipment represents the top-level demand for the blue bicycle. The pegging records that Task B supplies this top-level demand by transferring the supply. Task B, in turn, places the demand for the bicycle on the transferred-from business unit and is pegged/satisfied by Task C. This relationship continues down the chain as illustrated, so that all the tasks in the chain are linked and their supply eventually serves the top-level demand for Task A as recorded in the pegging. Top-level demand is the highest level in a bill of material (BOM) hierarchy. Independent demand is a type of top-level demand. Using pegged chains, the planning solvers can: Move the entire pegged chain when tasks need to be moved, resolving capacity violations and fixing late supplies. The movement helps maintain material requirements planning (MRP)-like properties, such as lot-for-lot behavior, and minimizes excess inventory. Develop more intelligent heuristics that enable you to see the entire cumulative downstream effects on the plan directly as a task is moved. Provide demand priority data to help support manual decisions. For example, if you move a task manually, you can easily tell which demands the movement affects. Provide demand priority data to help make detailed automated decisions. For example, the system can resolve a capacity overload by selecting candidates to move later based on the priorities and lateness preferences of the pegged demands. Using Solvers to Process a Plan How you use solvers depends on the objectives of your plan. There isn t a defined order for running each solver or a predefined set of rules that you must include in a solver run. You can, 3-8 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

117 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK for example, use solvers to determine when you intervene to produce a feasible plan. You can alter the flow of tasks to meet specific planning needs. Example of using solvers to process feasible plans To create a material- and capacity-feasible plan, use the following steps: 1. Use the Roll Forward utility to move past-due tasks to a valid time in the future. You can automatically roll forward active phases or you can use a Planning server to work with the task you want to roll forward. For more information about Roll Forward phases, see Setting Up Production Planning. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-9

118 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY Set up the Production DataLink to generate an initial material plan using one of the following solvers: Material Planning Solver: Use this solver to generate an initial material plan. Because this is the initial plan, you can run it in either Regenerative or Net Change mode. LP Solver: Use this solver to generate an initial plan when there are more complex tradeoff decisions in the supply chain network. These decisions might include sourcing, alternate resources, item substitution, or material allocations based on demand priority decisions. This is a regenerative process in which all independent demands are rescheduled to their due date and all tasks with status of Planned are deleted. You can run the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver to create a plan that is feasible. Feasible Planning Solver: Use this solver to create a plan that ensures material and resource capacity is available to meet the plan. When the initial plan isn t created lot-for-lot, such as with the LP Solver or with the Fixed Period option in material planning, the Feasible Planning Solver may create temporary excess inventory in the plan. 3. Review and make manual changes to the plan. The system provides you with a number of options that you can use to review and resolve tasks with late material supplies, to repair various problems with the plan, and plan for resources. The following options are available: Planning workbenches provide a way for you to interact with the plan using an Internet browser. Using the workbenches, you can change order quantities, dates, and tasks. You can also freeze tasks, cancel existing orders, or delete new planned orders. A Planning Scorecard provides a way for you to review the number of constraint violations, the score, and counts for each type of constraint. The Planning Scorecard is available through an Internet browser or through the Advanced Planning Client. Gantt and histogram charts and spreadsheets assist you to locate and resolve problems in the plan. Use a Planning server to access these options. Gantt charts and histograms are available through the Advanced Planning Client only. Spreadsheets are available through the Internet browser and the Advanced Planning Client. Pegging Gantt charts show you the pegged relationships between the top-level demand and dependent demand tasks. Right-click a task in the Gantt chart and select Solver Pegging. You can review the forward, backward, or entire pegged chain for the task. Use a Planning server to access this option. Pegging Gantt charts are available in the Advanced Planning Client only. Task property sheets are available for you to make changes to a single or multiple tasks. For example, you can change the duration or the end time of a late purchase order. Use a Planning server to access this option. Task property sheets are available through the Advanced Planning Client. The Modify Resources to Repair utility makes it possible to define which resources should be repaired when you run the solvers. You can use this utility before you run the initial plan S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

119 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Use a Planning server to access this option. You can identify resources to repair persistently when setting up resources or while working with data using the Advanced Planning Client. When changing which resources to repair through the Advanced Planning Client, the changes are only retained for that data model while in-memory within the Planning server. The Late Supplies Inquiry enables you to view and define how the Feasible Planning Solver should handle supplies not available on time to meet demand. Use a Planning server to access this option. The inquiry is available in the Advanced Planning Client only. The Unfulfilled Demand Inquiry enables you to view demand with insufficient pegged supply and unmet safety-stock requirements. Use a Planning server to access this option. The inquiry is available in the Advanced Planning Client only. 4. Run the Feasible Planning Solver. The Feasible Planning Solver uses the existing plan and ensures that it is a material- and, optionally, a capacity-feasible plan. You can run the solver multiple times using different options, giving you the opportunity to make manual changes or to view the current state of the plan. In this way, you use the solver as a powerful net-change mode. Alternatively, all phases of generating the final plan can be automated into a single run. 5. Develop a detailed plan manually using the Line Schedule Editor. This is an optional step. You use the Line Schedule Editor primarily for short-term planning. After developing a detailed plan, you might need to change the early fence date to separate the new short-term planning horizon from the medium-term horizon. This fence indicates that up to this point you are satisfied with the plan. Subsequent solvers assume that you will handle material and capacity exceptions before this fence and won t make any short-term planning changes before the fence. While you use the editor for short-term planning, it may still be useful for intervening in special cases in the medium-term horizon. For more information about the Line Schedule Editor, see Setting Up Production Planning. Overview of the Material Planning Solver The Material Planning Solver creates a simple material plan to give an accurate picture of the lead-time and materials necessary to satisfy all top-level demands. Material planning handles production, purchases, and transfer supply task plans in a lot-for-lot manner, unless you use the fixed period of supply option or order modifiers. Supplies are created just in time to satisfy their demand. Before it creates any new planned orders, the solver reschedules or uses existing orders. The Material Planning Solver uses existing supply or creates supply for all demands in the system. However, when supply is planned for demand and there isn t enough lead time or the demand is before the early fence, the system records the relationship using pegged chains and creates supply as early as possible after the early fence. When creating this supply, the solver P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-11

120 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 explodes the primary routing using the primary resource and doesn t consider alternate routings, alternate resources, or the cost of getting supplies on time. When you run the Material Planning Solver, it uses backward planning techniques to create planned orders by exploding them earlier in time and down the bill of material structure while respecting all relevant task calendars and legal times. The solver uses the following planning modes: Regenerative Net Change When Material Planning is run in this mode, all tasks or orders with a status of Planned are deleted from existing data and a material plan is generated for all inventory items. With this mode, all previous supply and demand relationships (recorded in the pegging) are erased and all independent demand is rescheduled to its original due date. When you use this mode to run the Material Planning Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies and raw materials. When there is a material shortage recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in demand is planned again. When a supply is late for a demand but is pegged, it isn t considered a material shortage. When a part is planned for again in the Net Change mode, all planned supplies are deleted and any end-demands for that part are returned to their due date. In addition, all pegging history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged. The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the Feasible Planning Solver or using the Planning server to run the Late Supplies Inquiry. Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations between the early fence and end of time. If you use the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option, it ensures capacity feasibility as well. The solver is designed to start from any initial plan and turn it into an executable plan. It tries to do this while making only minimal changes to the existing plan. When the solver is invoked, it checks any current pegging for consistency and maintains that pegging. The only situation for which the solver modifies the pegging is when it is necessary to make the plan material- and capacity-feasible. If pegging doesn t exist, the Feasible Planning Solver creates the pegging based on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

121 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK If you have frozen tasks, model errors, or insufficient lead time in the planning horizon, the Feasible Planning Solver may encounter capacity or material violations that cannot be resolved. In these cases, the solver identifies unavoidable problems and makes the rest of the plan feasible. The most basic use of the Feasible Planning Solver is to have all parameters for it unselected. The following sections describe how the solver processes a plan when you use this mode and all other modes. Verifying Current Supply and Demand Quantities The solver checks to ensure that the current supply and demand quantities aren t in disagreement with any existing pegging. If they disagree, the solver adjusts the pegging to make it consistent. Then it records the supply and demand quantities for the item, inventory constraints, and item supplies. Satisfying Unmet Demand When the solver finds an unmet demand, it does the following: Looks for unpegged supply that is earlier in time and pegs it with the demand. If the supply isn t already pegged, it rescheduled it just in time for the new demand. Checks to see if the Planning server histogram at the end of time (plus a base safety stock, which is the level of the stock period at the end of time) indicates that the plan is short in supply. If it is, the solver creates a minimum amount of supply either to move the histogram up to a positive value or to satisfy the current demand. After it makes the histogram positive, the solver schedules and pegs unpegged supplies that occur later than the unmet demand, avoiding permanent excess stock. The Inventory histogram provides a representation of the projected quantity for an item. The histogram may be negative after unmet demand is satisfied. If a previous solver has decided that a supply is for a demand as reflected by the pegging, the Feasible Planning Solver respects that demand as met, even if the supply is late. The late supplies are corrected if you select the Allow Rescheduling check box. Verifying Demand Priority for Frozen Tasks At the start of feasible planning runs, the solver verifies that the frozen priorities are assigned correctly in case the frozen status has changed between Feasible Planning Solver runs. The demand priority on a task is based on the highest-priority top-level demand that the task supplies. For example, if a production task supplies a priority 10, 5, and 3 demand, the priority of P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-13

122 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 that production task is 3, the highest priority. The system assumes that all subtasks under a parent have the same priority. If you change the priority of a task, the existing pegging, in most cases, won t recognize the change. If you regenerate the plan, the change will be recognized only for end demands. All pegging is erased using the Regenerate mode, so component supplies return to the default 999 priority. If a task is frozen, it has a system-reserved priority of zero. You can see the priority value by using the Demand Prioritization option in PeopleSoft Production Planning. As with other priorities, all component tasks inherit the zero priority. When the plan is processed, the Planning engine interprets the zero priority as unmovable in the forward direction and these tasks are given the highest priority. In this case, the system does not assume that all subtasks under the parent have the same priority. Step 3 of a 10-step production process may be frozen, since the priority zero means a task cannot be moved forward; only component supply for steps 1 through 3 will have the zero priority. If step 5 demands a component, that component will reflect the priority of the highest-priority end demand. Ensuring Positive On-Hand Quantity at the Early Fence If a supply ends after the early fence and its pegged demand starts before the early fence, the Feasible Planning Solver cannot resolve this infeasibility without violating the early fence. In this situation, the solver uses the demand s move preference in the Late Supplies Inquiry and either schedules the supply in or schedules the demand out. Sourcing Allocations and Options to Reduce Lead Time If you enable material reallocation, alternate routings, or item substitution, the Feasible Planning Solver tries to shorten the lead time of pegged chains that are late. The solver goes through the pegged chains in priority order and tries to make them on time. It selects the highest-level late demands down each branch of the supply chain and tries to find alternate ways to get the supply based on the reallocation methods you select. If the solver fails to find a feasible source of supply for a particular demand down a branch, it tries to find an alternate way to get that demand s supply higher up in the pegged chain. For example, you might build bicycles and have a late supply only for tires. If the solver can t find an alternate way to replenish the tires on time, it looks for alternate ways to replenish wheels. If it can t find wheels on time, it looks for wheel assemblies, and if the solver can t find wheel assemblies, it looks for bicycles. Another example might be when an MRP has a demand for bicycles on the early fence and there isn t a supply on the schedule. This means that the bicycles are late, the wheel assemblies are late, and so on down the chain. However, in this case the solver begins the search at the highest level of demand. So it begins and ends the search looking for an alternate source of bicycles. To make a plan material feasible, the Feasible Planning Solver uses the following steps when you select all options: 1. First, the solver looks for unpegged supply for the primary item when any options are selected on the page. This is supply that isn t pegged to another demand S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

123 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK 2. Failing the previous first step, and if Allow Item Substitution is selected, the solver looks for unpegged supply for substitute items in the full amount required to meet the demand. 3. Failing the second step, and if Allow Alternate Routings is selected, the solver looks at all transfers, production, and purchases for the supply. 4. Failing the third step, and if the Allow Material Reallocation option is selected, the solver reallocates the item s supply on the primary item to the highest-priority demands. 5. Failing the fourth step, and if the Allow Material Reallocation option is selected along with the Allow Item Substitution option, the solver reallocates all primary and all valid substitutes to the highest-priority demands. When supply is reallocated across substituted items, the solver doesn t consider the priority of the substitute defined in the bill of materials. For example, a task may lose its primary item to a higher-priority task that has the reallocated part as a secondary substitute. Reducing Excess Inventory At the end of the Feasible Planning Solver run, regardless of the sourcing and allocation options, the solver tries to reduce excess inventory. Where possible, the solver exchanges a feasible existing supply for a feasible planned supply and deletes leftover planned tasks and cancels leftover existing tasks. If you don t ignore safety stock, the excess clean-up won t delete supplies such that the stock level drops below the current safety limit in the period when the supply ends. Making the Plan Capacity Feasible The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option invokes a capacity repair feature when you run the Feasible Planning Solver. When you make the plan capacity-feasible, the Feasible Planning Solver resolves aggregate capacity violations by moving tasks, in time, to alternate resources. Or, if Use Alternate Routings is selected, the solver moves tasks to alternate production options that have a different bill of resource but the same bills of material. The capacity-feasible option resolves aggregate capacity violations while maintaining material feasibility. It doesn t resolve detailed resource violations. The Capacity phase of the solver tries to first find opportunities earlier in time to place the task; failing that, it schedules supplies later to ensure capacity feasibility. When looking earlier, the solver makes decisions based on the available and alternate resources and routings, and selects the resource and routings that cause the least change in the backward direction to the parent task s start time. For example, if the solver has the choice to schedule a task on the primary resource two days earlier, on the alternate resource one day earlier, or on the alternate routing with a primary resource one hour earlier, the solver selects the alternate routing. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-15

124 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 When scheduling tasks later for capacity, the solver tries to keep the highest-weighted priority items in a bucket when it determines which tasks remain in a resource bucket and which ones are moved. The Feasible Planning Solver uses the following rules to determine which buckets to repair: Buckets that are under capacity are skipped unless other tasks are moved into them from previous periods and they are pushed over capacity. Resources that are set to ignore capacity violations aren t repaired. Frozen, complete, or canceled tasks are never moved using the capacity-feasible option. Tasks that are components of frozen tasks in the pegged chain aren t moved later in time because this would create a material shortage. After the solver defines movable tasks in an aggregate capacity bucket, it moves the tasks based on how the resource is allocated. The resource allocation determines whether the task consumes the resource at the start of the task, at the finish of the task, or in proportion to the fraction of the task that overlaps the bucket. The solver uses the following process to move tasks: It first looks at resources that can be repaired. These are the ones that are not selected to Ignore Violations. Then it determines which resource to repair in conjunction with the first bucket with a violation. Next, the solver selects which tasks that are assigned to the resource in that bucket to move. It first tries to move all the movable tasks and their component chains earlier in priority order. If this doesn t repair the capacity bucket, it then moves the remaining candidates to later buckets using advanced algorithms based on the bucket allocation strategy, the task priorities, and the quantity of capacity consumed by the task. When the solver tries to repair aggregate resources, By Unit implies that the task consumes multiple resource units over units of time. By Time indicates that only a certain amount of time can be consumed using that bucket's resource. A Yes indicates that the solver tries to fix the bucket. A No indicates that it ignores the bucket. Capacity Measurement Resource Allocation Resource Allocation Resource Allocation Start Finish Proportional By Unit Yes Yes Yes By Time No No Yes Buckets for resources that you select to Ignore Capacity violations aren t repaired, regardless of the resource allocation or resource bucket size S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

125 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The next sections describe how the Capacity Feasible Solver moves tasks later using the Start, Finish, and Proportional allocation strategies. Using Resource Allocation at Start or Finish (by Unit Only) The resource allocation method tries to fit the highest sum of weighted priorities into the bucket. The goal is to get the most product value into the bucket. In this case, value is determined by the weighted priority, but it is tempered by the size of the task. Using Proportional Allocation (by Unit or Time) Using the proportional resource allocation method, tasks might consume resources in several buckets. The goal of the method is to move lowest-weighted priority tasks first, proceeding until either the bucket is repaired or the solver has attempted to move all tasks out of the bucket. It orders tasks one at a time until the bucket s capacity is filled. To move tasks, the proportional resource allocation method uses the following steps: 1. By priority, with higher values (999) moving first. 2. By lateness tolerances, where late tasks aren t moved. 3. By absolute lateness, where the number of days determines what is moved. 4. By tasks with the latest start time. Determining Weighted Priorities for Capacity Planning This section describes how the system uses weighted priorities and how weighting interacts with different resource allocation methods. The Feasible Planning Solver uses weighting and lateness tolerances to determine which tasks to move. The demand priority is the placing of importance on independent demand. The lateness tolerance represents how sensitive your enterprise is to not meeting demand requirements that fall within the specified priority range. Lateness tolerance data is a table of priorities and a tolerance that indicate the lateness you are willing to tolerate for that priority of top-level demand. The pegged chain links the independent demand to tasks associated with dependent demand. You can set a demand priority from 1 to 999, with 1 as the most important level. Using the demand priority numerical value, you can then assign a number of days as the lateness tolerance level your enterprise determines to be acceptable for tasks to fulfill the demand. The following is an example of how the two values are combined. A top-level demand with a priority less than or equal to: Is considered tolerably late as long as its lateness tolerance doesn t exceed this number of days: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-17

126 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 A top-level demand with a priority less than or equal to: Is considered tolerably late as long as its lateness tolerance doesn t exceed this number of days: When weighted priorities are the same, you usually keep high-priority late tasks in a bucket and move lower-priority tasks that aren t as late. Use the Demand Prioritization option to define prioritization rules and the demand priority. PeopleSoft Production Planning priorities are set at the business-unit level. This provides more flexibility to PeopleSoft Production Planning in modeling production runs for different business units. Computing Lateness, Lateness Tolerance, and Relative Lateness Lateness is the amount of time top-level demand is delayed beyond the demand due date. This measurement isn t used directly to compute the weighted priority, but it is used to determine the independent demand's lateness tolerance and the relative lateness. The lateness tolerance is computed from the tolerances you define and indicates the relative importance of task priority groups. If the independent demand's lateness is on or beyond this tolerance, the independent demand is given a higher weighting. Relative lateness is a scaled, absolute measure of the lateness of a task. The scale is from 1 to 100. For example, if the worst lateness of a task in a bucket is 5 days, then for all tasks in the bucket, 5 days becomes a relative lateness of 100. If a task is 4 days late, the system assigns it a relative lateness of 80. If a task isn t late, the system assigns it a relative lateness of 0. If a task is 2 days late (using the calculation 100 x (2/5) = 40), the system sets the relative lateness value at 40. The system uses the formula to break ties when tasks have equal priority and have the same status relative to intolerably late settings. Weighted Priority The weighted priority is a number that is a mix between the task priority, the lateness tolerance data, and the relative lateness of a task. The lateness tolerance data is part of the environment and is related to the priority of the task. The Planning engine uses the following formula to determine the most important tasks: wt = ( pt )* yt *(1000)+ ((lt / l*)*100) The following values are a part of the formula: t lt Task. Lateness of task t. This is actually the amount of time past the tolerably late limit for a task S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

127 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK l* Maximum of all lateness values. pt Priority of task t: 999 for unimportant, 0 for frozen. wt Weighted priority for task t. yt Zero if the task isn t late or is tolerably late, and 1 if the task is on or beyond the lateness tolerance. The formula works as follows: The weighted priority is a 7-digit number. The first three digits represent the relative demand priority of the task. This value ranges from 1 to 999. The fourth digit can be 0 or 1. It is set to 1 if the task is at or beyond its lateness tolerance. The three right-most digits (the fifth, sixth, and seventh digits) represent the lateness relative to other late tasks. The maximum lateness value for a task is 100. Tasks that aren t late are equal to 0. Improving Plan Quality The Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases help you increase the quality of the material- and capacity-feasible plan. Using the Lateness Phase, the solver looks for all possible ways to source end items and to reduce their overall lateness. It does an exhaustive search for gaps in capacity, substitutes, and alternate routing options (including production with different BOMs) defined in the model. The repair first searches on late independent demands in priority order, working on intolerably late orders first. These demands include transfer, forecasts, and sales orders. The search tries to get the demand on time, or as close as possible to the due date. If it cannot make the demand on time, it reduces the lateness of the order as much as possible. The Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. It shouldn t be used if you are trying to minimize nervous behavior in the plan. The Stock Adjustment Phase tries to reduce temporary excess by scheduling supplies just in time for their demands. In addition, it tries to restore any missed safety-stock periods by scheduling late any demands that are a lower priority than safety stock. To reduce nervousness in this phase, you can set the resolution in the Planning server s Main Environment. The Stock Adjustment Phase checks this value and won t reschedule to reduce excess or repair safety stock if the distance of the move is less than the resolution. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-19

128 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Checking Effectivities If you don t interrupt the Feasible Planning Solver, and the selected options have finished processing, the system checks to see that all the planned production in the system is placed in an effective time range. If a planned task exists outside an effective range, the solver deletes it and the demand is sourced again with effective options. Any new sourced tasks are made material- and, optionally, capacity-feasible according to the current solver settings. Overview of the LP Solver Linear programming provides a global view of the supply chain problem. The solver models the planning constraints into a system of linear inequalities and then solves this linearly relaxed system to obtain an optimal solution. Whereas the solution contains global and optimal information of the problem, it is a linear estimation, containing little task-specific information. To address this, the solver automatically runs a post processor that provides a real, task-based solution for planning. The post processor is based on logic and procedures that build a task-level schedule from aggregate solutions, such as sourcing, equipment selection, and general timing. The aggregate solution is converted into a task-specific plan on a detailed timeline. This makes it possible for the features of the LP Solver to work with the other solvers. The LP Solver modeling process extracts basic supply chain information from the Planning engine data structures and generates an aggregated supply chain model in linear programming form. Typical LP objective functions might include; penalties for violations, such as low inventory or late delivery, minimized cost, and maximized profit. Objective functions are realvalued mathematical functions that are optimized. These objective functions try to maximize or minimize a particular objective. The LP Solver s global perspective is especially important in PeopleSoft Production and Enterprise Planning and can also prove helpful in single-facility planning when there are numerous production alternatives competing for shared resources. The Feasible Planning Solver and LP Solver complement each other. You use the LP Solver to generate an initial plan when there are more complex trade-off decisions in the supply chain network. These decisions might include sourcing decisions, alternate resources use, part substitution, or allocations. When you have a large amount of data, the LP Solver gives you a more balanced starting point after which you can use the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain more detailed solutions. The LP Solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacity-feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions to run the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan. When you use the LP Solver, an automated procedure extracts all necessary information from existing planning data structures and constructs an appropriate LP model of the supply chain. You have various controls over the construction of the LP model, that include: 3-20 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

129 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Specifying the number of days, weeks, and months to use in breaking up the planning horizon into discrete periods. Defining standard lot sizes, by item or globally, used in calibrating the average activities modeled in the LP. Providing a number of weighting factors that determine how a monetary unit of cost or profit is traded off against a violation of constraints, such as stock levels, delivery milestones, and equipment capacity. In modeling the supply chain, linear programming simplifies and stylizes real-world operations in the following ways: The LP Solver uses algebraic relations to represent conditions that would be called constraints or objectives in planning. These relations must be expressed in terms of weighted sums of variables representing levels of production and distribution activity. LP Solver decision variables can take on any value. Activity levels don t need to correspond to specific discrete lot sizes. The post processor restores the actual lot sizes during its processing. For any activity, the consumption of resources and the production of output are proportional to the level of activity. For any resource or material, total usage or production is the sum of the usage/production of all activities. In linear programming, time is typically represented as a sequence of discrete time intervals with durations considerably longer than one second. Computational burden limits the number of time intervals that can be included in a model. Depending on the time horizon and the number of items, units, and options in the supply chain, a practical time interval could be, at best, a day and may have to be as long as a week or a month. An LP Solver model of many facilities and options doesn t explicitly represent individual tasks. Rather, the LP Solver solves for average rates of production or shipment over each modeled time interval. In return for these approximations, an LP Solver model permits a global view of the supply chain over a finite time horizon. It explicitly considers differences in production technology and resources among units and further recognizes the limitations in the distribution network. With the big picture in mind, the LP model globally sources production and distribution among units and over time to make the best use of available resources. Enforcing Constraints LP Solver supply chain modeling considers and enforces the following major categories of constraints: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-21

130 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Material/Inventory Balance Resource Capacity Meet Top-Level Demand Item Substitution If you view supply chain planning as a model to describe the physical movement of goods, this category of constraints basically says that in each time period at each physical location, the goods that go in minus the goods that go out should equal the accumulation at that location. The constraints also enforce boundaries on safety and excess stock. The main challenge facing planners is to allocate resources effectively throughout the enterprise in given situations such as demand from forecast. It is fundamentally important to enterprise planners to be able to produce a plan that is feasible with respect to the existing resources. Meets sales order, supply, and demand transfer types, and forecasts demands with or without back-order penalties. The supplies of the alternate items should meet the demands of the primary item. Planning Features Processed by the LP Solver When you use the LP Solver, you need to set up only a limited number of additional parameters that determine planning periods and various objective function configurations. Most of the functions the solver uses aren t visible to you, but determine the results of your plan. This section describes PeopleSoft product features that the LP Solver considers during processing. Objective Function Configurations The LP Solver finds an optimal aggregate plan with respect to a specified objective function subject to resource constraints. You can configure the objective function through the LP parameter settings. For instance, the solver finds a plan with minimum sales order lateness if you set the carrying cost to zero, or it can solve for a plan to minimize inventory carrying cost if you set a high carrying cost factor and a low lateness penalty factor. Item Substitution The LP Solver uses item substitutions on existing orders for which the task status and the Remap flag allow substitutions. In post processing, any substitutions made by the solver remain intact. Substitution choices are based on overall cost. If the priority sequence defined for the item isn t by cost, then the solver can decide to create a new supply for a substitute rather than for the primary item. The solver doesn t model substitutions on transfers, sales orders, or forecasts. Use-Up Components The LP model doesn t include any purchase or production variables that supply an item in periods after the item s phase-out date. When it uses production options with co-products, the solver uses the latest phase-out date across all co-products. If the date occurs within a planning period, then the solver enables supplies for the period if most of the period is legal S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

131 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK In the LP model, the safety-stock level is reduced to zero after the phase-out date. If the solver finds late arriving demand for a phased-out item, it stockpiles supplies to satisfy the demand. It does so if the cost of stockpiling is less than the cost of substituting and less than the penalty for leaving the demand unsatisfied. Alternate BOM and Routings This makes it possible for the LP Solver to look for the most cost-effective routing for a production option. You have to define the production option for valid combinations of BOM and routing. Co-Products and By-Products The LP Solver models co-products and by-products but doesn t make a distinction between the two. It reflects the appropriate credits and debits for recycle and waste by-products. If the disposal of a by-product isn t explicitly modeled in the supply chain, the costs of the production variables in the solver are increased to include the disposal charge based on output quantity and the standard cost of the by-product. If the reuse of by-products isn t explicitly modeled in the supply chain, the costs of the production variables in the solver are decreased to reflect a recycle credit. If the supply chain explicitly models the reuse of by-products, a recycle credit is automatically recognized by the solver through the avoided cost of additional supplies of the item. However, if the supply of the recycled by-product can only be partially reused, the solver uses artificial variables to absorb the supply and creates a cost credit for the excess supply. The cost credits derive from the standard costs of the by-product. Multiple Effective Ranges on Production Options Production options are included in the LP supply chain when the option is available for use in planned production orders. The LP Solver allows for multiple, intermittent effective ranges on a production option. The solver calculates an effective range for each alternative mode of a production operation, such as a combination of equipment choices and component substitutes. The effective range for a production mode is the intersection of the current range and the effective range or ranges for the production option itself. If an effective range for a production option ends within a solver period, then the period includes only production variables for the effective option if most of the period is effective. Variable Capacity Over Time The solver queries the resource history to determine available capacity over the LP Solver period. Forecast Fulfillment The LP Solver uses the forecast fulfillment process to manage forecasted demand over a period of time. The process makes it possible for the solver to divide the total forecast demand into portions so that you can meet certain portions of the forecast if the total forecast cannot be met entirely. The solver can either meet the supply shortage during the same planning bucket in which the shortage occurs or carry it over into the next bucket. The LP Solver tries to fulfill forecasts and moves the forecast if it s not feasible. Using post processing, it identifies unfixable problems in the plan induced by planning issues such as P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-23

132 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 unmovable tasks and negative on-hand inventory. Post processing sizes and schedules forecast shipment tasks consistent with the sourcing and timing of the aggregate forecast shipments in the solver solution, producing a feasible and task-oriented plan. Minimize Inventory Without Excess Stock Constraints When reasonable default storage costs are provided for inventory storage, the LP Solver automatically minimizes inventory carryover by item. You use post processing and other solvers to review a plan and try to reduce excess inventory and work in progress. The solver s solution may contain excess inventory if it is cost-effective or is unavoidable. Tasks created by post processing can deliver their supply early if it s part of the solver s solution. Partial-Order Sourcing The LP Solver models aggregate levels of production and transfers. It allows partial sourcing at the aggregate level. For the most part, the solver uses only a single aggregate source for an item in a given solver time period. As aggregate supplies are turned into individual tasks, some demands may receive partial sourcing, such as when one aggregate supply becomes exhausted and the sourcing moves to another aggregate supply. For an item with multiple aggregate sources used in the solver solution in a solver time period, splitting orders should happen to only one demand for each aggregate source used. Firmed-Planned Order The LP Solver tries to reschedule or cancel an existing order according to its task status and flags. It cannot move frozen tasks. Supply and Demand Transfer Types Supply and demand transfers, also called one-sided transfers, are planned for existing interunit transfers where the LP Solver processes the transfer item for only a single location, reducing the time it takes for the Planning engine to run distribution and master plans. During the processing, the solver doesn t process data, such as bills and routings, associated with the item from either the shipping or receiving location. The solver uses the transfer type value to determine how to model a transfer item. A transfer type is a transfer option attribute that determines which business unit to use to model the transfer of the item. You can model an item in the To Unit, From Unit, or both business units. Overview of Iterative Repair/Optimizer The PeopleSoft Production Planning Iterative Repair/Optimizer Solver generates schedules and plans that are material- and capacity-feasible. You control the Optimizer by specifying what is important in the schedule using weights of constraints you set up with the Control Panel in the Planning server. The Optimizer is also exception-driven. It only tries to fix the problems. This enables the plan to remain somewhat static instead of having to be recreated for each planning session S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

133 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Optimizer resolves problems either by adding or rescheduling tasks. Tasks are actions in your PeopleSoft Production Planning model that create demand or provide supply. Tasks include purchase order deliveries, forecasts, sales orders, subassembly production, final assembly, and customer shipments. You can run Iterative Repair Solver by itself or as part of the overall planning process. Iterative Repair doesn t use pegged chains or demand priorities. Although it s not recommended, you can run Iterative Repair as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning Solver. During each of its phases, the Optimizer runs a series of iterations and repairs a series of violations. After you run an iteration, the Optimizer scores the schedule and determines whether to continue working on that iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative Repair to recognize which constraints are violated as well as the order in which the violated constraints should be repaired. PeopleSoft Production Planning provides an optimal solution by solving multi-objective problems. It also provides a simple way, through the Control Panel, to modify objectives that match individual and dynamic preferences. The Iterative Repair method examines potential schedules and chooses among them based on their fitness to multi-objective criteria. When it reaches a point where it has a schedule that is as good as any that can be distinguished, such as a zero score, it presents that schedule as an optimal schedule. Among Iterative Repair/Optimizer features are the following: A single integrated solution simultaneously addresses material and capacity feasibility. A mix of business objectives, such as sales order performance and changeovers, drives the optimal solution. Incrementally targeting of problems for quick response rather than requiring an MRP regeneration. This approach is exception-based and based on net-change data. You initialize an optimization session by loading your command files and setting the Planning server Control Panel constraints to the desired weights. By setting the weights for the Control Panel constraints, you identify and rank the restrictions to consider in PeopleSoft Production Planning optimization calculations. For more information about loading input files into a Planning server, see Setting Up Command File and Source File Information. Using the Production DataLink to Create a Master or Material Plan Using the following set of steps, you can perform the planning requirements for extracting planning data from PeopleTools, copying the data to a Planning server, loading the server, and receiving planning messages. To use the Production DataLink to create a master or material plan, complete the following steps: 1. Make sure item, inventory, and demand planning data from other PeopleSoft applications is ready for use. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-25

134 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY Create a Planning server template and define a Process Scheduler Server. The template is a one-time setup that you can use again and again. The Scheduler server is needed in order to run the job. 3. Start the Process Scheduler server. 4. Start a Planning server. Make sure it s the same one that you defined in the server template. 5. Set up the Production DataLink to create the planning model that you want to use to create your plans. This includes defining which Planning engine solvers you want to process the plan. 6. Create a Run Control ID to use to process the DataLink run. 7. Use command files to define a valid directory for storing the planning command files. 8. Run the Production DataLink job, noting the process instance that defines the job. 9. Review the Production DataLink job, using the Process Monitor to verify that the run was successful. 10. After the job finishes, use available tools such as workbenches, scorecards, reports, and planning messages to work with the plan. The Advanced Planning Client can also be used to work with the plan. 11. Use the Generate Plan option to rerun the solvers until your enterprise requirements are satisfied within the constraints of the plan. 12. Commit the plan by approving and applying planning messages. Setting Up Run Types, Plan Types, Time Fences, and WIP/Roll Forward Options The General page provides a way to define a number of parameters that control how the Production DataLink processes data in your master plan or material plan. Using the page, you can add or change the following parameters: Run Types define whether the Production DataLink run completely refreshes data in the Planning engine or refreshes only transactional data created or changed since the last time you ran a plan using the Production DataLink. Transactional data includes sales, transfer, production, and purchase orders, and quantity on hand. Currency code and rate define a single currency for the DataLink run when you have multiple currencies. Plan types indicate how you want to plan with this DataLink setup. Previous master-plan information indicates when the last plan was run. Time fences establish the appropriate start and end fences of the planning horizon as well as fences that control the planning process S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

135 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Order modifiers verify that the schedule enforces order quantities that fit the minimum, maximum, multiple, and yield order modifier rules. Start-of-time purge removes all of the old planning data that is based on a previous start-time fence you set during a previous planning session. Regenerated sourcing templates replace existing sourcing templates. Search depth defines how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine explodes while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Inventory options define carrying cost rates and available balances and enable you to include or omit inventory that isn t in an Open status. Capacity options define whether you use work centers only, or all resources for capacity planning purposes. Defining General Time Fence Information Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the General: General page to access information about the Production DataLink. This is the default page, and you use it to add or change a number of PeopleSoft Production Planning parameters for the Production DataLink. RUN_PLS1000 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, General, General Enter a Run Control ID. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-27

136 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Production DataLink - General: General page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. Enter the business Unit for which you want to run the process. This is the inventory business unit that links to your manufacturing business unit. The Model ID is an identifier that you create to maintain this specific Production DataLink setup. In add mode, it defaults to the run control ID. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses this model ID when you re ready to transfer the plan back into your PeopleSoft transaction system. The system uses this along with the version identifier as the filename for the file that it creates during the export process. For example, if you defined PLAN for the control ID and a version of v1, the export file created during the export process is named v1_plan_export.sql. Run Type Select a Run Type from the following options: Regenerative This run type completely refreshes data in the Planning engine with input from the PeopleSoft database. Restart the Planning server to clear all data from previous sessions before refreshing it with regenerative plan data S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

137 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Net Change This run type refreshes only planning data created or changed since the last time you ran a master plan using the Production DataLink. PeopleSoft Production Planning applies net-change data to a session already running on the Planning server. The net-change function applies to only new items, forecasts, transfer orders, material stock requests, production orders, production schedules, planned production, purchase orders, and sales orders. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn t use net change for other static data such as bills, routings, and calendars. Plan Type Use the Plan Type to indicate how you want to plan with this DataLink setup. The following values are available: Simulation Plan Master Plan A plan you use only to perform what-if simulations. You can send a simulation plan back to the PeopleSoft database only for reporting, not for execution. A plan you intend to execute by returning data to the transactional system, for example to create orders and reschedule orders. Running the master plan resets all netchange data. Plan Currency If you want the Planning system to calculate cost values in a single currency when multiple currency values are valid, use the Plan Currency group box. Use the box to define a single currency code and currency rate type that you want the Production DataLink to use when it creates the data model that will be loaded into the Planning engine. Use the Currency Code field to define the single, common currency that you want the Planning engine to use to model all costs. All the currency codes you set up using Define General Options appear in the drop-down list. Use the Rate Type field to define the exchange rate the system uses to convert costs from other currencies to the single currency code that you selected. You use the fields if you are transferring stock from a business unit that uses a different currency from the receiving unit. The Production DataLink converts cost information that has been set up for the business unit in terms of the values you specify in the box. For example, if you are transferring stock from Mexican pesos to Canadian dollars, you can select to convert those values to a single base currency, such as U.S. dollars. In doing so, you work with only a single base representation of costs in your planning model. The currency code and the exchange rate type aren t sent to the Planning engine. The values that the DataLink computes for the currency exchange appear in the Cost columns for transfers, production, and purchase options. You access the option panels in the Planning engine using the Modeling Options menu in the Data Browser. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-29

138 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Previous Master Plan The Previous Master Plan group box displays the last Date and Time that the master plan was run. If the Processed check box is selected, the master plan was run and the planning messages resulting from that run were received into the PeopleSoft database using the Receive Planning Messages process. For more information about production plan processing, see Committing the Production Plan. Fences In this group box, you can establish the appropriate start and end fences for the planning horizon as well as set other time fences that control the planning process. Enter all time fences in calendar days with respect to the current date. Start Fence This is the beginning time boundary; no time exists before this fence. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn t recognize any orders or changes before this date. After the planning session starts, you can t change this start fence. Its value will usually be a negative number because PeopleSoft Production Planning needs to capture past-due activity. For example, if you use a value of -30, PeopleSoft Production Planning loads all orders with due dates up to 30 days or earlier than today s date. There may be a large time span between the time a sales order shipment is originally requested and the time a product is actually shipped. Make sure that the Start Fence you specify is early enough to include all of the past due sales orders for the demand that you specify in the plan. End Fence Purchase Fence This is the concluding time boundary; no time exists after this fence. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn t recognize any orders or changes after this date. Make sure to define the end fence so that it is equal to or greater than the longest lead-time of any item in your system. The date when the system considers all past due purchase order deliveries available. For example, if you use a purchase fence value of 0, PeopleSoft Production Planning recognizes any past due open purchase order deliveries available on today s date. You usually set the purchase order fence between the early fence and late fence. However, this setting depends on your company s particular scheduling practices S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

139 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Capacity Fence Early Fence Late Fence Level Fence The number of days after which the capacity for all resources is no longer considered when you generate a capacity-feasible plan. The beginning of the interval within which the Planning engine operates on the schedule. You usually set the early fence to the current date. However, if you want the Planning engine to act on past due orders, you can set the early fence to a negative number. This enables the system to recognize any late orders or missed promise dates that occur between the start date and the current date. It is recommended that the early fence be set to at least one day later than the start fence. The end of the interval within which the Planning engine operates on the schedule. The combination of early fence and late fence identifies the period for which the Planning engine will plan new supply or reschedule existing tasks. The earliest time that the leveling constraint classes take effect. You use this fence when you generate an executable schedule. Order Modifiers, Start of Time Purge, Regenerate Sourcing Templates, and Search Depth Select the Use Order Modifiers check box to verify that the schedule enforces order quantities that fit the minimum, maximum, multiple, and yield order modifier rules. Select the Start Of Time Purge Option check box if you want to purge all of the old planning data that is based on a previous start time fence set during a previous planning session. For example, if you originally set the start time fence as 1/1/01, and you went back later and reset your start time fence to 2/1/01, PeopleSoft Production Planning will disregard all planning data before 2/1/01 if this check box is selected. This is mostly used for net-change run types. Select the Regenerate Sourcing Templates check box if you want the DataLink run to replace existing sourcing templates. Sourcing is the process the Planning engine uses to determine how the supply for an item s demand is going to be filled. The system sources demand using sourcing options. These options define parameters for manufacturing, purchasing, or transferring an item to meet demand. You use sourcing templates to load the options. You can let the system load the options automatically or set up sourcing templates manually and maintain the options. Important! If you select the Regenerate Sourcing Templates check box, the system deletes and refreshes any sourcing options for which you have established priorities and defaults. The new templates will be prioritized based on low costs. To prevent the regeneration of templates that you want to maintain manually, use the Sourcing Template Maintenance page to select the Manually Maintained check box on the template header. Use the Search Depth field to define how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine will explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each routine option represents a P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-31

140 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 single level in the supply chain. For example, part A is made up of part B and part B is made up of parts C and D. To explode all levels, enter a 3 in the Search Depth field. The search depth you define is used as the default for DataLink processing. If an item has a different value defined for its sourcing template, the Planning engine uses the value at the item level and ignores the DataLink default search depth value you enter here. Inventory Options Indicate a Carrying Cost Rate (%/year), which is the rate you use to calculate the carrying cost of inventory on hand. The value that appears in the field is a percentage of the annual cost to keep the item in inventory. This rate could include costs such as building overhead as well as the cost of capital for items such as an interest rate or breakage. Select Available Inventory Balances to transfer inventory balances for each item to PeopleSoft Production Planning. This also includes staged quantities. If you leave this check box clear, items will have no on-hand beginning quantities in the planning system. Depending upon how you defined available quantity in PeopleSoft Inventory, this group box displays either the Incl Non-Open in Avail Qty (include non-open in available quantity) or Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (remove non-open in available quantity) check box. In PeopleSoft Inventory, there are four inventory statuses: Open, On Hold, Rejected, and Restricted. You have the option, at the business-unit level, to include or not include On Hold and Restricted (non-open) in the available quantity bucket. PeopleSoft Production Planning never includes Rejected. The Include/Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (include/remove non-open in available quantity) check box enables you to reverse that option either to include or to remove those quantities for a particular run. When the Include Non-Open in Avail Qty (include non-open in available quantity) check box is displayed, select the check box to include non-open inventory at the business-unit level. For planning purposes, the system increases the quantity on hand by the On Hold and Restricted amounts. When the Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (remove non-open in available quantity) check box is displayed, select the check box to exclude non-open inventory at the business-unit level. For planning purposes, the system reduces the quantity on hand. For more information about setting up these options, see PeopleSoft Inventory PeopleBook, Preparing to Implement PeopleSoft Inventory or PeopleSoft Inventory PeopleBook, Defining Your Operational Structure in PeopleSoft Inventory. Capacity Options Plan Work Centers Only defines work centers (not machines, crews, or tools) as resources. The planning system will measure capacity on the work center as a whole and ignore the availability of individual machines, crews, and tools used to accomplish tasks at the work centers S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

141 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Plan Detail Resources includes all resources, work centers, machines, crews, and tools in the plan. When you select this option, the Planning system evaluates capacity for each resource. Defining Frozen Fence Offsets Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the General: Frozen Details page to define frozen fence offsets. You can set frozen time fences in days for several types of supply. RUN_PLS1003 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, General, Frozen Details Click the Frozen Details link on the General page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - General: Frozen Details page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. A frozen fence specifies the number of days from the current date during which you don t want solvers or Iterative Repair to change that supply type in the current plan. Frozen Fence Offsets (in days) Enter a number of days in the following fence fields you want to use: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-33

142 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Shipment Task Fence Firm Production Fence Released Production Fence Purchase Fence Transfer Supply Fence Transfer Demand Fence Freeze Master Items Freezes all shipments to customers. Note that PeopleSoft Production Planning cannot move shipments during the plan generation process unless you use this fence. Freezes all planned or existing production IDs and production schedules with a production status of Firm. Freezes all existing production IDs and production schedules with a production status of Released or In Process. Freezes all purchase orders regardless of status. The Transfer Supply Fence freezes all transfers from the shipping business unit after the number of days you enter. A transfer type is a transfer option flag that determines which business unit the Planning engine uses to model the transfer of the item. You can model an item in the To Unit (Supply Transfer), From Unit (Demand Transfer), or both (Both) business units. The Transfer Demand Fence freezes all transfers to the destination business unit after the number of days you enter. A transfer type is a transfer option that determines which business unit the Planning engine uses to model the transfer of the item. You can model an item in the To Unit (Supply Transfer), From Unit (Demand Transfer), or both (Both) business units. Select this check box to freeze master-planning items. When you run the Production DataLink, the system considers supply and demand for the items as frozen. Defining WIP/Roll Forward Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the General: Wip/Roll Forward Details page if you want to reduce time between operations, minimize work in process (WIP) inventory, and indicate if you want to roll past-due tasks forward to a future time in the plan or to a future plan. RUN_PLS1004 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, General, WIP/Roll Forward Details Click the Wip/Roll Forward Details link on the General page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine 3-34 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

143 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production DataLink - General: Wip/Roll Forward Details page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. Work In Process If you want to minimize work in process inventory, select the Minimize WIP (minimize work in progress) check box. If you do not select the Minimize WIP check box, the other fields on this page aren t available for input. Indicate the maximum amount of time you want to allow between operation sequences in the Distance Threshold edit boxes. You can set the maximum amount of time by Seconds, Minutes, Hours, or Days. Specify the maximum Number Of Routings To Repair. If the number of routings being optimized by the Planning engine exceeds the number you define here, the system ignores them. If minimizing WIP is one of your most relevant constraints, make sure that you set this number high enough to handle all of the routings you might handle during a planning session. Indicate the Constraint Relevancy for minimizing WIP. Select one of the following options: Relevant Repair Relevant Score None Enterprise Planning tries to repair the task to minimize WIP. Enterprise Planning records the violations but does not repair them. Enterprise Planning does not repair or track the violations. Select the Aggressive Repair check box if you want PeopleSoft Production Planning to fix the violation regardless of whether the repair violates other constraints. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-35

144 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Roll Forward Select the Roll Forward Active Phases check box if you want to reschedule tasks that are past due. You use the Roll Forward utility to move the tasks within the current plan or to a future plan when you run the solvers. Past-due tasks are tasks that were scheduled to be completed prior to the current time but that remain open. The Planning engine moves tasks from the past and rolls them forward into the current or a future schedule or plan. Then, you can view and work with them before running solvers to fine-tune the plan. A Roll Forward phase is a set of specifications that determine which tasks are rescheduled and when they are rescheduled. Any phase that is marked as active is included in the movement. You define active phases using the Planning engine. For more information about setting up and using Roll Forward phases, see Setting Up Production Planning. Including Demand and Supply in the Production DataLink Run You can use the Demand page to specify the types of demand that you want to include in the Production DataLink run. You can also specify forecast consumption options for both finished products as well as assembled components. Forecasts entered for inventory items through PeopleSoft Inventory and products through PeopleSoft Order Management are passed to planning, where forecast consumption is performed. Use the Supply page to specify the types of supply you want to include in the Production DataLink run. Defining Demand Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Demand/Supply: Demand page to specify the types of demand, such as orders and forecasts that you want to include in the Production DataLink run. RUN_PLS1006 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Demand/Supply, Demand Select the Demand/Supply tab, then click the Demand link on the Demand/Supply page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine 3-36 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

145 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production DataLink - Demand/Supply: Demand page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. Select the Apply Demand Priorities check box if you want solvers to use demand priorities for scheduling supply to meet the demand. The demand priority places importance on independent demand. The solvers use the demand priority value to determine the order in which you fulfill the demand. You can set a demand priority from 1 to 999, with 1 as the most important level. A priority value of 0 is reserved for the system. Orders There are a variety of demand types or orders in PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can include any of the following in your Production DataLink run: Sales Orders, Transfer Orders, Planned Transfer Orders, Material Stock Requests, and Quotes. If you consider sales quotes when you generate your plan, you can specify the Quote Acceptance Percentage, or the minimum success percentage that you ll accept as demand as defined on each sales quotation header. For example, suppose the quote acceptance percentage is 80. There are 1500 sales quotations currently active in PeopleSoft Order Management, 350 of which have a success percentage of 80% or better. The system considers the 350 quotations as demand but the sales quotations under 80% won t be considered because they are less than the quote acceptance percentage If you don t specify a percentage here, such as 0%, PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically considers that 100% of the quotes will be converted to sales orders. Forecasts Select the Forecast check box to include one of your predefined forecast sets. Select a Planning Bucket Size - Daily, Weekly, or Monthly - to indicate the size of bucketed time periods you can use for forecasting. We recommend that you use weekly or monthly buckets, because the forecast is only consumed by sales orders within the same bucket. The Forecast Set is used to keep multiple copies of forecasts in the system. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-37

146 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Use the Forecast Fulfillment Fence field to indicate the number of days from the start date that the Planning engine uses as the forecast fulfillment time fence. When a forecasted demand occurs within (before) the time fence and cannot be met entirely, the forecast tasks representing portions of the forecast that cannot be met are canceled. If the forecasted demand that occurs past the time fence (a future time) cannot be met entirely, the forecast tasks representing portions of the forecast that cannot be met are delayed and rolled forward to future planning buckets where they can be satisfied. Solvers determine how many forecast tasks can be satisfied and where to reschedule the unfulfilled forecast tasks. If you do not enter a value in this field, the default is the early fence date. Forecast fulfillment is the process that the Planning engine uses to manage forecasted demand over a period of time. The forecast fulfillment feature makes it possible for you to divide the total forecast demand into portions so that you can meet certain portions of the forecast if the total forecast cannot be met entirely. The Planning engine can either meet the supply shortage during the same planning bucket in which the shortage occurs or carry it over into the next bucket. Solvers delay and cancel forecast tasks based on how the forecast is loaded and on the period start and end time. If you select the Front Load option, the forecast is front loaded and produces demand at the beginning of the planning period, so that the supply must be available at the beginning of the period. If you select the Back Load option, the forecast produces demand at the end of the planning period, so that supply can be scheduled during the planning period. Front Load is the default option. To clear it, select the Back Load option. When forecasted demand cannot be supplied, the solvers look at forecast tasks and how their forecasts were loaded to determine if forecast tasks are late. When a task is late, the solvers determine if the task should be delayed or canceled. Forecast Consumption Forecast consumption options enable you to control the forecast consumption calculations performed while loading the planning command files. Use the following options to define how forecasts should be used when the Production DataLink is run: Select the Allow Forecast Consumption check box to indicate that you want PeopleSoft Production Planning to consume the forecast. If you don t select Allow Forecast Consumption, you can t select the Explode Demand for Consumption option or any forecast consumption method. When you select the Net Change Forecast check box, all actions that trigger a change in the forecast consumption equation, such as changing a sales order line quantity, also trigger the forecast consumption process. If you don t clear this check box, changes aren t made to forecast consumption, and you ll have to use the Regenerate Forecast Consumption option to update the forecast tasks. Select the Stock Request Shipments check box to include these shipments in forecast consumption. If you select the Explode Demand for Consumption check box, sales order demand or transfer demand for forecast consumption will be exploded at the global level. If there were forecasts for 3-38 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

147 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK production, you would want to explode sales order demand or transfer demand for some end items by calculating the production demand to be used for forecast consumption. You should not select this check box if forecasts exist only for sales order demand or transfer demand. To explode demand for forecast consumption, complete the following steps: 1. Take the sales order and determine the bucket to which you add the transfer or production demand based on the promise or request date. 2. Use the default item sourcing option as the primary way to source the item. For a purchase option, stop the explosion, since it is at the end. For a transfer option, take the source item and add the quantity to the transfer demand bucket. For a production option, look at each component of the BOM and calculate the quantity before adding to the production demand bucket. The formula to calculate the quantity is QPA * quantity of the sales order line. 3. For a transfer option, take the source item and repeat Step 2. For a production option, take each component and repeat Step 2. Select the Sales Order Shipments check box if you want sales order shipments to consume forecast. Select the Transfer Demand Shipments check box if you want transfer demand shipments to consume forecast. Using PeopleSoft Production Planning, the shipped transfers consume forecast, even if they have not been received. Select Promise Date when you want the plan to consume the forecast based on the sales order ship set promise date. The Production DataLink uses the promise date on the sales orders to determine which forecast to consume by the sales order demand. Promise Date is the default. Because the Material Planning Solver reschedules the sales orders scheduled shipments based on the promise date before the netting of demand and supply begins, you may want to set the forecast consumption method to Promise Date. You must select either Promise Date or Request Date, but not both. Select Request Date if you want to use the sales order ship set request date to determine which forecast will be consumed by the sales order demand. You must select either Promise Date or Request Date, but not both. For more information on entering forecasts for inventory items, see Setting Up Production Planning. For more information on entering forecasts for products, see Setting Up Production Planning. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-39

148 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Defining Supply Options. Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Demand/Supply: Supply page to specify the types of supply such as orders and forecasts that you want to include in the Production DataLink run. RUN_PLS1002 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Demand/Supply, Supply Select the Demand/Supply tab, then click the Supply link on the Demand/Supply page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Demand/Supply: Supply page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. Supply Options You can include any of the following in your Production DataLink run: Purchase Orders, Planned Purchase Orders, Production Orders (including production IDs and production schedules), Planned Production Orders, Transfer Orders, and Planned Transfer Orders. Usually, you ll want to include all these options when running a regenerative DataLink. When you run a net-change process using the Production DataLink, you might have a separate run control to pull net-change data for different types of supply and demand. For example, a netchange run control can be set up to pull production data over at the end of each shift S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

149 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Period of Supply (POS) Histogram Period Select a scale to view the inventory histograms as measured in period of supply (POS). Your options are Daily and Weekly. The supply is the total new supply, which comes from scheduled and planned production, purchase, and transfer. You can calculate the POS at each supply point and at each demand occurrence. Select the Round Component Demand check box if you want to round the quantity when the system calculates dependent component demand. You can determine at the business-unit level whether to round the component based on the item-rounding rule. The Production DataLink passes the rounding rule and quantity precision with the item to the Planning engine. However, you can t change the item rounding rule and quantity precision within PeopleSoft Production Planning. Whether the number is a whole number or a decimal may depend on the item s unit of measure and quantity precision combination as it was defined in Inventory. For more information about defining rounding rules and quantity precision for items, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Working With Items. You have the option to round or not round depending on demand calculations. You may decide not to round the dependent demand calculation because rounding inflates the actual dependent demand. Rounding problems become more visible as the dependent demand explodes down more levels. For more information about exceptions to the rounding rules, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Working With Items. Select one of the Substitute Options where substitute items are assigned to the business unit: Off Active Aggressive Planning performs no item substitutions or use-up functions. If an item s requirement isn t being met, another supply for the item will be rescheduled before an alternate item is substituted. If an item s requirement isn t being met, an alternate item is substituted before other supply for the item is rescheduled. The alternate item with the highest priority is substituted first. If, for example, there is insufficient inventory of the highest priority alternate item, the next highest priority alternate item with sufficient quantity will be substituted. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-41

150 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 When the Planning system is using Linear Programming (LP) mode, substitute items and thus the replacement items aren t selected based on highest priority, but are instead selected based on lowest cost. To ensure correct planning of the replacement item, delete all substitute items in the substitute item list and leave only the replacement item when in LP mode. Substitute Options settings apply to manufacturing only and aren t used for inventory transfers or shipping. Setting Planning Run and Solver Options Solvers are flexible tools that analyze data and attempt to find a feasible master or material plan. Using solvers, you first produce a plan based on existing supply and demand for an item to arrive at a feasible material and capacity plan. You then can intervene to manually repair infeasibilities and run other more comprehensive solvers that provide a plan that is ready to use when it s generated. For more information about using solver options, see Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink. Selecting a Solver for Plan Generation Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Solvers: Common page to define which solver you want to run when you generate the master or material plan. RUN_PLS1014 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Solvers, Common Select the Solvers tab, then click the Common link on the Solvers page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine 3-42 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

151 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production DataLink - Solvers: Common page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. When you set up the Production DataLink, you define which solvers you want to use to process the plan when you load the data model into the Planning server. The Planning engine runs the solvers based on the controls you define in this component group. The solver you select on this page runs the initial master or material plan. Using other pages in this component, you can indicate that another solver should run immediately after the one you select on this page. You can use the Generate Plan option to immediately run a plan. We recommend that you create initial material and feasible plans using the Production DataLink, then use the Generate Plan option to run solvers again or to run quality improvement phases for the plan. Common Select one of the following Run Solver after Load options: Feasibility Solver Iterative Repair Linear Programming Material Solver Provides a more complete plan that ensures material and resource capacity is available to meet the plan. Run the Iterative Repair Solver after you create a plan using the LP, Material, or Feasible Planning solvers. The Iterative Repair Solver produces plans that show violated constraints as well as the order in which the violated constraints should be repaired. This solver is especially designed to work with reasonably large data sets. The solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacity-feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions to feed into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a feasible plan. Provides a simple plan that resolves material shortages. You can select to have some capacity repaired during the processing of material shortages. This solver provides you with a starting point for a plan. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-43

152 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 You can also select to run another solver automatically after you run the initial plan. Use the solver pages in this component group to indicate whether you want to run another solver without intervening in the Production DataLink processing. For more information about each solver, see Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink. Defining Material Planning Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Solvers: Material Planning page to define conditions for processing a master or material plan. The Material Planning Solver creates a simple material plan that resolves most material shortages. RUN_PLS1011 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Solvers, Material Planning Select the Solvers tab, then click the Material Planning link on the Solvers page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Solvers: Material Planning page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

153 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about material planning, see Overview of the Material Planning Solver. Planning Mode This group box provides options for defining the data that Production DataLink uses when the material plan is created. The default value is Regenerative. The following values are available: Regenerative Net Change When you run the Material Planning Solver in this mode, all tasks or orders with a status of planned are deleted from existing data and a material plan is generated for all inventory items. Using this mode, all previous supply and demand relationships (recorded in the pegging) are erased and all independent demand is rescheduled back to its due date. When you use this mode to run the Material Planning Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies and raw materials. When there is a material shortage recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in demand is planned again. When a supply is late for a demand but is pegged, it isn t considered a material shortage. When a part is planned for again in the Net Change mode, all planned supplies are deleted and any end-demands for that part are returned to their due date. In addition, all pegging history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged. The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the Feasible Planning Solver or using the Late Supplies Inquiry in the Planning server to fix them. After Material Planning Run Before you run the Production DataLink, you need to define whether you want to consolidate planned purchase orders (POs) or run the Feasible Planning Solver after the material planning run. Select the Consolidate Planned Purchase Orders check box to invoke the purchase order consolidation algorithm automatically after the solver run. This consolidation is the same as Fixed Period, except that it acts on purchases only. The default value for the box is clear (not selected). Select the Run Feasible Planning check box if you want to the Feasible Planning Solver to run automatically immediately after the Material Planning Solver runs. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-45

154 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Material Planning - General Attributes The Material Planning Solver uses the following information to process a material-feasible plan. Select the Calculate Low Level Code check box to verify the accuracy of low-level codes. The code is a number that identifies the lowest level in a BOM at which a component appears. These codes are maintained on items and calculated by the Planning engine. When this check box is selected, the low-level code for each item is calculated prior to the Material Planning run. Since the Material Planning Solver plans items in low-level code order, it is important to ensure that the low-level code associated with each item is accurate before you run the Material Planning Solver, especially if there have been BOM changes. Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate whether you want the Material Planning Solver to plan for meeting safety-stock levels. When this option is selected, the solver ignores safety-stock constraints. As a result, the solver won t plan supply for safety-stock demand. You can use this option for what-if scenarios. When you select Include Capacity for the planning run, the Material Planning Solver minimizes capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence when it generates the plan. This capacity repair tries to reschedule tasks earlier to find capacity. The solver doesn t violate the pegged chain record of supply and demand to reschedule the tasks, nor does it place tasks before the early fence to reschedule the tasks. As the default, the box is clear. The Include Capacity option isn t the same as the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity levels by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource, regardless of creating late supplies. In doing so, it doesn t guarantee material feasibility. By contrast, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier, searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the tasks later without ever creating late supplies. We recommend that you use this repair only when you have a plan that isn t heavily capacity constrained. In all other cases, you should use the Feasible Planning Solver to resolve capacity overages. Select the Use Fixed Period check box to define whether the fixed period of supply algorithm is applied during the Material Planning run. When a planned production or purchase order needs to be created after all existing orders have been used, the Material Planning Solver uses this option to determine the maximum amount needed between the first demand and a fixed-period amount of time. The time is defined as a number of days on the item record. The solver creates a single supply for this amount. The default for this check box is clear. Select the Material Plan Items check box to include material-planning items in the solver processing. You can run a plan that includes both material- and master-planning items. Select the Master Plan Items check box to include any items in solver processing that have been selected as master-planning items. These values are assigned using the Planned By option on the Business Unit Item Definition page S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

155 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Defining Feasible Planning Solver Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Solvers: Feasibility Solver page to define the planning elements that you want to include in material and capacity feasibility planning. You can use the Feasible Planning Solver to create a master or material plan. RUN_PLS1012 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, General, General, Select the Solvers tab, then click the Feasibility Solver link on the Solvers page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Solvers: Feasibility Solver page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations between the early fence and end of time and is designed to start from any initial plan and turn it into an executable plan. The solver generates an executable plan that contains no tasks in the past, no material shortages, and, optionally, no capacity violations. The solver guarantees material feasibility for all resolvable material violations between the early fence and end time, regardless of the settings. For more information about how the Feasible Planning Solver processes a plan, see Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-47

156 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Feasibility Solver Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate you do not want the system to respect safety-stock constraints during the processing of the Feasibility Planning Solver. As a result, the solver doesn t plan supply for safety-stock demand. If supply was created for safety stock by an earlier solver, the Feasible Planning Solver recognizes it as excess. As the default, the box is clear, so that safety-stock levels are accounted for in the planning process. Select the Allow Material Reallocation check box to allow the Feasible Planning Solver to correct material inversions by reallocating supply. These inversions occur when a supply task is late for the demand that it supplies. When you allow material allocation, the solver tries to reallocate supply from a lower-priority pegged chain before trying to reschedule the demand later or the supply earlier. Select the Allow Rescheduling check box to control the rescheduling of tasks to resolve late supplies by the Feasible Planning Solver. The pegged chains are rescheduled only after the Feasible Planning Solver searches for any allowed alternate sources of supply. If the Allow Rescheduling check box isn t selected, only the material phase of the Feasible Planning Solver runs and the solver cannot ensure a material-feasible plan. You must select Allow Rescheduling in order to use the Make Plan Capacity Feasible and phase options in plan processing. The Feasible Planning Solver uses the move preference that you define in the Planning server s Late Supplies Inquiry to decide if the demand should be made late or the supply should be rescheduled before the early fence to resolve any remaining late demands. In case of frozen demand, the supply is scheduled earlier if the demand cannot be made on time. In all other cases, the default behavior schedules the demand later. Select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible check box to indicate that you want the Feasible Planning Solver to resolve capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence. When the box is clear, the Feasible Planning Solver considers only material feasibility, not capacity feasibility, when you run the plan. The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver isn t the same as the Include Capacity option in the Material Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity level by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource regardless of creating late supplies. In doing so, it doesn t guarantee material feasibility. By contrast, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the task later without ever creating late supplies. The Feasible Planning Solver resolves aggregate resource violations, not detailed resource violations. For more information about how the Feasible Planning Solver processes a plan to make it capacity-feasible, see Making the Plan Capacity Feasible S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

157 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Select the Allow Alternate Routing check box to allow the Feasible Planning Solver to source material again to resolve material infeasibilities. When you allow alternate routings, the solver tries to explode the supply for a violated demand again, using either alternate purchase or transfer options. The Feasible Planning Solver tries to use alternate purchases or transfers to resolve a material infeasibility before it tries to reschedule the demand or supply. Enabling alternate routings also controls if alternate routings are used when the Make Plan Capacity Feasible and Run Lateness Phase check boxes are selected. Select the Allow Item Substitution check box to indicate that the Feasible Planning Solver can use substitute items to correct material inversions. When you select this option, the solver tries to reallocate the supply of a valid substitute item from a lower-priority pegged chain before it tries to reschedule the demand or supply. Item substitution is used if it helps make a late supply on time, and if it helps during all reschedules to reduce excess inventory. If the box is clear, substitutions are not made during solver processing. For example, the Run Lateness Phase won t use item substitution. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Lateness Phase of the Feasible Planning Solver executes after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in place. This phase maintains the feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce the lateness of demands that have been delayed past their due date. As the default, the box is clear. This phase adds quality to your plan. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, you must also select the Allow Rescheduling check box. Use the Time Limit field to define the maximum number of minutes the Lateness Phase is run. When the Planning engine reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and provides you with a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes. You cannot enter a negative number. Run Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. You should not use it if you want to change the existing schedule minimally. Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of the Lateness Phase by entering a smaller time period. If this option isn t selected, the system considers all late demands between the early fence and end of time in this phase. As the default, the box is clear. You use the days after Current Time field to indicate how long after the current time the solver should begin to ignore the Lateness Phase. The system considers this field if you have selected the Ignore problems later than check box. The value of this field represents a number of days after current time. This offset from current time defines a boundary after which late demands are ignored by the Lateness Phase. An attempt isn t made to reduce the lateness of demands that start outside this boundary. The default value for the field is 30 days. The Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box maintains the feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce excess inventory that occurs between the early fence and end of time. It also searches for opportunities to satisfy unfulfilled safety-stock requirements. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-49

158 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Stock Adjustment Phase check box causes numerous reschedules and should not be selected if you want to change the existing schedule minimally. If the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box is selected, the Planning engine invokes this feature when you run the Feasible Planning Solver after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in place. As the default, the box is clear. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Feasible Planning Solver executes the Run Stock Adjustment Phase after the Lateness Phase. Use the Time Limit field to enter the maximum number of minutes you want the Run Stock Adjustment Phase to run. When the solver reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and provides you a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes. You cannot enter negative numbers. Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of the Stock Reduction Phase by entering a smaller time period. If this check box isn t selected, excess inventory and unfulfilled safety stock that exists between the early fence and end of time are considered in this phase. As the default, the check box is clear. When you type a value in the days after Current Time field, the solver doesn t attempt to reduce excess inventory or fulfill safety-stock requirements outside the time periods. The default value for this field is 30 days. This field is considered if the Ignore problems later than check box is selected. The value of this field represents a number of days after the current time. This offset from current time defines a boundary after which excess inventory and unfulfilled safety-stock requirements are ignored by the Stock Reduction Phase. For more information about the Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases, see Improving Plan Quality. Defining Linear Programming Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Solvers: LP Solver page to define the parameters that you want linear programming to apply to the master or material plan. RUN_PLS1007 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Solvers, LP Solver Select the Solvers tab, then click the LP Solver link on the Solvers page S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

159 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Process Name Process Type PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Solvers: LP Solver page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. When you have complex sourcing decisions to make or when you want a plan that considers your business objectives in a global sense, then you should use the LP Solver. Through its realistic modeling, this solver enables you to include factors in planning that other solvers cannot process or do not process to the extent that the LP Solver does. Effective dates, calendars, and penalty calculations are examples of extended modeling. The LP Solver uses an aggregate approach to consider different objectives, factors, and alternatives simultaneously to develop a plan with the minimum cost. The solver first constructs an LP model based on the settings you define on the LP page, and then it finds an aggregate optimal planning solution. Finally, the LP post-processor takes the aggregate solution and creates a task-based executable plan. The LP Solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacity-feasible executable plan. If you want to take the task-based solution produced from the LP post-processor and turn it into a feasible and executable plan, run the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver. For more information about how the LP Solver processes a master or material plan, see Overview of the LP Solver. Linear programming works best for period planning or planning by week, not for detailed planning. It is particularly effective for sourcing decisions. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-51

160 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 LP Solver Select the Modify LP Parameters (modify linear programming parameters) check box if you want to change options for how the solver creates your plan. If you do not select the Modify LP Parameters check box, the other fields on this page won t be available for input. You can use the default values that appear on this page or enter new values. These values specify your aggregate bucketed data and enable the linear programming process to provide greater precision. Use the Carrying Cost Rate (%/year) field to define the annual percentage rate the solver uses to calculate the cost of maintaining the inventory. The cost is based on a percentage of the average inventory value for the year. The default value for the field is 10 percent if values have not been defined using PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning. You cannot change the value. Use the Late Shipment Penalty (%/day) field to define the percentage it costs your business on a daily basis to miss a shipment date. The percentage is based on the standard cost of the item. The default value for this field is 0.1%; however, you can change the value for an LP Solver run. The Number of Daily Periods represents the total daily periods from the early fence that you want to include in the plan. The default value for this field is 7. The smaller the number of periods you plan for, the more realistic you make your plan. The Number of Weekly Periods represents the total weekly periods following daily periods that you want to include in your plan. The default value for this field is 4. You can use this field to plan implicitly for monthly buckets as well. When the late fence exceeds the last weekly period, then the LP Solver uses monthly buckets for the rest of the periods. We recommend that you do not enter more than 30 total periods so that the LP Solver can find optimal plans for large-scale problems. The total is the sum of daily and weekly periods. Select the Run Feasible Planning After LP check box to automatically invoke the Feasible Planning Solver after the LP Solver is run. Defining Iterative Repair Settings Usage Use the Solvers: Iterative Repair page to select parameters for using the Iterative Repair/Optimizer to run a master or material plan. Iterative Repair scores the schedule and determines whether to continue working on an iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative Repair to recognize which constraints are violated, as well as the order in which the violated constraints should be repaired S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

161 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type RUN_PLS1013 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, General, General Select the Solvers tab, then click the Iterative Repair link on the Solvers page. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Solvers: Iterative Repair page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and Process Monitor. Iterative Repair is the most extensive tool available for creating a master plan or material plan. Also called the Optimizer, Iterative Repair is an advanced planning tool for creating a plan or detailed schedule. Iterative Repair performs a series of iterations. During iterations, it applies a set of standard repair rules (heuristics) to the constraint violations. Each constraint class has a series of standard repairs that the system follows. If these repairs do not meet your needs, then you can modify the repair. You can run Iterative Repair by itself or as part of the overall planning process. Iterative Repair doesn t use pegged chains or demand priorities. Although we do not recommend it, you can run Iterative Repair as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning Solver. During each of its phases, Iterative Repair runs a series of iterations and repairs a series of violations. After you run an iteration, Iterative Repair scores the schedule and determines whether to continue working on that iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative Repair to recognize which constraints are violated, as well as the order in which the violated constraints should be repaired. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-53

162 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about the Iterative Repair tool, see Overview of Iterative Repair/Optimizer. Iterative Repair Select the default Optimization Template that you want to use to load into the planning model. When you run the Production DataLink and select a template, PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically creates the appropriate planning model. Standard optimization templates include: All Constraints Material & Aggregate Capacity This is the default template. It enables you to build a planning model and generate a plan based on all the constraints that you select when you create your plan. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, this template is identical to the All Constraints template. It enables you to build a planning model and generate a plan based on all the constraints that you select when you create your plan. In PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, this template enables you to build a planning model and generate a plan without changeover or detailed capacity. Material Only Selecting this template enables you to build a planning model and generate a plan without taking capacity into consideration. The Min. Stock Violation (hrs) (minimum stock violation in hours) field defines the minimum number of hours that PeopleSoft Production Planning considers to be a stock violation. For example, you can accumulate excess inventory that causes a temporary surge in inventory when you build an item. If you set the minimum violation to three hours, then a temporary surge of two hours during a build process won t cause a violation. Select the Iterations for optimizer field to define the number of times, or iterations, you want the Planning engine to search for an optimal schedule. Depending on the size of your model, Iterative Repair may take a substantial amount of time to create a schedule. You set optimization stopping rules before running the repair. The optimization stopping rules cause Iterative Repair to stop and return the best schedule or the current schedule upon termination. In the Stop optimizer after minutes field, you can enter a time limit to indicate the number of minutes you want the Planning engine to search for an optimal schedule. Use the Stop optimizing at this score field to enter an acceptable score at which the Planning engine should terminate its search S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

163 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Setting Up Command File and Source File Information Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Command Files page to view the command files used by the Production DataLink for a Planning server template. You can edit the file names on this page. All command files are created for each DataLink. RUN_PLS1009 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Command Files Enter a Run Control ID. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Command Files page (1 of 2) P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-55

164 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Production DataLink - Command Files page (2 of 2) The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Schedule. There are two File Name columns. The first column contains fields you can edit and controls the name given to the command file created by the Production DataLink. The second column is for display only and lists the type of information the Production DataLink includes in the file, regardless of the name in the first column, during processing. Important! Don t leave any of the field values blank if you override the current names in the first column. The file names, as currently configured, include the following: File Name Environment Attributes Calendars Items Resources Includes Data for your PeopleSoft Production Planning environment, which includes time fence, solver, attribute, date penalty, linear programming, PeopleSoft Order Promising (if installed), lateness tolerance, and forecast consumption data. The system label in the right column is always Env. Data for your planning attributes. The system label in the right column is always Attributes. Data for your work period, holiday, calendar spec, and work calendars. The system label in the right column is always Calendars. Data of the items for which you will be planning. The system label in the right column is always Items. Data for your rough-cut planning resources. The system label in the right column is always Resources S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

165 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK File Name Production Options Planning BOMs Sourcing Procurement Productions Transfers Forecasts Sales Orders Stock Requests Inventory Balances Line Schedule Editor Includes Data for the bills of material and routing definitions you use to manufacture items. The system label in the right column is always Prdn Opts (production options). Data for your planning bills of material. The system label in the right column is always Pln BOMs (planning bills of material). Data for your sourcing templates and sourcing options. The system label in the right column is always Sourcing. Data for your existing purchase orders, as well as any unapplied new purchase orders from a previous planning run. The system label in the right column is always PO (purchase orders). Data for your existing production IDs and production schedules, as well as any unapplied new production messages from a previous planning run. The system label in the right column is always Prdn (production). Data for your existing transfer orders, as well as any unapplied new transfer order messages from a previous planning run. The system label in the right column is always Transfers. Data for your forecasts. The system label in the right column is always Forecasts. Data for your sales orders and sales quotes. The system label in the right column is always Sales. Data for your existing material stock requests. The system label in the right column is always MSR. Data for your quantity-on-hand inventory balances. The system label in the right column is always QOH (quantity on hand). Data for the line schedule editor. The system label in the right column is always LSE. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-57

166 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 File Name User Defined Load Generate Plan Includes Data that you might have defined in other parts of the system to use in the Production DataLink process. The system label in the right column is always User. Data for loading all the generated command files. By loading this one command file, all other command files are automatically loaded into the Planning engine. The system label in the right column is always Load. Data for running a specific solver after all other data is loaded into the Planning engine. The system label in the right column is always Gen plan. In the Write DataLink Output To field, indicate the network path where you want the command files to be created. The network path must end with a back slash (\) for Windows NT or a forward slash (/) for UNIX. Because you control the name of the command files and the network path to which they are written, you should consider how the files are named and the location to which they should be written. If you are running the Production DataLink for multiple business units, make sure that the command files aren t overwriting themselves. You should create a strategy to identify command files by name (such as the business unit name in the file name) or by network path, for example, a unique network path for each business unit, such as: \\<server>\scp80\data\<business unit>. Click Run to run this request. Process Scheduler runs the Production DataLink process at userdefined intervals. For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. Verifying Planning Server Connection Settings Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planning Server page to change Planning server templates. These templates enable you automatically to transfer the transaction data and plan parameters directly to the Planning engine to generate and analyze your plan. RUN_PLS10010 Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production DataLink, Planning Server 3-58 S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

167 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Prerequisites Access Requirements Process Name Process Type To make Planning server templates available, you need to use General Options to create a template and set up its parameters. You use the Planning Server Definition page to create permanent server templates. You can define a template only temporarily by using the Planning Server page. Enter a Run Control ID. PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000 SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine Production DataLink - Planning Server page You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have established a test database or a different set of data that you work with. Using this page, you can change among your host machines without navigating to the Define Business Rules option, where you also define server settings. To access the latter page, use the following link: Planning Server Definition page. You use Planning server templates to define how and where the Supply Chain Planning server is installed and runs. The Planning server definition enables you automatically to transfer the transaction data and planning parameters directly to the Planning engine to generate, analyze, and maintain your planning data model. These templates make it easy for you to change which Planning server you are linked to. For example, you might have a test model established on one server and a production model defined on another machine and server. You can also establish logical definitions of Planning servers for use by PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, Production Planning, and Order Promising. As you work with your plans, you select a server by only its template name rather than having to establish all the technical Planning server information each time you use a plan. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-59

168 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 You can link to a server either by using the Planning Server group box to select the server or by completing fields on this page. The Planning server is also available on the Planning Scorecard page and can be selected directly from there. Planning Server When you want to change a template temporarily, the Server Template Name identifies the template. Host To establish a link between PeopleTools and the Planning engine, use the Host Name field to define the machine or device that runs the Planning server. The value you enter must represent a valid host machine. These values aren t established as part of your PeopleSoft application installation or maintenance, so make sure that you type the name as it corresponds to the host machine. Use the Host User Name field to define a valid user on the host machine you entered. If you use File Transfer Protocol routines to copy files to and from the Planning server and a password is required, you need to enter that password in the Host Password field. When you type the password, wildcard characters appear in the field instead of the password. Select the Platform on which the Planning server is running. You can select either PSNT (for Windows NT machines) or PSUNX for (UNIX machines). Server Type the Server Name to define the logical name that has been given to the Planning server. Planning server names are established when you start a Planning server and specify the -id parameter. If the -id parameter wasn t specified, the default server name is Server. These values aren t established as part of your PeopleSoft application installation or administration, so make sure you type the name as it corresponds to the host machine. Server names are case-sensitive. The Timeout (Seconds) field defines how long you want the connection to a Planning server to wait before automatically timing out when you retrieve or update information in the Planning server. This means that PeopleSoft Production Planning searches this amount of time before returning an incomplete operation message. For example, the system may have lost its connection to the server, found no rows of data, or couldn t connect to the server. The time is entered as a number of seconds. The User Name defines a unique ID used to access the Planning server if the Server has been set up to use security. Enter the Server Password established for the user name. Use the Port field to define a valid port to use to connect to the Planning server. Use the Load Command Files From field to define the path to the location of the data model command files on your network file system so that the Planning server can access them. In most cases this is a path on the host machine where the Planning server runs. If you are using a shared file system between Process Scheduler and the Planning server, this path can be the same as the path used during the DataLink process for creating the command files S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

169 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Planning engine looks for the command files in the path specified here when it loads the Planning server automatically using the Production DataLink process. The path name must end with a forward slash (/) for Unix or a back slash (\) for Windows NT. Otherwise, the file transfer won t take place. For example, a Unix path name would look like this: /data/command/ A Windows NT name would look like this: \data\command\ P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL S ETTING U P THE P RODUCTION D ATAL INK 3-61

170

171 C HAPTER 4 Generating the Production Plan After you build and define your planning model using the Production DataLink, you can generate a master or material plan using the Generate Plan process. Typically, the master or material plans are automatically created as a part of the DataLink process. The Generate Plan option enables you to rerun any of the solvers after you have made manual changes to the plan using the master plan, material plan, or capacity plan workbenches. The generation process overrides any values that you have set up for solvers in the Planning server while making it possible to run a plan specifically for master- or material-planning items. To invoke the process, you use buttons to start the solver that you want to run. Overview of the Production Plan Process Before you begin to generate your master plan or material plan, you need to make sure that you have a Planning server defined and loaded for the model you will use to create the plan. Generating your plan can be an iterative process. You can run a plan a number of times until you have a higher-quality plan. When you define your model, PeopleSoft Production Planning passes the data you identify as part of the planning process to the Planning engine using the Production DataLink. If the data is incomplete, for example your forecast numbers are inaccurate or one of the time fences isn t set properly, we recommend that you stop your generation process and use the transaction system to change your model or any incomplete or incorrect data You can change plan data using the Planning engine; however, only planned orders, order cancellations, and dates changes are transferred back to the PeopleSoft transaction system. During processing, the system generates master and material plans using the following rules: Master-planning items can only be a component of another master-planning item. A master plan can be generated in the production-planning model for any business unit, such as a feeder plant. Using the plan a more defined view of production can be evaluated. In this model, production routings used in production management are passed to planning. Alternate routings are also passed to planning providing a closer view at the capacity for a single production facility. If the master plan has been generated using an enterprise-planning model, the master plan is passed in as a part of the material plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Material-planning items can be components of either material- or master-planning items. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-1

172 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 You can change plan data using the Planning engine; however, only new orders and dates changes are transferred back to the PeopleSoft transaction system. Before You Begin The following are the prerequisites to generating a master or material plan: Verify that your forecast and on-hand inventory is accurate and that items are correctly defined for inclusion in the planning process. Understand fully the solver and optimization approaches and the constraint settings you ll be using to take full advantage of PeopleSoft Production Planning. Constraint settings are made in the Planning server, while you can make solver settings using either the DataLink or the Generate option. For more information about using the constraints, see PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, Managing Constraints. For more information about solvers and optimization, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. A Planning server must be running. Make sure the command file has been generated and loaded into the Planning server. A Process Scheduler server must be running. When you click a solver button, the generation process picks up any running server tied to an application engine. Generating the Production Plan When you generate a master or material plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you use a series of solvers. Solvers are flexible tools that analyze data and attempt to find a feasible plan based on your planning needs. Using solvers, you first produce a plan based on existing supply and demand for an item to arrive at a feasible material and capacity plan. You then can intervene to manually repair infeasibilities and run other more comprehensive solvers that provide a plan that is ready to use when it s generated. For more information about the generation process, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. 4-2 G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

173 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Running Planning Solvers How you use solvers depends on the objectives of your master or material plan. There isn t a defined order for running each solver or a predefined set of rules that you must include in a solver run. You alter the solver flow to meet specific planning needs. Using planning solvers, you generate plans using a set of parameters for each solver. You can run a single solver or all of them at different intervals. Using the Generate Plan option, you can run iterations of your plan, analyzing your plan and making manual changes between iterations. For more information about using solvers and suggestions for running them, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Defining Global Preferences Usage Object Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Global Preferences page to review the time fences the Production DataLink uses to create a master or material plan. The Global Preferences page is the default page for the component group. PL_GEN_GLOBAL_PREF Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan, Global Preferences If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and Process server must be running. Enter a Run Control ID. Generate Plan - Global Preferences page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-3

174 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Fences are points in time before or after which solvers take certain actions. Solvers use fences to determine how far supply or demand tasks can be moved forward or backward to meet planning needs. Planning and scheduling problems occur within four periods of time. Time fences help define the following types of planning periods: Today s schedule that has been released to the manufacturing floor. Short-term scheduling on a time line with shift or daily bucket planning. Medium-term planning. Long-term planning. Solvers are best applied to medium-term planning. This planning period typically focuses on tactical planning issues such as meeting due dates, managing inventory levels, planning material deliveries and resource loads, and finally making sourcing decisions. Capacity-feasible and material-feasible planning can occur across the last two planning periods but normally occur just within the medium-term-planning region. The planning horizon is the time between the early time fence and the end of time, both of which you can define. The planning algorithms are applied to only those tasks that reside within this horizon. You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have established a test database or a different set of data that you work with. Using the Planning Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server containing the database that you want to use to generate the plan. You don t have to use the Define Business Rules option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server Definition page. Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily. For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see Managing the Master and Material Plans. You use the following types of fences when using solvers: Start of Time Current Time This is the beginning time boundary. Time doesn t exist in the Planning server before this fence. Orders and changes aren t recognized before this point in time. Used with the end of time, the region defines the time period within which the system operates. Solvers don t recognize times before the start of time. This is the current date and time as seen by the Planning server. The current date and time are static values that are initially set by the Production DataLink process. This fence is used to define various time offsets respected by the planning solvers. 4-4 G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

175 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Early Fence Capacity Fence Late Fence End of Time This is the beginning date and time of the interval within which the solver processes the elements of the materialand capacity-feasible plans. You ll usually set the early fence to the current date. The date and time that solvers begin ignoring capacity violations. After the date, the Material Planning, Feasible Planning, and LP Solvers ignore violations; however, the Optimizer doesn t use this date to process capacity violations. If the capacity fence intersects with an aggregate capacity bucket, then aggregate capacity violations are respected for the current bucket interval but ignored for the succeeding bucket intervals. The LP Solver and the Optimizer use this fence as a point to distinguish the planning horizon. They can t schedule tasks after this fence. This is the concluding time boundary. Time doesn t exist in the Planning server after this date. Solvers and the Optimizer don t recognize orders or changes after this date. Creating a Material Plan Usage Object Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Material Planning page to set up parameters for creating a material feasible plan. This solver creates a simple material plan for your master- or material-planning items. PL_GEN_MATERIAL_PL Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan, Global Preferences If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and Process server must be running. Enter a Run Control ID. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-5

176 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Generate Plan - Material Planning page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID. The Material Planning Solver creates a simple material plan that resolves most material shortages. After you make your selections on this page, click the Run Material Planning button if you want to generate a plan. You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server that contains the database you want to use to generate the plan. You don t have to use the Define Business Rules option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server Definition page. Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily. For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see Managing the Master and Material Plans. For more information about using the Material Planning Solver to generate a master or material plan, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Planning Mode This group box provides options for defining which data the Production DataLink uses when the material plan is created. The following values are available: 4-6 G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

177 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Regenerative Net Change This is the default value. When you run the Material Planning Solver in this mode, all tasks or orders with a status of planned are deleted from existing data and a material plan is generated for all inventory items. Using this mode, the system erases all previous supply and demand relationships (recorded in the pegging) and reschedules all independent demand back to its original due date. When you use this mode to run the Material Planning Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies and raw materials. When there is a material shortage recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in demand is planned again. When a supply is late for a demand but pegged, the system doesn t consider it a material shortage. When you plan for a part again in the Net Change mode, the system deletes all planned supplies and returns any end-demands for that part to their due date. In addition, all pegging history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged. The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the Feasible Planning Solver or using the Late Supplies Inquiry in the Planning server to fix them. The Material Planning Solver uses the following information to process a material feasible plan. Select the Calculate Low Level Codes check box to verify the accuracy of low-level codes. The code is a number that identifies the lowest level in a bill of material (BOM) at which a component appears. The Planning engine maintains and calculates these codes for items. When you select this check box, the system calculates the low-level code for each item prior to the Material Planning run. Because the Material Planning Solver plans items in low-level code order, it is important to ensure that the low-level code associated with each item is accurate before you run Material Planning, especially if there have been BOM changes. Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate whether you want the Material Planning Solver to plan for meeting safety-stock levels. When this check box is selected, the solver ignores safety-stock constraints. As a result, the solver doesn t plan supply for safety-stock demand. You can use this option for what if scenarios. When you select the Include Capacity check box, the Material Planning Solver minimizes capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence when it generates the plan. This capacity repair tries to reschedule tasks earlier to find capacity. The solver doesn t violate the pegged chain record of supply and demand to reschedule the tasks, nor does it place tasks before the early fence to reschedule the tasks. As the default, this check box is clear. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-7

178 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Include Capacity option isn t the same as the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity level by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource, regardless of whether this action creates late supplies. In doing so, it doesn t guarantee material feasibility; on the other hand, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the task later without ever creating late supplies. We recommend that you use this repair only when you have a plan that isn t heavily capacity-constrained. In all other cases, you should use the Feasible Planning Solver to resolve capacity overages. Select the Use Fixed Period check box to define whether the fixed period of supply algorithm is applied during the Material Planning run. When you select this option and a planned production, transfer, or purchase order needs to be created, the Material Planning Solver determines the maximum amount needed between the first demand and a fixed-period amount of time after all existing orders have been used. The time is defined as a number of days on the item record. The solver creates a single supply for this amount. The default value for this check box is clear. Select the Material Plan Items check box to include material-planning items in the solver processing. You can run a plan that includes both material- and master-planning items. Select the Master Plan Items check box to include any items in Material Planning Solver processing that have been selected as master-planning items. These values are assigned using the Planned By option on the Business Unit Item Definition page. After Material Planning Run Before you run the Production DataLink, you ll need to define whether you want to consolidate planned purchase orders (POs) or run the Feasible Planning solver after the material planning run. Select the Consolidate Planned PO (consolidate planned purchase orders) check box to invoke the purchase order consolidation algorithm automatically after the solver run. This consolidation behavior is the same as fixed period, except it acts on purchases only. The time period is defined using purchasing order modifiers on the item definition. The default value for the check box is clear. Select the Run Feasible Planning check box if you want to automatically run the Feasible Planning Solver immediately after running the Material Planning Solver. Creating a Feasible Plan Usage Object Navigation Use the Feasible Planning page to set up parameters for generating an executable plan that contains no tasks in the past, no material shortages, and, optionally, no capacity violations. This solver ensures a feasible plan for your master- or material-planning items. PL_GEN_FEASIBLE_PL Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan, Feasible Planning 4-8 G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

179 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Prerequisites Access Requirements If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and Process server must be running. Enter a Run Control ID. Generate Plan - Feasible Planning page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID. The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations between the early fence and the end of time. If you select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option, it ensures capacity feasibility as well. The solver is designed to start from any initial plan and turn it into an executable plan. It tries to do this while making only minimal changes to the existing plan. When the solver is invoked, it checks any current pegging for consistency and maintains that pegging. The only time the solver modifies the pegging is as necessary to make the plan material- and capacity-feasible. If pegging doesn t exist, the Feasible Planning Solver creates the pegging based on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis. After you make your selections on this page, click the Run Feasible Planning button if you want to generate a plan immediately. PeopleTools uses the current settings in the DataLink along with any changes you made to solvers in the Generate Plan option to run the plan. You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server containing the database you want to use to generate the plan. You don t have to use the Define Business Rules option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server Definition page. Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-9

180 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see Managing the Master and Material Plans. For more information about using the Feasible Planning Solver to generate a master or material plan, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Select the Allow Material Reallocation check box to enable the Feasible Planning Solver to correct material inversions by reallocating supply in the solver s pegged chain. These inversions occur when a supply task is late for the demand that it supplies. When material reallocation is enabled, the solver tries to reallocate supply from a lower-priority pegged chain before trying to reschedule the demand later or the supply earlier. Select the Allow Item Substitution check box to indicate the Feasible Planning Solver can use substitute items to correct material inversions. When you select this option, the solver tries to reallocate the supply of a valid substitute item from a lower-priority pegged chain before attempting to reschedule the demand or supply. You use item substitution if it helps make a late supply on time, and during all reschedules to reduce excess inventory. If the check box is clear, no substitutions are made during solver processing. For example, the Run Lateness Phase doesn t use item substitution. Select the Allow Alternate Routing check box to enable the Feasible Planning Solver to source material again to resolve material infeasibilities. When alternate routings are selected, the solver tries to explode the supply for a violated demand again, using either alternate purchase or transfer options. The Feasible Planning Solver will try to use alternate purchases or transfers to resolve a material infeasibility before attempting to reschedule the demand or supply. Selecting alternate routings also determines whether the system uses alternate production routings when the Make Plan Capacity Feasible and the Run Lateness Phase check boxes are selected. Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate that you don t want the system to respect safety-stock constraints during the processing of the Feasibility Planning Solver. As a result, the solver won t plan supply for safety-stock demand. If supply was created for safety-stock by an earlier solver, the Feasible Planning Solver will recognize it as excess. As the default, the box isn t selected, meaning that safety-stock levels are accounted for in the planning process. Select the Allow Rescheduling check box to control the rescheduling of tasks to resolve late supplies by the Feasible Planning Solver. The pegged chains are rescheduled only after the Feasible Planning Solver searches for any allowed alternate sources of supply. Select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible check box to indicate you want the Feasible Planning Solver to resolve capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence. When the box isn t selected, the Feasible Planning Solver considers only material feasibility, not capacity feasibility, when you run the plan. The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver isn t the same as the Include Capacity option in the Material Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity level by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource regardless of whether the action creates late supplies. In doing so, it doesn t guarantee material feasibility; on the other 4-10 G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

181 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK hand, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the task later without ever creating late supplies. The Feasible Planning Solver resolves aggregate resource violations, not detailed resource violations. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Lateness phase of the Feasible Planning Solver is executed after a material-or capacity-feasible plan is in place. This phase maintains the feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce the lateness of demands that have been delayed past their due date. As the default, the check box is clear. This phase adds quality to your plan. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, you must also select the Allow Rescheduling check box. Use the Time Limit (minutes) field to define the maximum number of minutes the system runs the Lateness Phase. When the Planning engine reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and provides you with a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes. You can t enter a negative number. The Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. You shouldn t use it if you want to change the existing schedule minimally. Use the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of the Lateness Phase by entering a smaller time period. If the check box is clear, all late demands between the early fence and end of time are considered in this phase. As the default, the check box is clear. You use the days after Current Time field to indicate how long after the current time the solver should begin to ignore the Lateness Phase. The system considers this field if the Ignore problems later than check box is selected. The value of this field represents a number of days after current time. This offset from the current time defines a boundary after which late demands are ignored by the Lateness Phase. An attempt isn t made to reduce the lateness of demands that start outside this boundary. The default value for the field is 30 days. When you select the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box the system maintains the feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce excess inventory that occurs between the early fence and end of time. It also searches for opportunities to satisfy unfulfilled safety-stock requirements. The Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box causes numerous reschedules and shouldn t be used if you want to change the existing schedule minimally. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-11

182 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 If the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box is selected, the Planning engine invokes this feature when you run the Feasible Planning Solver after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in place. As the default, the check box is clear. If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Feasible Planning Solver executes the Run Stock Adjustment Phase after the Lateness Phase. Use the Time Limit field to enter the maximum number of minutes you want the Run Stock Adjustment Phase to run. When the solver reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and provides you with a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes. You can t enter negative numbers. Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of the Stock Reduction Phase by entering a smaller time period. If the check box is clear, the system considers excess inventory and unfulfilled safety-stock that exist between the early fence and end of time in this phase. As the default, the check box is clear. When you enter a value in the days after Current Time field, the solver doesn t attempt to reduce excess inventory or fulfill safety-stock requirements outside of the time periods. The default value for this field is 30 days. This field is considered if the Ignore problems later than check box is selected. The value of this field represents a number of days after the current time. This offset from current time defines a boundary after which the Stock Reduction Phase ignores excess inventory and unfulfilled safety-stock requirements. For more information about the Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Generating a Plan Using Linear Programming (LP) Usage Object Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the LP Planning (linear programming planning) page when you want to model your supply chain and compute schedules that optimize a selected objective while satisfying a set of specified constraints on operations. The LP Solver doesn t ensure a material- or capacityfeasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions to feed into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a feasible plan. PL_GEN_LP Component Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan, LP Planning If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and Process server must be running. Enter a Run Control ID G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

183 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Generate Plan - LP Planning page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID. Linear programming provides a global view of the supply chain problem. The LP Solver models the planning constraints into a system of linear inequalities and then solves this linearly relaxed system to obtain an optimal solution. While the solution contains global and optimal information about the problem, it is a linear estimation, containing little task-specific information. To address this, the solver automatically runs a post-processor that provides a real, task-based solution for planning. The post-processor is based on logic and procedures that build a task-level schedule from aggregate solutions, such as sourcing, equipment selection, and general timing. The aggregate solution is converted into a task-specific plan on a detailed timeline. This makes it possible for the features of the LP Solver to work with the other solvers. After you make your selections on this page, click the Run LP button if you want to generate a plan immediately. PeopleTools uses the current settings in the Production DataLink along with any changes you make to solvers in the Generate Plan option to run the plan. You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server containing the database you want to use to generate the plan. You don t have to use the Define Business Rules option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server Definition page. Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily. For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see the Managing the Master and Material Plans. Use the Carrying Cost Rate (%/year) field to define the annual percentage rate the solver uses to calculate the cost of maintaining the inventory. The cost is based on a percentage of the average inventory value for the year. This value is set during the Production DataLink process. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 4-13

184 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The default value for the field is 10 if values haven t been defined using PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning. You can t change the value using the Generate Plan page. Use the Late Shipment Penalty (%/day) field to define the percentage it costs your business on a daily basis to miss a shipment date. The percentage is based on the standard cost of the item. The default value for this field is 0.1; however, you can change the value for an LP Solver run. The Number of Daily Periods field represents the total daily periods from the early fence that you want to include in the plan. The default value for this field is 7. The smaller the number of periods you plan for, the more realistic you make your plan. The Number of Weekly Periods field represents the total weekly periods following daily periods that you want to include in your plan. The default value for this field is 4. You can use this field to plan implicitly for monthly buckets as well. When the late fence exceeds the last weekly period, then the LP Solver uses monthly buckets for the rest of the periods. We recommend that you don t enter more than 30 total periods in order for the LP Solver to find optimal plans for large-scale problems. The total is the sum of daily and weekly periods. After the LP Run Select the Run Feasible Planning after LP check box to invoke the Feasible Planning Solver automatically after you run the LP Solver. Use the LP Solver to generate an initial plan when there are more complex trade-off decisions in the supply chain network. These decisions might include sourcing decisions, alternate resources, item substitution, or material allocations based on demand priority. This is a regenerative process where the system reschedules all independent demands to their due date and deletes all tasks with a status of Planned. We recommend that you run the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver to create a plan that is feasible. For more information about using the LP Planning Solver to generate a master or material plan, see Setting Up the Production DataLink G ENERATING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

185 C HAPTER 5 Managing the Master and Material Plans The master plan enables you to plan for finished goods and key component materials. You can use the master plan to ensure that top-level material and capacity requirements have been accounted for before exploding lower-level material and capacity requirements. With PeopleSoft Supply Chain Planning, you can create and maintain the master plan in either Enterprise Planning or Production Planning. The material plan enables you to plan for subassemblies and lower-level raw material requirements. The material plan uses the results of the master plan to determine the requirements for meeting the master plan. You use PeopleSoft Production Planning to create and maintain the master and material plans. Because a Production Planning model contains both master- and material-plan items, the plans are similar in the information they produce and display. This chapter uses the material-plan pages to describe how you use both plans; however, differences between the two plans are noted when they occur. Overview of the Master and Material Planning Process PeopleSoft Production Planning helps you manage the planning process by dividing it into a series of sequential and incremental processes. Each plan in the process appears as a menu item, enabling you to analyze item data at different planning levels as it progresses through the planning process. The master plan is designed for use in either the PeopleSoft Production Planning or Enterprise Planning applications. When you use it for Enterprise Planning, the plan provides you a highlevel overview of your manufacturing plan. For example, it checks that you generally have enough capacity and material to produce the total demand. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, the master plan provides more detailed manufacturing data. We ll focus on the master plan s use with the Production Planning application. The material plan is the second in a series of plans. It is designed to provide you a means to manage inventory levels, schedules, and availability of selected items, either manufactured or purchased. PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a model for both master planning and material planning. You can control the generation of a material plan just for master-plan items or just for material-plan items, or you can simultaneously generate a plan considering both masterand material-plan items. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-1

186 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 PeopleSoft Demand Planning and Inventory Planning feed both the master and material plan. Forecasts and inventory replenishment policies provide the basis that PeopleSoft Production Planning uses to calculate its plans. Forecast quantities define the totals for both plans, while inventory policies determine how items are planned and stocked. A final plan in this series is the capacity plan. Data from the master and material plans feeds the capacity plan. The capacity plan provides you an early warning about any major capacity shortages with the current material or master plan. For more information about the using the capacity plan, see Managing the Capacity Plan. You can classify the same item differently across business units. For example, a service part ordered on a sales order line might be defined as a distribution-plan item at a distribution center and as a material-plan item at the plant where it is manufactured. You can control the content and viability of master and material plans using solver controls. For example, you can generate a plan that produces a simple plan for material but does not attempt to solve certain types of resource capacity problems. Or, you can generate plans using several iterations of solvers to produce plans that are material- and capacity-feasible. After you generate a master or material plan, you can use a number of inquiries to review the plans. You can also use the workbench to adjust your plan. The following master and material plan inquiries are available: Workbench Plan Summary Details You can use the Master or Material Plan Workbenches to make changes to the plans. First, you determine which items to work with using the respective workbenches. From a link associated with an item, you can access the Plan Summary page, from which you initiate changes including production, purchase, and transfer order dates and quantities. In addition, you can also review related demand and supply information. The Master or Material Plan Summary provides you with an aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and demand for a business unit item. You can use the summary as part of the workbench, where you can make changes to the plan or review information. The Master or Material Plan Detail Inquiry displays the sequence of supply and demand over time for an item. You use the inquiry when you want to review the timephased list of demand and supply for an item. 5-2 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

187 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Exceptions Planning Scorecard Use the Master or Material Plan Exceptions Inquiry to review exceptions for individual items in a plan. An exception is a condition that prevents the master or material plan from being feasible. The Exceptions Inquiry and Planning Scorecard display similar data. The main difference is that the Exceptions Inquiry lets you review all exceptions for an item in the same grid, while the Scorecard provides some summary features by exception type. Use the Planning Scorecard to review the efficiency of your overall enterprise plan. It shows you constraint violations, the number of violations, and a score for the violations. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint violations in a schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is. Master Plan Process Flow You begin the master-planning process by ensuring that items you want to include in the plan have been set up for master planning. You can select Master Planning from the Planned By field available options on the Planning page in the Item Attributes by Units component of PeopleSoft Inventory. The Production DataLink plans for only those items that have a Planned By value set to Master Planning or Material Planning. To implement a master plan, perform the following steps: 1. After you define the business unit and classify the items for master planning, use the Plan Production menu option to set up planning options that include item source code, time fences, aggregate items, promise dates, and demand priorities. A master-plan item can only be a component of another master- plan item and can only supply a master- or distribution-plan item through a transfer. Master plan items must have their parent items defined as Master Planning. 2. Use the Production DataLink to establish parameters for the master plan. 3. Generate the initial master plan, defining which solvers you want to run with the plan. 4. Review and make changes to the master plan. After you make changes, you can run as many iterations of the plan that you need to achieve the most viable plan, using the workbench and solvers to continue to improve the plan. 5. Commit the plan. For master plan items, you can select whether you want to extract planning messages for the item. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-3

188 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Material Plan Process Flow You begin the material-planning process by ensuring that items you want to include in the plan have been set up for material planning. You can select Material Planning from the Planned By available options on the Planning page in the Item Attributes by Units component of PeopleSoft Inventory. To implement a material plan, perform the following steps: 1. After you define the business unit and classify the items for material planning, use the Plan Production menu option to set up planning options that include item source code, time fences, aggregate items, promise dates, and demand priorities. A material-plan item can be a component of either material- or master-planning items and can supply a master- or materialplan item through a transfer. 2. Change the Production DataLink to establish parameters for the material plan. 3. Generate the initial material plan, defining which solvers you want to run with the plan. 4. Review and make changes to the material plan. After you make changes, you can run as many iterations of the plan that you need to achieve the most viable plan, using the workbench and solvers to continue to improve the plan. 5. Commit the plan. For material-plan items, you can select whether you want to extract planning messages for the item. For more information about preparing to create a master plan, see Before You Begin. For more information about setting up Production Planning data, see Setting Up Production Planning. Before You Begin There are several prerequisites to include specific items in a master or material plan. The following lists highlights those prerequisites: Define if you want an item to be sourced by transfer, make, or buy during the planning process, and set the corresponding Planned By value (Master Planning or Material Planning) within the Item Attributes by Unit page. Define a Planning server using the Planning Server Definition page in the General Options component of the Define Business Rules menu. Ensure a Planning server is running. Using the Production DataLink, the server processes your plan and returns the results to PeopleSoft Production Planning pages for you to review and change. 5-4 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

189 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Maintaining Master and Material Plans In order to effectively maintain the master plan and material plan, you need to have the ability to view the plan details based on certain selection and filtering criteria, modify the plan as needed, and save the plan. PeopleSoft Production Planning responds to this need by providing you with a robust set of workbench and inquiry pages. You use the Master and Material Plan Workbenches to view plan details based on certain selection criteria, change plan elements as needed, and save the plan after reviewing the effects of the changes. The workbenches display exceptions, planned actions, and planned transfers for the replenishment of material or mater items. After you identify an item to work with in the Master or Material Plan Workbenches, you can drill down on the item by clicking the Item ID link from the Item tab of the Plan Summary page. You can then perform the following tasks using workbench drill-down pages: Add production, purchase, and transfer orders. Change current task quantities and dates. Freeze tasks. Show all related supply and demand tasks. Defining the Master or Material Workbench Search Parameters Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Item page to retrieve and work with material- or master-plan item data. After you access the workbench, you can link to other tools to maintain the item. PL_WBENCH_SRCH Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench A material or master plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the workbench with material- or master-plan data P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-5

190 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Material Plan Workbench - Item page Select a Unit from the prompt to use in the workbench. To limit the list of items, use the Item ID field to define a specific item to work with. The Config Code (configuration code) provides a way to define a configured item further. The Planner Code defines the person or group responsible for an item, while the Family and Category display the production planning classification for the item. Use the Planned By group box to indicate if you want to include only item data for the material plan or for the master plan or for both. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Unit Shows the business unit to which the item belongs. Item ID Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track and retrieve the item. The remaining data relates to this item. If you want to see additional material- or master-plan details for the item, double click it to access summary information. If you don t define a single item, then all items in the business unit appear in the workbench. Item tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Description Planner Cd (planner code) Planned By A brief description of the material- or master-plan item you selected to work with. Displays the person who is responsible for the item. Displays the type of planning item: Material or Master. 5-6 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

191 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Family Displays the group of products to which this item belongs. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Config Code (configuration code) provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. When you click an Item ID, the system takes you directly to the Master or Material Plan Summary page. Using the Master or Material Plan Summary Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Master or Material Plan Summary page to retrieve data for the material or master plan. You can access this page through either the Material or Master Plan Workbench. PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan Summary A master or material plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with material- or master- plan data. Material Plan Summary page P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-7

192 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Material or Master Plan Summary provides you with a horizontal aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and demand for a business unit item. Using the Master or Material Plan Summary, you first define the general parameters such as the Start Date, Period Duration, Number of Periods, and Planning Server. After you define the parameters, you use the Search button to populate the summary. The summary includes row types, past-due quantities, and dates that represent the period duration. The maximum number of columns for the summary is 54: one column for the row type, one for the past-due quantity, and 52 date columns for all the weeks in one year. To maintain data for the plan, you select the row type on the date you want to work with. The system provides drill-down pages and links you use to access and change data for scheduled receipts and planned orders. Click the Scheduled Receipts row value on the date you want to work with to perform maintenance functions. The Unit is the business unit that contains the item for which you want to perform a Material or Master Plan Summary. It is a required field. You also are required to select an Item ID for the summary. To define the specific instance of a configured item you want to review, select a Configuration Code. The Start Date provides an exact starting time for the period of time you want to review in the material or master plan. You can review data from the start of the plan or at different intervals in the plan. If you do not enter a date, the default is Sunday of the current week. For example, if the current date is Tuesday, the 10th of October, the start date that appears in the field would be Sunday, the 8th of October. The Period Duration defines the measurement of time for which you want to review summary information. Valid values are Day, Week, and Month, with Week being the default value. When you define the Number of Periods, the value is measured by the value you define for the duration. The default value for the number of periods is 7. The number of periods you define determines the number of tabs that appear in the summary. Each tab contains seven planning periods. Each time you change a value such as the period duration, item ID, or row type, you must click the Search button to refresh the page with data from your selection. Use the available options for the Planning Server to select a different Planning server template name. This is the server from which you want to extract summary data. Click the Change Server Settings button to connect to another Planning server temporarily. Row types appear in the summary with the following information: Row Type This is a kind of planning data for the item. The data can be cumulative or calculated on a period-by-period basis. You use the Scheduled Receipts and New Planned Orders row types to make changes to your plan. These rows provide links to drill-down pages. 5-8 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

193 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Past Due Date Displays any quantities that are past due on the start date. These sequential dates correspond to the period duration you define for the page. The dates can be at daily, weekly, or monthly intervals. You select the Scheduled Receipts and New Planned Orders row type dates to make changes to your master or material plan. For more information about changing row types, see Changing Row Types. The Change Row Types button provides a means for you to add, delete, or change the display of data for the summary. The changes you make are temporary. When you exit the workbench and return, the system uses the default values, not the row types you changed. After you change row types, use the Search button to refresh the list. The following row types are available for the Master and Material Plan Summaries: Actual Supply The scheduled receipts from existing purchase orders, inventory transfer orders, or production orders. The actual supply = scheduled production supply + scheduled purchased supply + scheduled transfer supply. Customer Orders Dependent Demand Excess Inventory Independent Demand New Planned Orders Displays the quantity of orders generated by customers. Displays the demand quantity that occurs when the item is required to meet demands of another transfer or production task. The maximum amount of inventory that is allowable. The planned inventory on hand should never exceed this number. Displays the total amount of planned production, purchases, and transfers for this period. The sum of planned production, purchases, and transfers for an item in a period. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-9

194 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Periods of Supply Planned On Hand Planned Production Planned Purchases Production Demand Production Supply Projected On Hand Purchase Supply Safety Stock Scheduled Production Scheduled Purchases Scheduled Receipts A forward-looking calculation of a period s planned onhand balance, which determines how many days into the future that a period s planned on-hand balance covers the total demand. When planned on-hand quantities are not enough to cover all of the total demand for a particular bucket, Production Planning prorates the number of days by the ratio of the planned on-hand quantity available over total demand. When there isn t enough total demand through the periods reported, the Periods of Supply bucket displays Displays a cumulative inventory balance from the beginning of the planning horizon. This includes the prior period s ending on-hand balance plus the total supply, minus the total demand for the current period. The total includes planned orders as well. Displays the suggested production orders created for this period when you generated the material or master plan. Displays the suggested purchase orders created for this period when you generated the material or master plan. Displays the total amount of demand from production for this time period. Displays the scheduled receipts from manufacturing for this time period. The receipts are in the form of production orders. Displays the cumulative projected inventory balance from the beginning of the planning horizon. This includes the prior period s ending on-hand balance plus the total supply, minus the total demand for the current period. The scheduled receipts from vendors for this period. The receipts are in the form of purchase orders. The minimum quantity of stock planned to always be in inventory to protect against fluctuations in demand or supply. The total amount of demand from production, with statuses of Firmed, Released, Dispatched, or In-Process. The sum of purchases, with statuses of Firmed or Open. Displays the total quantity for this period from the following row types: Scheduled Production, Scheduled Purchases, and Scheduled Transfers M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

195 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Scheduled Transfers Starting On Hand Target Inventory Level Total Demand Total Forecast Total Orders Total Supply Transfer Demand Transfer Supply Displays the total amount of demand from transfer orders placed on the source business unit for this time period. The cumulative inventory level at the beginning of the period you defined for the Material or Master Plan Summary. The history begins with the starting quantity for the planning horizon. Displays the average of safety stock plus excess inventory. Defined as the sum of Net Forecast, Customer Orders, Inter-Unit Orders, and Dependent Demand. The total demand consists of both independent and dependent demand. The actual forecast is included as independent demand. Displays the original forecast quantity in the planning period, before forecast consumption occurs. Displays the sum of customer orders and interunit orders. Displays the total quantity of actual supply and new planned orders. Displays the scheduled transfers to other business units in the form of transfer orders. Displays the scheduled receipts from other business units in the form of transfer orders. Changing Server Settings Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisite Use the Server Configuration Settings page to define the Planning server from which you want to extract material- or master-plan data or to review or change the current server settings temporarily. You need to use this page only if a Planning server has not been defined that meets your requirements. Use the Planning Server field to select an existing server. PL_CHG_SERVERS_SP Plan Production, Manage Material or Master Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Change Server Settings button A valid server and user name must exist for a host in order to link to the Planning engine. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-11

196 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Server Configuration Settings page You can change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have a simulation server established or a different set of data that you work with. Using this page, you can change among your host machines without navigating to the Define Business Rules option, where you also define server settings. You can link to a server either by using the Planning Server field to select the server or by completing fields on the page. To establish a link between PeopleTools and the Planning engine, use the Host Name field to define the machine or device that runs the Planning system. Type the Server Name to specify the logical name of the Planning server instance. Use the Port field to define a valid port to use in connecting to the Planning system. The Timeout field defines how long the system will wait for a response from the Planning server. This means Production Planning will wait for this duration before returning an incomplete operation message. For example, the system may have lost its connection to the server, may have found no rows of data, or could not connect to the server. You enter the time as seconds. Changing Row Types Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisite Use the Change Row Types page to define which types of planning data you want to include in the Material or Master Plan Summary. The data is extracted from the Planning engine. PL_ROW_TYPES_POPUP Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master Plan or Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan Summary, Change Row Types A valid Server and User Name must exist for a host to link to the Planning engine M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

197 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Change Row Types page You can retrieve information with row types that display additional details about the master or material plan item. Row types enable you to choose which reporting variables you want to display in the summary. This is specific information that can be displayed on a row of the summary. The information is calculated for specified periods and in some instances is cumulative for the planning period. Values that appear on this page are those that already appear in the summary. The values also appear in the order in which they appear in the summary. To select a new value for the summary and to define its placement in the summary, use the down arrow. Select the down arrow of the row type that you want the new row type to follow in the summary list. To add a row type, click the Add Row Type button after the row type has been defined. To remove a row type, click the Remove Row Type button. To save selections you make, click the OK button. To remove or add row types for the inquiry, click the Search button to refresh the page after you return to the Material or Master Plan Summary page. Drilling Down to Maintain Scheduled Receipts Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Plan Summary: Scheduled Receipts page to view material- or master-plan item receipt details. You use this page to review current orders for the item that you selected to work with in the workbench. PL_SCHED_RCPT Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-13

198 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Prerequisites Access Requirements A planning task must exist. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Material Plan Workbench - Plan Summary: Scheduled Receipts page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Item ID, Configuration Code, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure). The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays the maximum number of rows of data that can be retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single planning task. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in Application Designer. The Start Date and End Date display the time period that you selected using the Plan Summary page. This period is based on the period duration you define for the plan s summary. Click the Return button to return to the previous page and update the changes you make when you add planned orders or link to the existing orders and make changes. For example, if you decide to change the order quantity using the Order Type link, then you must click the Return button to see the change in this page. You can t make changes to data that appears on the Scheduled Receipts page. When you return from other links, click the Return button to update the page. The following information also appears on the Scheduled Receipts page: 5-14 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

199 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Planning Task Show Supply Show Demand Order Type Start Qty End Date Time Order Status Frozen Flag Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track the task to which the planned order is related. This might be a production, purchase, or transfer task. Use this link to access all supply tasks related to this item for this period. Supply tasks include production, purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with supply tasks. Use this link to access all demand tasks related to this item for this period. Demand tasks include forecasts and sales orders. Select the link to work with supply tasks. Use this link to access any of the planned production, purchase, or transfer orders for this item for this period. Select the type of order you want to link to. Displays the quantity that currently exists for the corresponding planning task. The quantity can be a production, purchase, or transfer amount. You can change the value by linking to the order type. Displays when the quantity from the planning task will be available. You can change the quantity by linking to the order type. Displays the status of the order: Entered, Released, In Process, Planned, Canceled, and Completed. When you select this, the planning task is frozen, indicating that the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. Showing Supply Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Task Supply - Type/Item page to access all supply tasks related to this item for this period. Supply tasks include production, purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with supply tasks. None Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row, click Show Supply A planning task must exist. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-15

200 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Task Supply: Type/Item page The Task ID identifies the task that is supplying the item. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Sequence Displays the order in which this task belongs in the pegged-chain sequence. Level Type Displays the BOM level in the pegged chain at which this task occurs. Displays the type of task this entry represents in the pegged demand. Type/Item tab See the exhibit above for a view of this tab. Unit Item ID Quantity Displays the business unit in which the task takes place. Defines the item that the supply task is producing. Displays the amount of the item that the supply task is producing M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

201 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK UOM Displays how the item is measured. Dates/Vendor/Task Name tab Viewing the Dates/Vendor/Task Name tab Start Date End Date Vendor Task Displays when the task is currently scheduled to begin. Displays when the task is currently scheduled to end. Defines the person or organization providing the order. Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track a task that appears in the pegged chain. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-17

202 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Showing Demand Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Pegged Demand - Type/Item page to access all demand tasks related to this item for this period. Demand tasks include production, purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with demand tasks. None Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row, click Show Demand A planning task must exist. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

203 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Viewing the Type/Item tab A pegged-chain ties tasks and top-level demand together. In doing so, Production Planning can explicitly track and record what supplies are being used to satisfy what demands. Through this process the system first determines which independent or top-level demand has the highest demand priority. Then, it determines the lateness preference ranking for dependent demand tasks. The result is a sequencing of tasks to reach the demand. The Show Demand page shows these tasks and information about the tasks. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Sequence Displays the order in which this task belongs in the pegged chain sequence. Level Type Displays the BOM level in the pegged chain at which this task occurs. Displays the type of task this entry represents in the pegged demand. Type/Item tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this page. Unit Item ID Quantity UOM (unit of measure) Displays the unit in which the item is being planned. Displays the identifier the system uses to track the item. Displays the amount of the item to be produced by this task. Displays how the item is measured. This is the stockkeeping unit of measure for the item. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-19

204 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Dates/Task Name tab Viewing the Dates/Task Name tab The Start and End Date values display when the task begins and ends. The Task is the unique identifier the system uses to track a task that appears in the pegged chain. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Drilling Down to Add or Change Planned Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Plan Summary: Planned Orders page to add, change, or review planned production, purchase, and transfer orders in the material or master plan. You use this page to review current orders for the item that you selected to work with in the workbench. PL_PLANNED_ORDERS Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row. You must select an item that is planned by the current material or master plan. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

205 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Material Plan Workbench - Plan Summary: Planned Orders page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Configuration Code, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure). The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays the maximum number of rows of data that can be retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single planning task. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in Application Designer. The Start Date and End Date display the time period that you selected using the Plan Summary page. This period is based on the period duration you define for the plan s summary. Click the following buttons to create new orders: The Add Production button opens the Planned Production page, where you can create a new production order. The Add Purchase button opens the Planned Purchase page, where you can create a new purchase order. The Add Transfer button opens the Planned Transfer page, where you can create a new transfer order. Use the Return button to return to the previous page and update the changes you make when you add planned orders or link to the existing orders and make changes. For example, if you decide to change the order quantity using the Order Type link, then you must click the Return button to see the change in this page. You can t make changes to data that appears on the Planned Orders page. When you return from other links, click the Return button to update the page. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-21

206 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The following information also appears on the Planned Orders page: Planning Task Show Supply Show Demand Order Type Start Qty (start quantity) End Date Time Frozen Flag Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track the task to which the planned order is related. This might be a production, purchase, or transfer task. Use this link to access all supply tasks related to this item for this period. Supply tasks include production, purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with supply tasks. Use this link to access all demand tasks related to this item for this period. Demand tasks include forecasts and sales orders. Select the link to work with supply tasks. Use this link to access any of the planned production, purchase, or transfer orders for this item for this period. Select the type of order you want to link to. Displays the quantity that currently exists for the corresponding planning task. The quantity can be a production, purchase, or transfer amount. You can change the value by linking to the order type. Displays when the quantity from the planning task will be available. You can change the quantity by linking to the order type. When you select this check box, the planning task is frozen, meaning the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. Adding Production Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planned Orders - Planned Production page to add a production order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_ADD_PLAN_PROD Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add Production button M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

207 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Production page When you select to add a new production order, you use the Planned Production page. The order you create is entered into the Planning server as a planned order. After you enter order information, click the Apply button to create the order. Click the Return button to return to the Planned Orders page without creating a production order, or click it after you click the Apply button to create the order. Remember to click Return to view the production order you create on this page. You can t add a production order unless the item is the same as its associated primary item. If it isn t, a message alerts you that you can add production orders for primary items only. This prevents you from creating orders for co-products. The Business Unit, Item ID, and Config Code (configuration code) fields are the selections you made to use the Master or Material Plan Workbench and are for display only. When you add a production order, you complete the following information: End Date Production Area Order Qty (order quantity) Std UOM (standard unit of measure) Frozen Production Option Defines when the quantity from this task will be available. This field is required. Defines where the production is taking place. Use the drop-down list to obtain valid areas. Defines the amount of the item you want to produce. This field is required. This value is a display-only value and represents how the item is measured. Select this check box to freeze the production task. This means the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. Defines how the item is manufactured. Use the dropdown list to obtain valid options. This field is required. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-23

208 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Adding Purchase Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planned Orders - Planned Purchase page to add a purchase order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_ADD_PLAN_PURCH Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add Purchase button Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Purchase page The new purchase order you create is entered into the Planning server as a planned order. After you enter order information, click the Apply button to create the order. Click the Return button to return to the Planned Orders page without creating a purchase order, or click it after you click the Apply button to create the order. Remember to click Return to view the purchase order you create in this page. The Business Unit, Item ID, and Config Code (configuration code) fields are defaults from the workbench. When you add a purchase order, you complete the following information: Purchase Option Delivery Date Frozen Order Qty (order quantity) Defines how the item is purchased, including the vendor. Use the drop-down list to obtain valid options. This field is required. Defines when the quantity from this task will be available. This field is required. Select this check box to freeze the purchase task. This means the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. Defines the amount of the item you want to purchase. This field is required M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

209 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Std UOM (standard unit of measure) This value is a display-only value and represents how the item is measured. Adding Transfers Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planned Orders - Planned Transfer page to add a transfer order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_ADD_PLAN_TFR Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add Transfer button Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Transfer page If you want to add a new transfer order, you use the Planned Transfer page to define another business unit (source unit) that can supply the item you need. The order you create is entered into the Planning server as a planned order. After you enter order information, click the Apply button to create the order. Click the Return button to return to the Planned Orders page without creating a transfer, order or click it after you click the Apply button to create the order. Remember to click Return to view the transfer order you create in this page. The Dest Unit (destination unit) is the unit for which you want to create supply. The Source Bus Unit (source business unit) is the unit that is going to supply the item. The field is required. The Item ID and Config Code (configuration code) fields are for display-only values for the transfer. When you add a transfer order, you complete the following information: End Date Frozen Order Qty (order quantity) Defines when the quantity from this task will be available. This field is required. Select this check box to freeze the production task. This means the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. Defines the amount of the item you want to produce. This field is required. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-25

210 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Transfer Option Defines how the item is processed during its movement. Data appearing in the field is based on transfer options you create or on the transfer type. A transfer type is a planned or existing interunit transfer task where the system processes the transfer item for only a single location. Use the drop-down list to obtain valid options. This field is required. Maintaining Production Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisite Use the Production Orders page to view or make changes to an existing production order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a production Order Type A planned production order must already exist. Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Production Orders page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Config Code (configuration code), Std UOM (standard unit of measure), Production Area, and Production Status. The Planned Production page displays the production tasks for the order type you selected on the Planned Orders page. You can delete the order, freeze it, change its quantity, or change the start and end times of the production tasks used to complete the order M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

211 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The item that appears on the page may not be the same item you accessed in the workbench. The item ID is based on the item associated with the production ID. If you are using coproducts, the item will always be the primary item. Select the Cancel Production check box to remove the order from the plan. When you cancel an order, you make it inactive so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or master plan. Select the Frozen Flag check box to change the status of the order to Frozen, meaning the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The difference between deleting an order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use a frozen order. Use the Order Qty field to change a production order quantity. The lower portion of the page displays tasks associated with the production order. The Step and Operation values display the order in which a specific task is performed, while the Start Date Time and End Date Time values display the beginning and ending times for each task. You can change these values to a valid time in the planning period, whether the task is frozen or not. You receive a warning message when you change the time for a frozen task. The Status displays the current state of the task, not the production status that appears in the top portion of the page. You can also change the status of a production order s task by selecting the Frozen Flag check box for the task. Use the following buttons to work with production orders: The View Outputs button links to the View Outputs page, where you can review the output type and remaining quantities. You must click the Apply button after you complete your changes for the planned production order and tasks. This enters you changes into the system. You still must use the Refresh button when you return to the Planned Orders page to view the changes you made in this page. Click the Return button to go back to the Planned Orders page. If you made changes, you must first click the Apply button to enter the changes before you return to the Planned Orders page. Viewing Outputs Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Planned Production - View Outputs page to view the end items for a production order. PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION Plan Production, Manage Material or Master Plan, Use, Material or Master Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a date in the Planned On Hand row type, select a production Order Type, View Outputs P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-27

212 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Access Requirements To access the View Outputs page, click the View Outputs button on the Production Orders page. Material Plan Summary - Planned Production: View Outputs page Information on the View Outputs page is for display only. You can view the Output Type for the Item ID. Output types include the following: Primary Item Co-product Recycle by-product Waste by-product Teardown The main item being produced on a given piece of production or production option. One primary item can exist on a given production or production option. Primary items must be produced at the last operation. An item that is produced on a given piece of production or production option. Multiple co-products can exist on a given piece of production or production option. Coproducts must be produced at the last operation. An item that is produced incidentally on a given piece of production or production option. A by-product is considered recycled when it can be used in some way, either by its own or another operation, by another production option, or by selling it. An item that is produced incidentally on a given piece of production or production option. A by-product is considered a waste when it isn t reused in any fashion and might have to be disposed of. A teardown production order enables the breaking up of an assembly and returning its reusable components to inventory M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

213 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Maintaining Purchase Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the Purchase Orders page to view or make changes to an existing purchase order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_VIEW_PURCHASE Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a purchase Order Type A planned purchase order must already exist. Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Purchase Orders page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Std UOM (standard unit of measure), and Purchase Order. The Purchase Orders page displays the purchase order you selected on the Planned Order page. You can delete the order, freeze it, change its quantity or change the delivery date. Select the Delete check box to remove the order from the plan. When you delete an order, you make it inactive so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or master plan. Select the Frozen check box to change the status of the order to Frozen, meaning the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The difference between deleting an order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use a frozen order. The Status displays the current state of the purchase order. Use the Order Qty (order quantity) field to change a production order quantity. The lower portion of the page displays the Adjusted Schedule Qty (adjusted schedule quantity), Release Date, and Schedule Qty (schedule quantity). You can change the schedule quantity. The Delivery Date displays when the order is due to arrive. The date is based on the Receiving Calendar value so that the order will arrive at the receiving business unit during valid operating hours. The Vendor ID displays the person or organization that is providing the item. After you make changes, click the Apply button to enter the changes into the system, then click the Cancel button to return to the Planned Orders page. Remember that you have to click the Return button to see the changes you make to the purchase order. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-29

214 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Maintaining Transfer Orders Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the Transfer Orders page to add a view or make changes to an existing production order for the current material- or master-plan item. PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a transfer Order Type A planned transfer order must already exist. Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Transfer Orders page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Config Code (configuration code), Std UOM (standard unit of measure), and Status. The Transfer Orders page displays the transfer order you selected on the Planned Orders page. You can cancel the order, freeze it, and change its quantity or delivery date. The Transfer Name defines the unique ID the system uses to track the movement of an item from one business unit to another. The Source Bus Unit (source business unit) is the shipping unit to which the item belongs. The Destination Unit is the receiving business unit. Select the Cancel check box to cancel the order. When you cancel an order, you make it inactive so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or master plan. Select the Frozen check box to change the status of the order to Frozen, meaning the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The difference between canceling an order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use a frozen order. The lower portion of the page displays information about the transfer task. The Start Qty (start quantity) field displays the original amount of the transfer. Use the Order Qty (order quantity) field to change the amount of the transfer. The Start Date Time and Delivery Date values display when the item leaves the source business unit and arrives at the destination business unit. You can change the delivery date value to a valid time in the planning period, whether the task is frozen or not M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

215 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Shipping Calendar and Receiving Calendar fields display the calendars this transfer uses. When you use shipping and receiving calendars with each other, the Planning system schedules task start and end times so that they begin within valid calendar dates and times for the sending unit and so they end in valid dates for the receiving unit. As the system determines valid calendar dates, it adjusts the duration of the task to fall within these dates. Data appears in the Transfer Option field based on the transfer type value. A transfer type is a planned or existing interunit transfer task where the system processes the transfer item for only a single location. After you make changes, click the Apply button to enter the changes into the system, then click the Cancel button to return to the Planned Orders page. Remember that you have to click the Return button to see the changes you make to the purchase order. Analyzing the Master or Material Plan After you create a material or master plan, you can use four options to review and work with the plan. The options provide you with different methods for reviewing the plans. You can generate the plan again to incorporate your changes and to improve the quality of your plan. The options for analyzing the material or master plan include: Material or Master Plan Summary Material or Master Plan Detail Inquiry Material or Master Plan Exceptions Material or Master Planning Scorecard Provides you with an aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and demand for a business unit item. You can use the summary as part of the workbench where you can make changes to the plan or as a stand-alone, display-only detailed review. You mainly want to see that an item s supply meets the demand for the item in any given period. Displays the sequence of supply and demand over time for an item. Use this inquiry when you want to review the time-phased view of demand and supply for an item. Displays exceptions for individual items in a plan. An exception is a condition that prevents the material or master plan from being feasible. The Exceptions Inquiry and Planning Scorecard display similar data. The main difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to review all exceptions for an item in the same grid, whereas the Scorecard provides some summary features by exception type. Displays constraint violations, the number of violations, and a score for the violations. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint violations in a schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-31

216 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing the Master or Material Plan Summary Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Material or Master Plan Summary page to view and analyze the current status of the material- or master-plan data for a specific item. PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master or Material Plan Summary A material or master plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with material- or master-plan data. Plan Summary Page The objective of the Material or Master Plan Summary is to provide you with an aggregate (bucketed) horizontal view of the supply and demand for a business unit item. Using the Material or Master Plan Summary, you first define the item parameters to create the summary. After you define the parameters, you click the Search button to populate the summary. You can t change summary information using the Plan Summary page. If you are maintaining a material or master plan, you use the Material or Master Plan Workbench to access the Plan Summary page. Using the workbenches, you can maintain item data, add orders, and work with tasks in a pegged chain. The Unit is the business unit that contains the item for which you want to perform a Material or Master Plan Summary. It is a required field. You also are required to select an Item ID for the summary. To filter on a specific instance of a configured item you want to review, select a Configuration Code M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

217 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The Start Date provides an exact starting time for the period of time you want to review in the material or master plan. You can review data from the start of the plan or at different intervals in the plan. If you do not enter a date, the default is Sunday of the current week. For example, if today is Tuesday the 10th, the start date that appears in the field would be Sunday the 8th. The Period Duration defines the measurement of time for which you want to review summary information. Valid values for the option are Day, Week, and Month, with Week being the default value. When you define the Number of Periods, the value is measured by the value you define for the duration. The default value for the number of periods is 7. The number of periods you define determines the number of tabs that appear in the summary. Each tab contains seven planning periods. Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name. This is the server from which you want to extract Scorecard data. The Change Row Types button provides a means for you to add, delete, or change the display of data for the summary. The changes you make are temporary and do not replace the default values. For more information about the available row types and their uses and about using the summary, see Using the Master or Material Plan Summary. Viewing the Master or Material Plan Detail Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Material or Master Plan Detail page to retrieve and work with material- or master-plan item data. PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan Summary A material or master plan must have been created. Define the group code, unit, and item ID to populate the summary with material- or master-plan data. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-33

218 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Material Plan Detail: Details page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Configuration Code, Start Date, End Date, and UOM (unit of measure). The Unit and Item ID values are required to access item details. The Material or Master Plan Detail Inquiry displays the sequence of supply and demand over time for an item. You use the inquiry when you to review the phased list of demand and supply for an item, a feature that is not available through the Material or Master Plan Summary Inquiry. The demand and supply information appears along with the running balance for a single inventory item; you can t change item information using the inquiry. The On Hand value in the top portion of the page defines the quantity of the item that is available on the start date of the material or master plan. If the Safety Stock check box is selected, safety stock exists for the item and will be displayed in the details. The Maximum Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from the Planning engine. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in Application Designer. When more than 500 detail rows exist for an item, use the Start Date and End Date fields to view specific ranges for an item. Use the available options for the Planning Server to select a different Planning server template name. This is the server from which you want to extract plan detail data. Click the Change Server Settings button override connection information for a Planning server temporarily. To use the inquiry, define the item that you want to review and generate the inquiry using the Search button. The detail rows are sorted by required date. If the demand and supply have the same required date, supply data appears before demand. The following supply and demand row types are available in the Material or Master Plan Details Inquiry: Production This represents a specific production operation where the item is either a component or an output for the operation. Production operations from both production IDs and production schedules are displayed M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

219 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Transfer Planned Purchase Order Purchase Order Sales Order Forecast This represents a specific transfer task where the item is either shipped from a business unit (demand) or received at a business unit (supply). This represents a planned purchase order delivery of inventory. This represents an existing purchase order delivery of inventory. This represents either a customer order or customer quote. It also represents material stock requests that are not interunit transfers. This represents the net forecasted quantity for an item. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Type The type of task for the detail row. See the list above for a list of types included in the inquiry. Required Date The required date for the quantity for the associated task. Details tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Qty Balance Unit Item ID Description The quantity associated with the task type displayed. The time-phased balance as determined by adding or subtracting supply and demand. For demand tasks, this will be the business unit associated with the item ID for which the demand task is associated. For supply tasks, this field will be blank. For demand tasks, this is the item associated with the demand. For transfers and forecasts, this will be the same item ID for which the inquiry is run. For Production tasks, this will be the primary item being supplied by the production ID or schedule. Displays a description of the item. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-35

220 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Task tab Viewing the Task tab The Status defines the current state of the item. If the Frozen Task check box is selected, the task is frozen. When the task is frozen, the system won t reschedule it when processing the material or master plan. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Reviewing Master or Material Plan Exceptions An exception is a condition that prevents the material or master plan from being feasible. You use the Material or Master Plan Exceptions option to review exceptions for individual items in a plan. The Exception option and Planning Scorecards both display information about current exceptions that exist within the plan. Both could be used to find anomalies within the plan that need to be corrected. The main difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to look at all exceptions 5-36 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

221 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK for an item in the same grid, while the Planning Scorecard has some nice summary features by exception type. It will really be up to you to choose which page to use. You can link to the Material or Master Plan Workbench if, during your review, you want to make changes to either plan. Selecting Exceptions for Review Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Selection Criteria page to define filters that you want to use to limit the material- or master-plan exceptions that appear in the inquiry. You define selection criteria to reduce the size of the inquiry for a single item at a time. PL_MX_INQ_PNL1 Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master or Material Plan Exceptions, Selection Criteria A material or master plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with material- or master-plan data. Material Plan Exceptions - Selection Criteria page The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Config. Code (configuration code), Category ID Family, and Planner Code. Use the Planned By group box to indicate if you want to include exceptions that have been defined in either the material plan or master plan or both. Use the Exception Type group box to define the types of order and operation exceptions you want to include in the inquiry. You can include the following types of exceptions in the inquiry: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-37

222 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Request Date Violations Promise Date Violations Safety Stock Violations Material Shortages Forecast Fulfillment Violations Sch Rcpts before Current Time (scheduled receipts before current time) Planned Order before PTF (planned order before planning time fence) Transfer Shipment Dt Violations (transfer shipment date violations) Displays when a sales order line is going to ship after the customer's request date. Displays when a sales order shipment is going to ship after the date you committed to ship it. Displays when stock level drops below the safety limit for the item you define. Displays when a supply is not going to be available for the item you define. Displays when a forecast has been partially filled and any remaining or canceled quantities. Displays receipts of inventory that are scheduled before the current time, making them past due. This exception is available on the Exception Inquiry only and not on the Scorecard. Displays when a planned order is scheduled within the planning time fence defined for the item. The planning time fence is an offset from current time and is defined at the business unit item level. It is typically set to a value that represents a time frame when it is difficult to react to changes. This exception is available on the Exception Inquiry only and not on the Scorecard. Displays when demand transfer has been rescheduled and used by the Optimizer or a solver to repair missed due dates. Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name. For more information about changing the server settings, see Changing Server Settings. You can define additional filters for extracting constraint violation information from the Planning engine. Click the Advanced Filters tab to access filters that help you reduce the amount of information contained in the Scorecard Inquiry. The Maximum Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in Application Designer M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

223 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Defining Advanced Filters Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Advanced Filters page to define specific customer promise and request date data and the types of orders and operations that you want to include in an exceptions inquiry. PL_MX_ADV_FILTERS1 Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master or Material Plan Exceptions, Advanced Filters A material or master plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with material- or master-plan data. Material Plan Exceptions - Advanced Filters page Use the Promise/Req. Date Excp. Filters (promise/required date exception filters) group box to select the Customer ID that you want to include in the inquiry. The promise date and required date exceptions the system displays will belong to only the customer that you select. You can also limit the exceptions to a date range using the Date From and Date To fields. This date range is different from the ranges you define for orders and operations. In addition, you can select a Vendor ID to limit the exceptions displayed to a specific vendor. This filter is helpful to identify specific purchase orders that are past due (before current time) or may need to be expedited (before the planning time fence). Use the Order/Operation Type group box to limit the inquiry to specific types of orders or operations. Select the corresponding check box to include your option. If a check box is selected, the system includes that type of order or operation in the inquiry. You can also set up a date range for orders and operations. Using the Order/Operation Start Date and Order/Operation End Date group boxes, you can limit an inquiry to within certain dates. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-39

224 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing the Results Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Results page to retrieve and review material- or master-plan item data. PL_MX_RESULT_PNL Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master or Material Plan Exceptions, Results A material or master plan must have been created. Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with material- or master-plan data. Material Plan Exceptions - Results page The Results page displays the Exception Types that you originally defined for the inquiry. If the check boxes are selected, then that exception type is included in the inquiry. Selecting the Max Rows Limit Hit check box indicates that the number of exceptions is greater than the maximum rows to retrieve (500). You can also select a Sort Order for the data contained in the inquiry pages. For more information about using workbenches, see Defining the Master or Material Workbench Search Parameters. As you review item data, you can switch to the Material or Master Plan Workbench to make changes to the item. Click the Workbench Link button to access the workbench M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

225 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Exception Date Displays when the exception to the material or master plan occurs. An exception is a constraint violation in a plan. Exception Type Business Unit Item ID Displays the kind of exception (such as promise date) that occurs. Defines the business unit within which the exception occurs. Displays the item for which the exception occurs. Exceptions tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this page. Description Req Qty (required quantity) UOM (unit of measure) Provides an extended description of the item. Displays the total amount of the item required. Displays the unit of measure in which the quantity is expressed. This is the stockkeeping unit of measure for the item. Order/Operation Details tab Viewing the Order/Operations Details tab Order/Operation Type Displays what kind of task the exception belongs to. For example, it might be a production operation or a transfer order. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-41

226 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Status Frozen Start Time End Time Order/Operation The status indicates the state or condition of the order or operation. While you can define the statuses, the following ones are provided by the system: Planned, Entered, Firmed, Pending, Dispatched, Active, Frozen, Complete, and Canceled. If this check box is selected, then the order or operation is frozen, meaning the system can t automatically move the order. Defines the date and time that an order or operation is to begin. Defines the date and time that an order or operation is to end. Defines the unique ID the system uses to retrieve and process this order or operation. Exception Specific Details tab Viewing the Exception Specific Details tab Customer/Vendor From Unit To Unit Forecast Delayed Displays the person or organization that is going to receive (customer) or ship (vendor) the item for which the exception was created. Displays the shipping business unit for the item. Displays the receiving business unit for the item. Displays the amount of a forecasted quantity that has been delayed. A forecast quantity can be delayed when partial quantities can be produced. This column is populated for forecast fulfillment exceptions only M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

227 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Forecast Canceled Displays the amount of a forecasted quantity that has been canceled. When a forecast quantity is canceled, the system does not include that quantity in processing. This is populated for forecast fulfillment exceptions only. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Master or Material Plan The PeopleSoft Production Planning Scorecard is a tool that evaluates the efficiency of your overall enterprise plan by showing you constraint violations, the number of violations, and a score for the violations. In Production Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint violations in a schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is. You use the Planning Scorecard to view the scorecard information for an existing plan. You use the data in the Planning Scorecard for review purposes only. You don t maintain data using the Scorecard. Along with displaying Planning engine data, you use the Scorecard page to filter the type and quantity of information you want to display and the Planning server you want to connect to. Overview of the Planning Scorecard The Planning Scorecard page contains similar information to that in the Scorecard available in the Planning engine. Both scorecards display summary information (score/count) for the constraints that are selected using the Control Panel option in the Planning engine. The DataLink creates the initial model with all constraints selected so that the scorecard displays all violated constraints. If P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-43

228 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 you turn off a constraint through the Planning Client, the constraint won t be scored nor will details be retrieved in the Planning Scorecard pages. For more information about using the Control panel, see PeopleSoft Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, Managing Constraints. The Planning Scorecard uses an early fence that displays the beginning of the time interval that the Planning engine evaluates and then produces the Planning Scorecard. A late fence displays the end of the interval and is usually set at the end of the planning horizon. These fences determine the time interval in which the Scorecard counts constraints to the schedule. Each constraint has a filtered count, a total count, and a score. The filtered count represents the number of violations that match any filtered criteria that were defined using the Filters page. The total count represents the number of violations for a particular type of constraint. The total score for each type of constraint is based on several weight factors that represent the relative importance of a constraint. The total count and score do not use filters; they show you all constraint violations. A score of zero indicates that the constraint either is not violated or has been cleared. Penalty is a function that expresses the degree to which the constraint is violated. Before you send data to the Planning engine and begin to use the Planning Scorecard, you must setup several pieces of information that PeopleSoft Production Planning uses to populate the Scorecard with the type of data that you want. To process the material and master plan and retrieve Scorecard data, use the following steps: 1. Define DataLink options you that want the Planning engine to use in identifying material- or master-plan modeling parameters. This includes the solvers that you want to run and the types of data you want included in the processing. 2. Define a Planning server template name so it can be selected on the Scorecard Summary page, eliminating the need to enter user, server, and port data each time you access the Planning Scorecard. A prerequisite to using the Planning Scorecard is that you have a Planning engine running on a server. 3. Generate the plan. The data goes to the Planning engine and the system starts the solvers you defined. 4. Use the Planning Scorecard page to review the counts and scores of constraint violations that exist in the Planning engine. Then, you can determine the types of violations that you want to work with. Using the Planning Scorecard Page Usage Use the Planning Scorecard page to review high-level information about constraint violations for your current planning model. You can also drill down to more detailed data, define the extent of data for review, and connect to different servers in the Planning engine M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

229 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements PL_SCARD_SUMMARY Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard You must have generated a plan by running one of the solvers. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port to import Scorecard data from the Planning engine. Planning Scorecard page Information on the Planning Scorecard page displays the filtered count, the total count, and the total score for each type of constraint class in the current plan or schedule. The system pulls this information from the Planning engine and it appears as display-only data. To see specific constraint violations, select the Filtered Count field. The following information appears on the Planning Scorecard page, regardless of the constraint you select to work with: Early Fence Late Fence Filtered Count Total Count Total Score Displays the beginning of the time interval in which constraint violations are calculated. Displays the ending of the time interval in which constraint violations are calculated. Displays the number of violations that match any filtered criteria that were defined using the Filters page. You select this value to see additional details about the count. Displays the number of violations for a particular type of constraint. Displays the total score for each type of constraint. The score is based on several weight factors that represent the relative importance of a constraint. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-45

230 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 From the Planning Scorecard page, you can access detail pages associated with the following types of constraints: Request Dates Promise Dates BI Shortages (buildable inventory shortages) Aggregate Capacity Safety Stock Excess Stock RM Shortages (raw material shortages) A sales order line is scheduled to ship at the customer's request date. This constraint strives to keep a sales order delivery scheduled to meet the customer request date. The constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processing transactions. A sales order shipment is scheduled to ship at the date you committed to ship. This constraint strives to keep a sales order delivery scheduled to meet the promise date. The constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processing transactions. A buildable inventory shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for an end item. This constraint tries to make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of the demands for finished good items. The aggregate capacity constraint is violated when a production operation overloads an aggregate capacity resource. This constraint tries to make sure that the production does not overallocate the aggregate capacity buckets. When stock level drops below the safety limit, existing supplies must be moved or new supplies must be generated to bring the stock back to the desired level. This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the safety limit. When stock level exceeds the excess limit, movement or deletion of supplies is necessary to bring the stock down to the desired level. This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the excess limit. A raw material shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for a purchased item. This constraint tries to make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of the demands for purchased items M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

231 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Forecast Fulfillment Transfer Ship Date Any forecast task that is not met or is partially met represents a constraint to the production plan. This constraint displays all the violated forecast fulfillment constraints, including the total quantity of filled forecast tasks for all planning periods, the total quantity of delayed forecast tasks, and the total quantity of canceled forecasts. The transfer shipment date is a constraint linked to the transfer type. This constraint displays any demand transfer task that has been rescheduled and used by the Optimizer or a solver to repair missed due dates for a demand transfer task. Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name. This is the server from which you want to extract Scorecard data. For more information about changing the server settings, see Changing Server Settings. You can define additional filters for extracting constraint violation information from the Planning engine. Use the Filters button to access filters that help you to reduce the amount of information contained in the Scorecard Inquiry. For more information about defining filters for the Planning Scorecard, see Filtering Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data. The Maximum Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in Application Designer. You receive a warning message if more than 500 violations are going to be extracted and returned to the Scorecard. Reviewing Request Date Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the Request Dates page to review Scorecard constraint violations that relate to shipments requested by customers. PL_SC_REQ_DATE Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Request Dates Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the request date information that appears in the Scorecard. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-47

232 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Access Requirements You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Request Dates: Date/Customer page Request dates are the dates that a customer has requested to receive a shipment. A sales order line is scheduled to ship based on this request date. The request date constraint strives to ensure that a sales order delivery schedule meets the customer s request date. The constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processing transactions. When you have violations, you can move the shipment date earlier or later in time so that it is closer to the request date, assuming that such a shipment would be supported by the required finished goods inventory. This doesn t change the sales order s request date. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Request Date displays the date and time that the customer has requested for the arrival of stock at the customer location. If the date and time are earlier than the Shipment End date and time, there is a violation to the material or master plan. Date/Customer tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

233 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Customer Shipment Start Date/Time Shipment End Date/Time Shipment Sales Order Displays the person or organization that is going to receive the shipment and whose request date is going to be missed. Defines when the shipment task is to begin. This is the date and time that the stock is scheduled to leave the business unit. Defines when the shipment task is to end. This is the date and time that the stock is scheduled to arrive at the customer location. Displays the identifier for the shipment. This ID is used to track the movement of stock for the sales order. Displays the sales order code the PeopleSoft Production planning system uses to track a sales order through its production and shipment. This sales order is the one with the constraint violation. Item ID tab Viewing the Item ID tab The Unit column indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to meet the sales order demand, and the Item ID identifies the item ordered by the customer. An item may have a different ID from business unit to business unit. The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and for completion of the sales order. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-49

234 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing Safety Stock Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Safety Stock page to review items in your plan that drop below their safety-stock level. PL_SC_SAFETY_STOCK Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Safety Stock, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Safety Stock: Item ID page When items in the material or master plan drop below their safety-stock limit during the planning horizon, they appear on this page. When the stock level drops below the safety limit, existing supplies must be moved or new supplies must be produced to bring the stock back to the desired level. This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the safety limit. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

235 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Common Page Information Unit Indicates the business unit in which the planned on-hand inventory level for this item falls below safety levels. Item ID Identifies the item for which the planned on-hand inventory falls below safety-stock levels. Item ID tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Description Start Date/Time End Date/Time Max Deviation Describes the item that has the safety-stock violation. Defines the first date on which the item s planned on-hand inventory falls below the set safety-stock level. Used with the End Date/Time column, this column displays the length of time that the inventory is below the safety-stock level. Defines the last date that the item s planned on-hand inventory is below safety-stock levels. Displays the maximum amount the item s planned onhand inventory level is below safety stock during the planning horizon. While the inventory level may remain below safety-stock levels for a week, the maximum level might only last for a single day. Planner/Configuration Code tab Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Reviewing Promise Date Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Promise Dates page to review Scorecard information that relates to shipments that have been promised to customers. PL_SC_PROM_DATE Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Promise Dates, Filtered Count P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-51

236 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Prerequisites Access Requirements Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates: Date/Customer page Promise dates are the dates and times that you promise a customer that a shipment will arrive. The sales order shipment is scheduled to ship on the date you committed to ship. This constraint strives to keep a sales order delivery scheduled to meet the promise date. The constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processing transactions. When you have violations, you can move the shipment date earlier or later in time so that it is closer to the promise date, assuming that such a shipment would be supported by the required finished goods inventory. This doesn t change the sales order s promise date. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Promise Date displays the date and time when stock has been committed to arrive at the customer location. If the date and time are earlier than the Shipment End date and time, there is a violation to the production plan M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

237 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Date/Customer tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Customer Shipment Start Date/Time Shipment End Date/Time Shipment Unit Sales Order Displays the person or organization that is going to receive the shipment and to whom the promise commitment was made. Defines when the shipment task is to begin. This is the date and time when the stock is scheduled to leave the business unit. Defines when the shipment task is to end. This is the date and time when the stock is scheduled to arrive at the customer location and the promised date that is going to be missed. Displays the identifier for the shipment. This ID is used to track the movement of stock for the sales order. Indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to meet the sales order demand. Displays the sales order code the PeopleSoft Production Planning system uses to track a sales order through its production and shipment. Item ID tab Viewing the Item ID tab The Unit column indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to meet the sales order demand, and the Item ID identifies the item ordered by the customer. An item may have a different ID from business unit to business unit. The Planner Code displays the person responsible for the item and for the completion of the sales order. Configuration tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-53

238 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item (for example, how it s assembled). Reviewing Excess Stock Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Excess Stock page to review production plan violations for excessive levels of stock. PL_SC_EXCESS_STOCK Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Excess Stock, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears on the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Excess Stock: Item ID page Excess stock exists when an item s inventory level is higher than limits set for the item. The movement or deletion of supplies is necessary to bring the stock level down to within limits. This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the excess limit. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

239 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Common Page Information Unit Indicates the business unit in which the planned on-hand inventory goes above excess stock limits. Item ID Identifies the item for which the planned on-hand inventory goes above excess stock levels. A Description follows the item. Item ID tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Start Date/Time End Date/Time Max Deviation (maximum deviation) Defines the first date on which the item s planned on-hand inventory is above the set excess stock level. Used with the End Date/Time, the two values display the length of time that the inventory is above the excess level. Defines the last date on which the item s planned on-hand inventory is above safety-stock levels. Displays the maximum amount that the planned on-hand inventory level of the item is above excess stock levels. While the stock level may be in excess for a week, the maximum level might last for only a single day Planner/Configuration Code tab Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Reviewing BI Shortage Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the BI Shortages page to review Scorecard information relating to buildable inventory shortages. PL_SC_BI_SHORTS Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, BI Shortages, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears on the Scorecard. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-55

240 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Access Requirements You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - BI Shortages (buildable inventory shortages): Item ID page A buildable inventory shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for a manufactured item. This constraint tries to make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of the demands for manufactured items. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Unit Indicates the business unit that will experience the inventory shortage of this item. Item ID Identifies the manufactured item for which there is not going to be enough inventory supply to meet a particular demand. A Description follows the item. Item ID tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this page. Date/Time Displays the date and time that the item is required M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

241 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Quantity Quantity Short Displays the total amount of the item that is required. Displays the amount of the item that is going to be short in the current plan. Details tab Viewing the Details tab The Operation column displays the type of operation that requires the item, such as a production task or transfer and the Planner Code column identifies the person responsible for the item. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Reviewing RM Shortage Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the RM Shortages page to review production plan violations that relate to raw materials purchased to meet orders in the plan. PL_SC_RM_SHORTAGES Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, RM Shortages, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-57

242 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Scorecard - RM Shortages (raw material shortages): Item ID page A raw material shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for a purchased item. This constraint tries to ensure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of the demands for purchased items. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Unit Indicates the business unit that will experience the raw material shortage. Item ID Identifies the purchased item for which there is not going to be enough planned on-hand inventory to meet a particular demand. The item s Description also appears. Item ID tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Date/Time Quantity Quantity Short Displays the date and time that the item is required. Displays the total amount of the raw material required. Displays the cumulative amount of raw material that is going to be short M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

243 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Details tab Viewing the Details tab The Operation column displays the type of operation that requires the item, such as a production task, and the Planner Code displays the person responsible for the item and for completion of its production. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item (for example, how it s assembled). Reviewing Aggregate Capacity Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Aggregate Capacity page to review Scorecard constraint violations for overloaded aggregate resources. PL_SC_AGG_CAP Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Aggregate Capacity, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Also, Scorecard violations must exist before the page is populated. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-59

244 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity: Resource page aggregate resource planning, the system combines capacity loads for resources in daily, weekly, or monthly planning buckets. The number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as long as there are available hours in the bucket. Aggregate capacity represents the total capacity available to perform tasks in a given time bucket. This constraint tries to make sure that the production does not overallocate the aggregate capacity buckets. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Unit Defines the business unit where the aggregate resource is located. Assigned Resource Displays the aggregate resource that is overloaded. Aggregate capacity violations identify production operations that are scheduled at times that exceed the available capacity on the assigned aggregate resource. Resource tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Start Date/Time Identifies when the resource is scheduled to begin producing the item M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

245 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK End Date/Time Load Start Date/Time Identifies when the resource is scheduled to complete the production of the item. Displays the start time the system uses to calculate and allocate the remaining capacity requirement for the production task when a portion of the task has been completed. The system calculates a load duration value based on the remaining task quantity, then uses that value with the task end time to establish the load start time. Details tab Viewing the Details tab The Resource Class identifies the type of resource, either aggregate by time or aggregate by unit. The Operation identifies the production operation that is scheduled on the resource. Item ID tab Viewing the Item ID tab The Item ID column displays the item that the resource is producing, and the Description provides a brief description of the operation. The system uses this identification to track the flow of the requirement and plan for its material needs. The Planner Code displays the person responsible for the item and completion of its production. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item such as how it s assembled. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-61

246 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing Forecast Fulfillment Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Forecast Fulfillment page to review violations relating to unfulfilled forecasts. PL_SC_FCST_FILL Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Forecast Fulfillment, Filtered Count Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears on the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment: Item ID page Forecast fulfillment is the process the Planning engine uses to meet forecasted demand when there is not enough supply to meet all of the demand at once. During the process, net forecasts are divided into tasks that are associated with the original planning period. For example, each forecast is associated with a planning period, and planning periods are defined to be either daily, weekly, or monthly. Each task represents a portion of the quantity required to meet the forecasted demand. Constraint violations that appear on this page are those that are associated with a delayed or canceled forecast task. The forecast fulfillment score is the number of violated forecast fulfillment constraints divided by the total number of forecast fulfillment constraints. For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

247 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Common Page Information Unit Indicates the business unit that has a forecasted demand for the item. Item ID Identifies the item associated with the forecast fulfillment violation. A Description of the item follows. Item ID tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Filled Delayed Canceled Displays the item s total forecast quantity that can be met in the original planning period. If the entire forecast can t be met, values appear in either the Delayed or Canceled columns. Displays the total forecast quantity that has been delayed. If a forecast is front loaded, it is considered to be delayed if any of its tasks start after the planning period start time. If a forecast is back loaded, it is considered to be delayed if any of its tasks start after the planning period end time. Displays the total forecast quantity that has been canceled. Within the forecast fulfillment fence, if a forecast task can t be satisfied in its original planning period, then solvers cancel the task. After the fence, solvers roll over any unfulfilled forecast task demand to later planning buckets. For more information about defining the forecast fulfillment fence, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. Planner/Configuration Code tab Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-63

248 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing Transfer Shipment Date Constraint Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Transfer Ship Dates page to review material and master-plan constraint violations for demand-transfer type tasks that have been rescheduled by the Planning engine. PL_SC_TRSFR_MST Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, Transfer Ship Date, Filtered Count Click the Filters button to define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates: Transfer Details page This page displays transfer shipment date constraint violations for demand transfer tasks that have been rescheduled and used by the Planning engine to repair missed due dates for demand transfer tasks. A transfer type is a planned or existing interunit transfer in which the system only processes the transfer item for a single location. This reduces the time it takes for the Planning engine to run material and master plans. For example, you might model and manufacture an item in one plant and define a demand transfer of the item to another location. During the processing, the DataLink and Planning engine do not process data, such as bills and routings, associated with the item from the shipping location. Transfers result from either demand or supply requirements. In a single manufacturing environment, you can set up transfers supplying the plant as the supply side of the transfer and set up transfers placing a requirement on the plant as the demand side of the transfer. Existing and planned transfers for an item for each business unit will have the supply side, the demand side, or both sides modeled in PeopleSoft Production Planning M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

249 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the Planning Scorecard Page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Original Shipment Date/Time defines the date and time that a demand transfer task was originally scheduled for shipment. The demand transfer was rescheduled by a solver to repair another problem. Transfer Details tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Shipment Date/Time Receipt Date/Time Unit Item ID To Unit Shipment Quantity Defines the date and time the transfer will be shipped from the From Unit. Defines the date and time the transfer should arrive at the To Unit. Defines the shipping unit. Defines the item at the From Unit. Using demand transfer shipments, the Optimizer reduces processing time by using item data from only one business unit. The Planning engine does not process item information associated with the To Unit. Defines the destination unit. The item information is associated with the From Unit. Indicates the amount of the item that the task is scheduled to transfer. Transfer Task tab Viewing the Transfer Task tab P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-65

250 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The Transfer Tasks column displays the identifier of the transfer task that is moving the item. The Planning engine uses the ID to track the transfer during processing. Planner/Configuration Code tab Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on the use of the item, such as how it s assembled. Filtering Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Use the General Filters page to limit the amount of data the system extracts from the Planning engine. You use filters to define specific ranges of data for the current material or master plan. PL_SC_FILTERS_SP Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Inquiry, Planning Scorecard, Filters Define any filters you want to use in limiting the information that appears on the Scorecard. Planning Scorecard - General Filters page Using this page, you can limit the amount of data contained in the Planning Scorecard, reducing the time it takes to generate the Scorecard and making information easier to review. You use 5-66 M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

251 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK these filters to extract manageable amounts of data from the Planning engine. No fields are required on the General Filters page. After you define the filters, click the OK button. The summary page is then refreshed with the new filtered counts. If you do not define filters, PeopleSoft Production Planning extracts all constraint violations from the Planning engine, which may require additional processing time. Enter the Business Unit from which you are going to extract production plan violations for the Scorecard. You can also use the Planner Code field to limit the extracted data to a single planner ID. If you do not enter a unit or planner, then all violations for units or planners are included in the Scorecard results. Use the Item ID fields to define an alphanumeric range of items that will be extracted from the Planning engine. The From item is the first item in the range and the To item is the last in the range. The Config Code (configuration code) fields make it possible to limit the number of items in the Scorecard to a specific configuration code. These are IDs that you use instead of part numbers to define a particular arrangement or assembly of components. Use the Date From field to select the beginning date for Scorecard data and use the To field to select the ending date. Only constraint violations that occur within these dates appear in the Scorecard. You can also filter data to view promise and request date violations for a specific Customer, or to view aggregate capacity violations for a specific Aggregate Resource. Only the violations for the customer or the resource you define appear in the Scorecard. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE M ASTER AND M ATERIAL P LANS 5-67

252

253 C HAPTER 6 Managing the Capacity Plan After you decide the amount of resources available, you need to determine the amount of capacity required to produce products in the future. You can use a capacity plan to manage your resources. With the capacity plan, you can view capacity by user-specified buckets and drill down to production details where you can add, delete, cancel, or reschedule capacity requirements. Overview of the Capacity Planning Process In planning for capacity, you need to: Determine the amount of available resources in a specific business unit. View the resource load and the production associated with it. Identify the required capacity and the overloaded capacity. Adjust the order as needed by adding, deleting, or canceling production, rescheduling tasks, or changing quantity. Before You Begin Before you can create a capacity-feasible plan, you must: Establish a resource using the Planning Option page in the Define Resources component and Define Work Centers component in PeopleSoft Manufacturing. Start a Planning-server session and generate a production plan. The resources in the Planning server must correspond to the resources in the workbench. Maintaining the Capacity Plan To effectively maintain the capacity plan, you need to easily display information about the overloaded resources in a bucketed format. PeopleSoft Production Planning responds to this need by providing you with a robust set of inquiry pages. You can first use the Resource Workbench to view the capacity-plan details based on certain selection and sort criteria. After you ve identified the overloaded resources, you can then view P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-1

254 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 the loads in a bucketed format over time from the Capacity Summary. Consequently, you can make manual adjustments to the capacity plan to resolve capacity problems. Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Resource Workbench page to search all resources and identify those that have capacity violations. PL_CWB1_RI Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use, Capacity Plan Workbench, Resource Workbench Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server. Enter a Business Unit. Resource Workbench page Using the search feature, select a Business Unit. Then, select a Resource Type from the available options: Crew, Machine, Rough Cut Resource, Tool, Work Center, and Workcenter (subcontract). You can t select rough-cut capacity resources from the Capacity Plan Workbench as they apply to the rough-cut capacity plan in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. You must enter a resource type to return a list of available resources. Select a Violation Rule from the available options as a criterion to display the violations. The default is All Resources. Your options are: 6-2 M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

255 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Consider Violations Ignore Violations All Resources Select this option if you want to display only resources with the Ignore Violations check box clear. Select this option if you want to display only resources with the Ignore Violations check box selected. Select this option if you want to display all resources regardless of whether the Ignore Violation check box is selected or not. The Ignore Violations functionality is determined on a resource-by-resource basis. For more information about Ignore Violations, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Maintaining Work Centers and Defining Resources. The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays how many rows of data the Planning engine will retrieve for the inquiry. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in the Application Designer. A resource class identifies what type of resource that you are planning. There are two types of resource planning: detailed and aggregate. In detailed resource planning, the system assigns specific times for a specific resource to start and finish a task. In aggregate planning, the system combines capacity loads for resources in daily, weekly, or monthly planning buckets. The number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as long as there are available hours in the bucket. Select a Resource Class from one of the following options: Detail Time Unit Select Detail if you want to do detailed resource planning, where the system tracks resource usage down to specific times. Select Time if you want to do aggregate resource planning based on the amount of time available in the time bucket that you select. Select Unit if you want to do aggregate resource planning based on the number of units the resources can produce in a given time bucket. Select a Utilization state for the resources. Your options are All, Overloaded, and Not Overloaded. The default is All. Use Overloaded to focus in on resources that are currently over capacity. Select Not Overloaded to see underutilized capacity. Select a Resource Code. To define resource codes, you use the Define Resources page and Define Work Centers page on the Structure Engineering menu. This is an optional field. When it is left blank, all resources matching the other filter criteria will be loaded into the page for further review. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-3

256 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Select a Planning Server from the available options. To define a Planning server, you use the Planning Server Definition page in the General Options component of the Define Business Rules menu. Click the Search button to retrieve the data. All the data that appears in the grid comes from the Planning server. If you have selected Ignore Violation as the violation rule and Overloaded as the utilization state, the respective check boxes will be selected in the row corresponding to the resource. Allocation Strategy is used only for aggregate resources to determine how you are going to spread the time/unit capacity over the bucket for the resource. Your options are Start, Finish, and Proportional. This answers the following question: If the task is stretched across two or more buckets, should the task, in its entirety, be placed in the first bucket or in the last bucket, or should it be spread proportionally across all buckets? The default is Proportional. This field is unavailable for detailed resources. When you click a Resource Code, the system takes you directly to the Capacity Summary page. Using the Capacity Summary Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Capacity Summary page to inquire about the current status of a capacity plan. The summary displays horizontal capacity information for a selected resource. PL_CAP_PLAN_SUMM Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan Workbench, Capacity Summary Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server. Enter a Business Unit. 6-4 M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

257 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Capacity Summary page The Capacity Summary mimics the Capacity Spreadsheet, the Aggregate Capacity by Time Spreadsheet, and the Aggregate Capacity by Unit Spreadsheet available in the Planning engine. You use the summary to view the required resource in different time buckets. The Unit, Resource Type, and Resource Code are display-only fields. This page also enables you to filter your data. After you ve displayed the capacity summary, you can define the search criteria further by specifying values in the following fields: Start Date Default value: round down to Sunday of the current week. Number of Periods Default value: 7. Period Duration The option is only available for detailed resources. Default value is Weekly for detailed resources. For aggregate resources, this value represents the defined bucket size for the resource. If you select Weekly, the system rounds the start date to the Sunday before the start date that you entered. If you select Monthly, the system rounds the start date to the first day of the month. If you select Daily, the system leaves all of your selections alone. If you select an aggregate resource, then you can t change the Period Duration. Use the Planning server field to temporarily change the current server settings. For more information about connecting to the Planning engine, see PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning PeopleBook, Setting Up the Enterprise DataLink. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-5

258 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Click the Search button after you have modified the search criteria. The system displays data related to your search criteria. The Row Types are hard-coded, and you can t select which ones to display. The default row types are: Available Capacity Required Capacity Down Hours Unused Capacity Overloaded Capacity Utilization The total capacity available for utilization. The amount of capacity being utilized for production. A form of unused capacity that is not occupied (for detailed resources only). An example is machine shutdown. The leftover capacity (Available Capacity, Required Capacity, Down Time). The amount that exceeds the available capacity. The ratio between required capacity and available capacity. The Past Due column displays data prior to the start date specified in the search criteria. The dates represent time periods that you specify based on the values in the Start Date and Number of Periods fields. If you enter the number of periods as 7 and the duration is Weekly, then there should be seven weekly time periods in the grid. A maximum of 52 periods can be displayed for each search. Click a Required Capacity row type value to display production details that are placing capacity load on the resource for a given time bucket. Viewing the Resource Load Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Resource Load page to display the individual production operations that make up the load on that resource during that time bucket. PL_CWB3_RL Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan Workbench, Capacity Summary Create a Required Capacity on the Capacity Summary page. Click the Required Capacity link on the Capacity Summary page. 6-6 M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

259 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Capacity Summary - Resource Load: Operation Details page The top portion of the page displays search parameters you defined for the summary. For more information about the parameters, see Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters. The Start Date/Time, End Date/Time, and Percent Utilization fields show the planning period for the resource you selected along with its percentage of use. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Production This is the ID for a production task. The remaining information in the row relates to this task. When you click the value, the system displays the Production Details page containing all operations for the associated production ID or schedule. Op Seq (operation sequence) This is the routing sequence number on which the resource is used. For more information about Production, see Viewing the Production Details. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-7

260 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Operation Details tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this page. Start Date/Time Load Start Date/Time End Date/Time Actual Load Percent Load Status Frozen Flag This is the currently scheduled start date and time for the operation. This is the start time the system uses to calculate and allocate the remaining capacity requirement for the production task when a portion of the task has been completed. The system calculates a load duration value based on the remaining task quantity, then uses that value with the task end time to establish the load start time. This is the currently scheduled end times for the production operation This is the number of hours for all resource types and represents the capacity requirements for the production operation. This is the percentage obtained using the formula operations usage divided by the resource s capacity in the bucket. The field displays the current status for the production operation. If this check box is selected, you can t reschedule the operation. Item/Qty tab Viewing the Item/Qty tab You can view the Item ID, Item Description, and Remaining Qty (remaining quantity) for this production. When you click a Production, the system takes you to an update page, where you can make changes to the production order. 6-8 M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

261 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab If the production consists of configurable items, the Configuration Code will display in the grid. If you want to take advantage of unused capacity, you can click the Add Production button to display a page to add production. Adding Production Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Add Production page to add a production to the Planning server. PL_CWB3_RL Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan Workbench, Capacity Summary, click a Required Capacity, Add Production Create a Required Capacity on the Capacity Summary page. Click the Add Production button on the Resource Load page. Add Production page The Business Unit defaults from the previous page. Specify an item by selecting an Item ID from the prompt. Select a Config Code (configuration code) from the prompt. Enter the End Date/Time, and Order Qty (order quantity) of the production. The Std UOM (standard unit of measure) represents how the item is quantified. Select a Production Area and Production Option from the available options. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-9

262 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 If you select the Frozen check box, then you can t change the date and quantity of the production. Click the Apply button to add the production. Click the Return button to return to the previous page without adding a production task. All production that is added through this workbench is considered planned production. Viewing the Production Details Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Production Details page to display the individual orders that make up the load on that resource during the specified time bucket. PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use Capacity Workbench, Capacity Summary Display the Resource Load. Click a Production value on the Resource Load page. Production Details page Click the Apply button to move the production to a different time bucket by changing the dates. The system automatically returns you to the Production Summary page. Click the Return button to go back to the previous page without updating any information within the Planning server. You can change the quantity only if the production status is Planned. You can change the start/end dates for all production. If the Frozen Flag check box is selected, you should not make any changes regardless of the status M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

263 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Existing Production Orders If an order is an existing production order, you can make the following changes: Reschedule the order. Change the order status to Cancel. Select or clear the Frozen Flag check box. Planned Production Orders If an order is a planned production order, you can make the following changes: Reschedule the order. Delete the planned order. Select or clear the Frozen Flag check box. Change the Order Qty. Viewing the Production Outputs Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the View Outputs page to display the production outputs. PL_VIEW_OUTPUT Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use, Capacity Workbench, Capacity Summary Create a production order. Click the View Outputs button on the Production Details page. View Outputs page P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-11

264 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For Output Type, Primary is the main output. Other output types are Co-product, By-product Waste, and By-product Recycled. For more information about the types of output, see PeopleSoft Bills and Routings PeopleBook, Maintaining Bills of Material. The Item ID represents the item you are working with. The Schedule Qty (scheduled quantity) represents the number of units originally scheduled for production and the Remaining Qty (remaining quantity) displays the number of the original quantity that is left to produce. The Completed Qty (completed quantity) displays the number of units that have been completed. The Std UOM (standard unit of measure) represents how the item is counted. Analyzing the Capacity Plan When you analyze the capacity plan, you can view the Capacity Summary via the Capacity Workbench. You can also drill down on a resource to display the production details, add a production order, change the order quantity, and reschedule tasks. However, if you just want to view the data without attempting to change it, you can simply access the Capacity Plan Summary. The difference between the Capacity Summary Workbench and the Capacity Plan Summary is that the latter is for inquiry only. Viewing the Capacity Plan Summary Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Capacity Plan Summary page to enter search criteria to retrieve resource information. PL_CAP_PLAN_SUMM Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Capacity Plan Summary Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server. Enter a Business Unit M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

265 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Capacity Plan Summary Page The top portion of the page displays search parameters you defined for the summary. To further define your search criteria, you can change the Start Date, Number of Periods, and Planning Server. Click the Search button to retrieve the capacity summary data. For more information about how to enter the search criteria, see Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters. The Row Types are hard coded, and you can t select which ones to display. The default row types are: Available Capacity Required Capacity Down Hours This is the total capacity available for utilization. This is the amount of capacity being utilized for production. This is for detailed resources only and is a form of unused capacity that is not occupied. An example is machine shutdown. Unused Capacity This is the leftover capacity (Available Capacity - Required Capacity - Down Time). Overloaded Capacity Utilization This is the amount that exceeds the available capacity. This is the ratio between Required Capacity and Available Capacity. Past Due represents data prior to the start date specified in the search criteria. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-13

266 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The dates represent time periods that you specify based on the Start Date and Number of Periods. If the number of periods is 7 and the duration is Weekly, then there should be seven weekly time periods in the grid. A maximum of 52 periods can be displayed per search. Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Capacity Plan An alternate method to review the capacity plan is through the Scorecard Inquiry page, which displays the number (counts) of violations relating to Aggregate Capacity. The violations identify production operations that are scheduled at times that exceed the available capacity in hours or units on the aggregate resource. Once you ve identified the violations, you can address them in many ways. You can run one of the solvers (Material Planning, Feasible Planning, or Linear Programming) with the parameters for solving capacity included. You can resolve the capacity problem manually by rescheduling the over capacity resource or adjusting the available capacity for the period in violation. For more information about the solving capabilities of the solvers, see Setting Up the Production DataLink. To reschedule the task manually, you can use the Capacity Workbench to drill down to the overloaded resource and reschedule or cancel production during overloaded periods. For more information about the Capacity Workbench, see Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters. Filtering Capacity Plan Scorecard Data Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Planning Scorecard page to enter search criteria to retrieve aggregate capacity violation counts. PL_SCARD_SUMMARY Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard You must have generated a plan running either the Optimizer or one of the solvers. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port to import Scorecard data from the Planning engine M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

267 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Planning Scorecard page Select a Planning Server from the available options to display the Aggregate Capacity violations. Click the Filters button to filter the data and display the Scorecard Filters page, where you can further define your search criteria. For more information about changing filters, see Managing the Master and Material Plans. Viewing Capacity Violations Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use the Aggregate Capacity page to review Scorecard constraint violations for overloaded aggregate resources. PL_SC_AGG_CAP Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Planning Scorecard, click Aggregate Capacity Filtered Count Define any filters you want to use in limiting the information that appears in the Scorecard. You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an established port. Also, Scorecard violations must exist before the page is populated. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-15

268 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Capacity Plan Summary - Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity Violations: Resource page Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information Unit The business unit at which the resource is located. Assigned Resource This is the aggregate resource that is overloaded. Resource tab See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab. Start Date/Time End Date/Time Load Date/Time This is the currently scheduled start date and time for the operation. This is the currently scheduled end times for the production operation This is the time the system uses to calculate and allocate the remaining capacity requirement for the production task when a portion of the task has been completed. The system calculates a load duration value based on the remaining task quantity, then uses that value with the task end time to establish the load start time M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

269 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Details tab Viewing the Details tab This tab displays the Resource Class and the Operation (task) involved in the overload. Item ID tab Viewing the Item ID tab This tab includes the Item ID, Description, and Planner Code for the assigned resource in a specific business unit. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN 6-17

270 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 If the assigned resource contains configurable items, the Configuration Code appears in the grid. For more information about the Planning Scorecard and other constraint violations, see Managing the Master and Material Plans M ANAGING THE C APACITY P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

271 C HAPTER 7 Committing the Production Plan After you create and solve a plan in the Planning engine, you ll need to transfer the plan, in the form of planning messages, back to your PeopleSoft database. Once the data is back in the PeopleSoft transactional system, the planning messages are available for further review and processing by production control managers, master schedulers, planner/buyers, and stockroom managers. Overview of the Commit Plan Process Once you create a workable plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you bring back the recommendations into the PeopleSoft transactional system using the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. There, the recommendations are distributed into the various components as planning messages, where they are reviewed and can be acted upon. You can also select to have messages automatically approved, where applicable, and you only need to apply them where necessary. The information transferred from the Planning engine includes: Production Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply production data. For more information about production messages, see Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management. Production Exceptions: You can select and review exception information for the production messages. For more information about production exceptions, see Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management. Inventory Transfer Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply inventory transfer data. For more information about inventory transfer messages, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-1

272 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Inventory Exceptions: You can select and review exception information for the inventory transfer messages. For more information about inventory exceptions, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory. Material Stock Request Messages: You can select and review material stock request data. For more information about material stock request messages, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory. Material Stock Request Exceptions: You can review exception information for the material stock request messages. For more information about material stock request exceptions, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory. Purchasing Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply purchasing data. For more information about production messages, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing. Purchasing Exceptions: You can review exception information for the purchasing messages. For more information about purchasing exceptions, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing. Sales Order Messages: You can select and approve sales order data. For more information about production messages, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management. Sales Order Exceptions: You can review exception information for the sales order messages. For more information about sales order exceptions, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management. 7-2 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

273 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000) To transfer the data from the Planning server to the PeopleSoft database, you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process to populate each of the components used to review and (in some cases) apply the planning messages. You can also generate planning reports with your new data. PeopleSoft Production Planning can maintain up to two plans for each business unit at any time. These two plans include: One master run of a production plan. One simulation run of a production plan. As PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a new simulation or master plan for the same business unit group and brings it into the PeopleSoft transactional system, the old simulation or master plan data is deleted for the business unit. The Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process involves exporting the planning information out of the Planning server, getting the export information in a file where Process Scheduler can access it, and writing the information to the PeopleSoft transactional system for further processing. To facilitate this process, you can set up the Receive Planning Messages run control to automatically perform these steps. You can optionally perform each of the steps one at a time. Identifying Planning Message Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Receive Planning Messages page to identify the planning message file and approval options for the planning message run. RUN_PLS2000 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Receive Planning Messages, Receive Planning Messages Enter a Run Control ID. PLAN_EXPORT, PLS9001, PLS2000 Application Engine, SQR P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-3

274 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Receive Planning Messages - Receive Planning Messages page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button. Select the PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group Code for which you want to retrieve planning messages. Receive/Rpt (receive/report) Planning Messages To receive the planning messages, enter the File Name with the complete path for the location of the file that is created when exporting the planning information from the planning server. For example: c:\temp\v1_plan_ export_sql The file must be in a directory that can be accessed by the Process Scheduler, as this file is the input for the Receive Planning Messages SQR (PLS2000.SQR). The file name is controlled by the export version number specified on the Planning server page in this component and the Model ID name specified when creating the data model with the Production DataLink. In this example, the v1 is the version number and PLAN_ is the data model ID. These two values are concatenated with an underscore by the Planning engine when the file is created. When you use the automatic process to generate the export file and receive the data for the PeopleSoft transactional system, data for both planning messages and reports is contained within a single file. If you choose to manually export the planning information, you can export just message data or just report data. Two command files are provided with the Planning engine to set the export parameters for messages and reports. These command files are messages.command and reports.command. When manually exporting the message and report data from the same planning model, you must change the version number on the Planning Server page to prevent the files from having the same name and overwriting each other. If you re generating a planning report before you transfer planning messages to the PeopleSoft database, indicate the file name for receiving report data and select the Simulation Run check 7-4 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

275 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK box. When you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, PeopleSoft Production Planning verifies that the content of the export file matches the simulation run status specified here. If it doesn t match, the system will write a message to the SQR log file and continue processing. If you re receiving planning messages, PeopleSoft Production Planning performs an additional check to ensure that the planning messages being delivered are from the latest master run of the Production DataLink. If it isn t, PeopleSoft Production Planning stops processing the planning messages it is trying to transfer over from the Planning engine. If you receive the planning messages and report data simultaneously, you can t create report data from a simulation run, because simulation runs don t pass back message data. For more information on creating planning reports and generating simulation runs for report data, see Creating Planning Reports. Receive Messages Options Select one of the following Approval Options: Auto Approve All Auto Approve Within Horizon Manual Approve Select this option to automatically approve all messages brought over from the Planning engine. Select this option to automatically approve all messages brought over from the Planning engine based on the parameters you set in the other fields of this group box. Select this option if you want to manually approve all messages in their applicable components. If you select Auto Approve Within Horizon, the From Date, To Date, and Based on fields become available for entry. Enter the from date and to date for the horizon, and indicate whether the horizon is based on the Order End Date, Order Start Date, or Both the order start date and the order end date. Select the Receive Master Plan Items check box if you also want to receive planning messages for Master Plan items. Verifying Planning Server Settings Usage Use the Planning Server page to select the default server template for the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. You can also use this page to override your Planning server template defaults. This page enables you to automatically transfer the export files for messages and reports from the Planning server to your local server for further processing by Process Scheduler. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-5

276 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Process Name Process Type RUN_PLS10010 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Receive Planning Messages, Planning Server You must have previously defined at least one Planning server template using the Planning Server Definition page in the Define General Options menu. Optionally, you can also create your own Planning server template defaults by using the User Preferences - Planning page in the Define General Options menu. Enter a Run Control ID. PLAN_EXPORT, PLS9001, PLS2000 Application Engine, SQR Receive Planning Messages - Planning Server page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button. Planning Server Depending on how you entered the Receive Planning Messages component, one of the following will appear in the Planning Server Template Name field: If you entered the component by adding a new run control ID and your own Planning server defaults using the User Preferences - Planning page, your Planning server template will default into this field. If this is the case, the host and server information you defined for your Planning server template will default into the host and server fields on this page. If you entered the component by adding a new run control ID and you haven t defined your own Planning server defaults using the User Preferences - Planning page, the Planning server 7-6 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

277 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK template defined as the installation default on the Installation Options - Planning page will default into this field. If you entered the component by selecting an existing run control ID, you ll have to select a Planning server template from one of the available options. You use the Planning Server Definition page in the Define General Options menu to define one or more Planning server templates. Once you verify that the Planning server template is correct or you select a Planning server template, you can use the defaults that populate this page or you can override any of the defaults. Overriding the defaults impacts only the run control definition; it doesn t update the server template definition. If you want to change the Planning server definition default information for the Planning Server Definition, you ll need to change the Planning server definition itself. Verify or change the Host Name, Host User Name, Host Password, host Platform, Server Name, server User Name, Server Password, Timeout (seconds), Port, and Export Version. For more information about these fields, about changing Planning server definition defaults, or about adding a new Planning server definition, see PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management General Options. In the Write Export Files To field, indicate where the export files that were created by the Planning server reside. This is controlled by the configuration parameter EXPORT_PATH in the configuration file for the Planning server (rpsserver.ini for NT or.rps file for UNIX). The Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process looks for the export files on the Planning server you specify here. If it was specified when selecting the process job to run, this path name represents what the File Transfer process uses as the source path name for moving files. The file name and path on the Receive Planning Messages page is used as the destination path name for moving files. The path name must end with a forward slash (/) for UNIX, or a backslash (\) for Windows NT; otherwise, the file transfer won t take place. Click the Run button to access the Process Scheduler Request page. Select one or more of the following options to run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process using Process Scheduler: PLAN_EXPORT (PLAN_EXPORT) Receive Planning Messages (PLPPMSG) Select this check box to run the PLAN_EXPORT process. This process creates the file of the plan data to be exported. Select this check box to run a multi-step process job that includes the transfer of the planning message export file to the host (PLS9001) and the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-7

278 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Export (PLPPMSG1) Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) Transfer Export File (PLS9001) Select this check box to create the file to be exported (PLAN_EXPORT), transfer of the planning message export file to the host (PLS9001), and the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. Select this check box to only receive the planning messages. Select this check box to transfer the export file (PLS9001) to the host for the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. This is a multi-step process that runs the file transfer, then the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. If you have already moved the export files to a location that can be accessed by Process Scheduler (such as an NTFS file server), you might only need to run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process; the export files won t need to be moved. For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. Once you run this process, you can generate planning messages and, optionally, the plan report information to create a planning report. Once you generate these messages, you can review, approve, and apply them using pages in PeopleSoft Production Management, Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing. For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in PeopleSoft Production Management, see Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management. For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in PeopleSoft Inventory, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory. For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in PeopleSoft Purchasing, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing. 7-8 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

279 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about reviewing planning messages in PeopleSoft Order Management, see Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management. Using Unprocessed Messages From a Previous Plan When you run the Production DataLink, PeopleSoft Production Planning generates transfer order, purchase order, sales order, and production order messages that you can review and, in most cases, approve and apply to your PeopleSoft database. You can continue applying messages from a planning run until the next time the Production DataLink is run for your business unit. Once the Production DataLink process is run, you can t apply the messages generated from the last planning run. This prevents you from creating double supply orders. The lockout function gives you the visibility to know when planned orders and changes can t be processed. When processing planning messages, this function is system-enforced. There may be times when you make an error and pull data from the database too early. In these cases, you might want to go back and review, approve, and apply messages from the last Production DataLink run. To do this, you ll need to: Change the Lockout status using the Master Plan Data page. Review, approve, and apply any additional planning messages from the last Production DataLink run. Once you apply all of the planning messages from the last Production DataLink run, generate a new planning message run. You must do this to accurately reflect the messages that were processed. When you run the Production DataLink again, it sends data back to the Planning engine and automatically selects the Lockout check box on this page. If the Lockout check box is selected, it indicates that the previous Production DataLink planning data is now invalid. Using the Master Plan Data Page Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Master Plan Data page to view the last date and time a full regeneration Production DataLink process was run, the last date that a net change Production DataLink was run, and whether or not the planning information has been received back into the PeopleSoft transactional system. Use this page also to change the lockout status. PL_MASTER_PLAN Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Use, Master Plan Data Enter the business unit Group Code that corresponds to the specific planning messages you want to review. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-9

280 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Master Plan Data page This page displays the PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group code you selected, as well as the Date Time (date and time) and Net Change status of the last plan generated for the business unit group by the Production DataLink. The Processed check box indicates whether the Receive Planning Message (PLS2000) process was previously run against this plan. You can run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process against only a single production plan master run. Use the Lockout check box to indicate whether or not you can apply additional planning messages from the current production plan to your PeopleSoft database. If the Lockout check box isn t selected, the current production plan messages can be reviewed, approved, and applied, and a new Production DataLink process hasn t been initiated. You can continue to apply planning messages until you generate a new plan through the Production DataLink. If the Lockout check box is selected, a new Production DataLink process has already been initiated and new messages have been generated. In this case, you can clear the check box to run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. When you clear the check box, you can access any of the messages from the previous Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) run. You ll have to run the Production DataLink process again before reviewing new planning messages. The Process Status check box will be selected if the Production DataLink is running; typically, you shouldn t select or clear this check box. Creating Planning Reports A critical measure of an effective, enterprise-wide planning system is the ability to produce accurate and timely reports with a minimum of effort. PeopleSoft Production Planning provides you with the solution: standard supply chain planning reports with the flexibility to select and classify the information you need. Using the Planning Report, you can create your own report layout and information with over twenty rows of detailed options. Understanding Planning Report Options Using the Planning Report (PLS2001), you can include as much or as little information you need to make scheduling and forecasting decisions. With this functionality, you can: 7-10 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

281 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Create your own layout. You can standardize the look of your report or you can select different criteria every time you create a new report. You can also modify the report title and the row type names or labels. Generate supply and demand pegging detail. If you want to review the detailed information that represents your bucket totals, you can generate supply and demand pegging detail. This enables you to print row-by-row supply and demand detail for easier bucket reconciliation. Generate reports based on simulation or actual plan data. You have the option of analyzing what-if scenarios by generating reports based on the simulation plan. You can also generate reports based on actual plan data. In addition, each standard planning report includes the following sections: Report header: The header contains standard report information such as the report number, report name, description, page number, and report run date and time. The header appears for each item on the report. First page: The first page lists your selection criteria. Only the criteria you specified when setting up your report are printed. If you selected a criterion for sort sequence or subtotal purposes only, None will appear as the value of the selection criteria, followed by the sort sequence and subtotal. Item attributes: These detail the attributes of each item, such as an item description, configuration code (if one exists), balance on hand, and selling price. Row Types: The row types you specified to be included in the report appear for selected periods. If you decide to print a detailed report only, the planning report, including the row types, won t be printed. With each report, you can include these optional reporting features: Schedule Detail (supply pegging) and Actual Demand Detail (demand pegging). Subtotals for each of the specified selection criteria. Creating Your Own Layout The planning reports you generate using PeopleSoft Production Planning enable you to create your own report layout and content. You define the rows you want to include in the report as well as the sort order and row names. In addition, you can: Display up to 13 periods across a page, including those periods that are past due. If there are more than 13 periods, PeopleSoft Production Planning prints the next 13 periods below the first 13 periods if there is sufficient vertical space. If there isn t enough space, the next 13 periods print on the next page. Define the bucket size to use for reporting. You can use days, weeks, months, or a combination of all three. Including the past due and total columns, you can view up to a maximum of 54 columns. Daily buckets always occur before weeks in the planning horizon, and weeks occur before months. Weekly buckets run Sunday through Saturday. Monthly buckets are by calendar month. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the beginning date of the P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-11

282 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 bucket to identify a column. Specify if you want to print the Planning Report, the Supply and Demand pegging details, or both. Define your own report title. Specify the row types you want to appear in the body of the report. In addition, you can modify each row type name or label to meet your own reporting needs. You can also determine the sort sequence of the row type. Generating Supply and Demand Detail In addition to creating your own layout, you also have the option to review supply and demand pegging detail on all reports. This row-by-row detail enables you to reconcile your bucket totals. Supply Detail This table describes the detail supply sourcing information that PeopleSoft Production Planning provides with your detailed report: Column Due Date Order Number Order Quantity Order Type Order Status Reference Explanation Actual date the scheduled receipt is expected to be completed or received. Identifies the production ID, transfer order ID, purchase order, or planned transfer. In the case of planned production, this data field is blank. Quantity remaining open on the scheduled receipt. Indicates whether the planning data is identified as a purchase order (PURC), production order (PROD), or transfer order (XFER). For production IDs or production schedules: Planned, Entered, Firmed, Released, or In Process. For purchase orders: Planned or Open. For transfer orders: Planned or Open. For purchase orders: Vendor ID. For transfer orders: From business unit. Demand Detail This table describes the actual demand sourcing information that PeopleSoft Production Planning provides with your detailed report: Column Required Date Explanation Ship date or final assembly start date C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

283 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Column Order Number Quantity Type Status Reference Explanation Identifies the customer sales order ID, material stock request ID, production ID, production schedule, or transfer order ID. In the case of forecast, planned production, or planned transfer, this field is blank. Quantity open for customer order, transfer order, or production order. In the case of a forecast, this is the forecast quantity. Indicates whether the planning data is identified as a customer sales order (CUST), production order (PROD), transfer order (XFER), material stock request (MSR), or forecast (FCST). The order status of demand. For forecasts: Open. For production IDs or production schedules: Planned, Entered, Firmed, Released, or In Process. For sales orders: Open or In Process. For transfer orders: Planned, Open, Released, or In Transit. For material stock requests: Open or In Process. For forecasts: blank. For material stock requests: Customer ID, if one exists; otherwise, the customer name if available. For sales orders: Ship to customer ID. For production: End item ID. For transfer orders: Destination business unit. Understanding Simulation and Master Plan Reporting If you want to review planning data based on what-if scenarios, you can create a planning report based on the simulated plan. This option is available only if you don t enter a File Name in the Receive Planning Messages group box on the Receive Planning Messages page. When generating reports for a master plan, verify that the Simulation Plan check box is clear on the Production DataLink component. In this case, you can generate report data at the same time you re generating planning messages using the Receive Planning Messages component. For more information on generating planning messages, including the creation of simulation and master plans, see Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000). Generating the Planning Report (PLS2001) PeopleSoft Production Planning can maintain up to two plans for each business unit at any given time in the report tables. These two plans include: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-13

284 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 One simulation run of a production plan. One master run of a production plan. As PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a new simulation or master plan for the same business unit and imports it into the report tables, the old simulation or master plan is deleted for the respective business unit. Before You Begin The first step in generating a planning report is to process the exported file created at the end of the planning session. This process retrieves the planning data from the flat file created by the Export to RDBMS process and places it in the PeopleSoft database. Once you export the data, you need to retrieve the report data from the planning system. To do this, use the Receive Planning Messages component. Defining Selection Criteria Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Criteria page in the Planning Report component to define the selection criteria and sort sequence you want to use to create your report. You can create a planning report for a particular business unit, or you can create a very specific report based on defined selection criteria. RUN_PLS2001_SEL1 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Report, Criteria Enter a Run Control ID. PLS2001 SQR Report 7-14 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

285 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Planning Report - Criteria report page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit and Language. Select a PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group Code from the available options. This is required. If you select a group code and don t define additional selection criteria, PeopleSoft Production Planning will include planning information for the business unit group. If you want to create a report with more specific information, you can select from any of the optional selection criteria: Business Unit. Item ID. If the item is a configured item, specify the Config Code (configuration code). Planner Code. Family. Category ID. Source Code: Make and Buy, Make, or Buy. Primary Buyer: This field is available if you re using PeopleSoft Purchasing. If you don t specify an object within any of these criteria, PeopleSoft Production Planning includes all objects within the criteria for the report. This enables you to print subtotals for the criteria. For example, if you select a single item ID, you can t collect subtotal information for the criteria. If you leave the Item ID field blank, you can specify that you want to see a subtotal for all item IDs based on the defined selection criteria. Once you determine your selection criteria, you can determine the Sort Sequence for the optional criteria. For example, you might want the report with Planner Code as a primary sort and Source Code as a secondary sort. In this case, enter a lower number (such as 1) in the Sort P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-15

286 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Sequence field for Planner Code, and a higher number (such as 2) in the Sort Sequence field for Source Code. Select the Subtotal check box if you want to view a subtotal for the criteria. In order to print subtotals on your report, you must specify a sort sequence for that criterion. Defining Report Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Criteria2 page in the Planning Report component to specify a report date range, buckets, and print options. RUN_PLS2001_SEL2 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Report, Criteria2 Enter a Run Control ID. PLS2001 SQR Report Planning Report - Criteria2 report page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID and Language. Select a Vendor Set ID and a Vendor ID. These fields are available if you re using PeopleSoft Purchasing. Enter a Report Title. You can change the report title every time you generate a new report. Select one of the following Print Options: 7-16 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

287 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Horizontal Report Only Horizontal Report with Detail Supply and Demand Detail Print all the bucket information without row detail. Print all the bucket information with supply and demand detail. Print row-by-row information to view the detail that makes up your bucket totals. Bucket Size Define the bucket size for your report. If you don t specify reporting buckets, only past due information is printed. Although you can change it, the As Of Date edit box defaults to the last receive planning data run date. The Receive Planning Data Run field displays the date you ran the Production DataLink process for reports. The As Of Date must be equal to or later than the Receive Planning Data Run date. In addition, the As Of Date controls what gets included in the past due bucket. For your buckets, specify how many Days, Weeks, and Months you want to include in your report. You can also combine days, weeks, and months up to a maximum of 52 columns. Daily buckets always occur before weeks in the planning horizon, and weeks occur before month. Weekly buckets run Sunday through Saturday. Monthly buckets are by calendar month. Each column date is the beginning date of the bucket. For example, the following entries in the Days, Weeks, and Months edit boxes will create a report with the first 10 buckets as days, the next 12 as weeks, and the last 5 as months. Days: 10 Weeks: 12 Months: 5 Specifying Row Types Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Use the Row Types and Row Types2 pages in the Planning Report component to select the row types you want to appear in the body of the report. In addition, you can change any one of the row type names or labels that appear in the report. RUN_PLS2001_LBL1, RUN_PLS2001_LBL2 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Report, Row Types Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Report, Planning Report, Row Types2 Enter a Run Control ID. PLS2001 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-17

288 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Process Type SQR Report Planning Report - Row Types report page (1 of 2) Planning Report - Row Types2 report page (2 of 2) The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Language. The following row types are available and supported by PeopleSoft Production Planning, and they are defined using both these pages: Actual Forecast Actual Supply Actual planning periods for inventory. Scheduled receipts from either existing purchase orders, inventory transfer orders, or production orders. Actual Supply = Production Supply + Purchased Supply + Transfer Supply 7-18 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

289 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Actual Forecast Available to Promise (ATP) Actual planning periods for inventory. Determines the projected available inventory that hasn t been committed to customer orders. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following algorithm: ATP = Planned Receipts + Scheduled Receipts - Actual Demand - Carryover Demand Planned Receipts + Scheduled Receipts = Total Supply row type Total Orders row type + Dependent Demand row type = Actual Demand. Carryover demand occurs when ATP is driven below 0 in a time bucket. If this is the case, supply is consumed from an earlier time bucket. ATP is reported as a negative number in the first bucket if carryover demand isn t satisfied. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn t print ATP and cumulative ATP in the Past Due bucket since it doesn t apply. Cumulative ATP Customer Orders Days Supply Dependent Demand Excess Inventory Forecast Inter-unit Orders Net Forecast Cumulative or running total of ATP. Orders generated by customers. A forward-looking calculation of that period s Planned On Hand balance, which determines how many days into the future that period s Planned On Hand balance will cover the Total Demand. In the case where Planned On Hand isn t enough to cover some but not all of the Total Demand for a particular bucket, PeopleSoft Production Planning prorates the number of days by the ratio of the Planned On Hand available to the Total Demand. If there isn t enough Total Demand through the periods reported, the Days Supply bucket is blank. Demand that occurs when the item is required from higher-level production assemblies. The maximum amount of inventory that is allowable. The planned inventory on hand should never exceed this number. Expected demand based on sales history, leading indicators, promotions, and so on. Demand from transfer orders placed on the source business unit. Forecast quantity that was consumed by actual demand. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-19

290 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Actual Forecast New Planned Orders Planned On Hand Planned Production Planned Purchases Planned Transfers Production Supply Projected Inventory Turns Actual planning periods for inventory. The sum of Planned Production, Planned Purchases, and Planned Transfers. Prior period ending on hand + (Total Supply - Total Demand) Suggested production orders created by PeopleSoft Production Planning. Suggested purchase orders created by PeopleSoft Production Planning. Suggested transfer orders created by PeopleSoft Production Planning. The scheduled receipts from manufacturing in the form of production orders. How many times per year the inventory is turning based on quantity: [(Total Demand/Weighted Average Planned On Hand) x (365/total days in planning horizon)] This is quantity-based, rather than a traditional inventory turns calculation (which is dollar-based). Projected On Hand Prior period ending on hand + (Actual Supply - Total Demand) (This doesn t include new planned orders.) Purchased Supply Safety Stock Target Inventory Level The scheduled receipts from vendors in the form of purchase orders. The minimum quantity of stock planned to always be in inventory to protect against fluctuations in demand or supply. The average of: (Safety Stock + Excess Inventory). Total Demand Total Orders Total Supply Transfer Supply Defined as the sum of Net Forecast, Customer Orders, Interunit Orders, and Dependent Demand. This sum of Customer Orders and Interunit Orders. The sum of Actual Supply and New Planned Orders. The scheduled receipts from other business units in the form of transfer orders C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

291 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK To include a row in the report, select the Incl (include) check box next to the row name. If you want, you can change the Row Type name by entering the new name in the specified Row Type edit box. Once you define the rows you want to include in your report, you can optionally define the Sort sequence. For example, you might want Forecast as a primary sort and Total Orders as a secondary sort. In this case, enter a lower number (such as 1) in the Sort field for Forecast, and a higher number (such as 2) in the Sort field for Total Orders. If you leave any of the Sort edit boxes blank, PeopleSoft Production Planning prints the sort-sequenced row types first, followed by the unsorted row types in the default order they appear on these pages. Click Run to generate the Planning Report (PLS2001). For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. Using the Planning Messages Report (PLS4001) After you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can create a report to display a list of the messages brought over from the Planning engine. On the Planning Messages Report, you review the messages brought over based on your selection criteria. Defining Message Selection Criteria Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Planning Messages page to print a report of the planning messages brought over from Production Planning. PL_REVPL_MSG Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Messages, Planning Messages Enter a Run Control ID. PLS4001 SQR Report P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-21

292 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Messages - Planning Messages report page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Language, and Unit. Select the business Unit, Item, and Planner Code to narrow the messages displayed on the report. Message Selection Select the New Order check box to include messages on the report for new orders or the Existing Order check box to include messages for existing orders. You can select both check boxes, but you must select at least one. Report Options Select the Production check box to include production messages on the report, Transfers to include inventory transfer messages on the report, or Purchasing to include purchasing messages on the report. You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one. Status Unapproved Approved Processed Expedite Select this check box if you want to include messages that weren t approved in previous review sessions. Select this check box if you want to include messages that were previously approved but not processed. Select this check box if you want to include messages that were previously approved and processed. Select this check box if you want to include messages that are required before the planning time fence C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

293 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Tolerance Select this check box if you want to include messages with rescheduling tolerances applied to them. You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one. Message Type Reschedule Canceled Route Chg (change) Substitute Select this check box if you want to include messages for rescheduled items. Select this check box if you want to include messages for canceled items. Select this check box if you want to include messages for items with routing changes. Select this check box if you want to include messages for substitute items. You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one. Defining Production, Purchase Order, and Inventory Transfer Message Reporting Options Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer page to select the production, purchase order, and inventory message reporting options for the Planning Message report. PL_REVPL_MSG2 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Messages, Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer Enter a Run Control ID. PLS4001 SQR Report P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-23

294 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Messages - Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer (production, purchase order, and transfer order message selection) report page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID and Language. Production In the Order Status group box, select the Entered check box to include messages for entered orders on the report, Firmed to include firmed orders, Released to include released orders, and In Process to include orders in process. You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one. Select the Production Class you want to use, either Production ID, Production Schedule, or Both to include messages with that class on the report. Enter Production Start From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that date range. Transfers Enter a Dest Unit (destination business unit) to include only messages from that unit, and Dest Planner Cd (destination planner code) to include only messages from that destination planner. Enter Schedule Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that date range. Enter Schedule Arrival Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that date range. Purchasing Enter Purchase Start Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that date range. Click Run to generate the Planning Messages report (PLS4001) C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

295 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, Process Scheduler Basics. Displaying Planning Item Use Up Information PeopleSoft Production Planning provides you the ability to plan for end life of components and beginning of life for their replacement. When one component replaces another component, it is generally due to: engineering change, technical upgrades, and cost. The process for handling useup items includes: Determine the phase out date of the component. Use up the remaining stock of the old component before introducing the new component into production. Based on the effectivity date of the new component, plan for the purchasing of the new component, while continuing to use the old stock (manufacturing, transfer orders, sales orders) until such time as the old component is used up. Displaying Planning Use Up Information Usage Object Name Navigation Prerequisites Access Requirements Use this page to inquire about the item use up information that includes the quantity on hand at the time of the phase out and final available quantity. PL_USEUP_ITEMS Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Inquire, Planning Useup, Item Useup Have determined the phase out date. Enter a Business Unit and Item ID. Item Useup Inquiry page P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-25

296 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, and Item ID. Select a Business Unit and enter an Item ID. At the top of the page, the system displays the following: Phase Out Date Projected Use Up Date QOH at Use Up Qty Avail This date indicates when use up logic should go into effect for the original component. After the phase out date, supplies will be used but not replenished for the original component. Any required new supply is generated for the substitute item after this date. The phase out date field is the future status date for items identified to be discontinued. The future status and status date are defined at the item attributes by Business Unit level. This is the projected date that the use of the component will start tapering off without any activity. PeopleSoft Production Planning populates this field. This is the projected quantity on hand at the time of the projected use up date. The quantity on hand may or may not approach zero. PeopleSoft Production Planning populates this field. This is the current quantity available from the inventory system. The system retrieves the following information in the grid: Item ID (Parent Item where the item being queried is used). Short Desc (Short description of the parent item) Sub Item (Substitute Item) Short Desc (Short description of the substitute item) Priority (the item substitution priority) Qty Avail (quantity available for the substitute item) Generating the Planning Use Up Report Usage Object Name Navigation Use the page to generate an item use up report. PL_USEUP_RPT Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Useup Report, Item Useup Report 7-26 C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

297 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Prerequisites Access Requirements Have determined a phase out date. Select a Run Control ID. Item Useup Report page The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button. Report Request Parameters Select a business Unit from the list. You can select all items (All) or a range of items (Range). Click this button to access a page that allows you to select a range of items. To generate a report, enter a Run Control ID and click the Run button. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL C OMMITTING THE P RODUCTION P LAN 7-27

298

299 C HAPTER 8 Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management Once demand has been translated into planned production, PeopleSoft Production Planning creates planned production and rescheduling recommendations for PeopleSoft Production Management for execution. Within PeopleSoft Production Management, planned production can be automatically converted into production IDs and production schedules. In addition, PeopleSoft Production Planning s solvers review existing production information from PeopleSoft Production Management, recommending cancellations to existing orders and rescheduling of existing production at both the operation and production levels. Overview of the Production Messages Review and Application Process After you use PeopleSoft Production Planning s planning engine to optimize your production plan, you will want to transfer new and existing production information from Production Planning to PeopleSoft Production Management. PeopleSoft Production Planning s functionality enables you to transfer production plan information back and forth between Production Planning and PeopleSoft Production Management. PeopleSoft Manufacturing and Distribution data moves into PeopleSoft Production Planning to create a plan. The plan is fed back to Manufacturing and Distribution in the form of messages. Once PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a Master and/or Material plan, you can transfer the plan back to PeopleSoft Production Management using the Receive Planning Messages P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-1

300 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 component. Once the data is in PeopleSoft Production Management, you can review these recommendations using the Review Planning Messages component. The steps to process recommendations and apply them to your production management system are: Review and approve the planning messages. Apply the approved messages to your production data in PeopleSoft Production Management. Before You Begin Before you begin reviewing and applying production messages, you must: Generate your Production Plan. For more information about generating the Production Plan, see Generating the Production Plan and Setting Up the Production DataLink. Receive the production messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. For more information about receiving planning messages, see Committing the Production Plan. Reviewing Production Messages Before you apply the recommended changes from the Planning engine for your production data in PeopleSoft Production Management, you ll need to review the production messages and indicate which recommendations are approved for processing. Use the Production Messages component to review and approved the planning recommendations. Selecting Production Messages for Review Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Message Search page in the Production Messages component to define the selection criteria for the production messages you want to review. PL_PRODUCTION_SRCH Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages, Message Search Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages, Message Search Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Messages, Message Search 8-2 P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

301 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production Messages - Message Search page You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selection any of the following: Enter a Business Unit (required field) or Item ID. You can also select a Planner Code. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses planner codes to provide access to information more efficiently. Planner codes are used to filter information in most pages and processes in PeopleSoft Production Planning. Message Selection You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the New Order or Existing Order check boxes, or both. Order Status You can limit the messages displayed by selecting the Entered, Firmed, Released, In Process, or Cancel check boxes. For more information about production statuses, see PeopleSoft Production Management PeopleBook, Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules. Production Class You can select Production ID, Production Schedule, or Both, to narrow the list of production messages to those of that class. Once you review and approve the production messages for production IDs and production schedules, you can automatically apply them using the Apply Production Messages page. Production Start Dates You can select the production start range for the messages displayed by entering From and To dates to limit the messages displayed to that date range. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-3

302 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Status Finally, you can select a status for messages you want to review; the default is to review unapproved messages only. You can select one or more of the following: Unapproved Processed Approved Reschedule w/in Tolerance (reschedule within tolerance) Select this check box if you want to view messages that weren t approved in previous review sessions. Select this check box if you want to view messages that were previously approved and processed. In this case, these messages and the production data have been updated with PeopleSoft Production Planning s recommended changes. Select this check box if you want to view messages that were previously approved but not processed. Select this check box if you want to apply rescheduling tolerances to the messages you review. If you select this option, the system filters out any messages that fall within the schedule in and out tolerances defined for the items selected. The Reschedule In Factor sets the tolerance for recommendations to move an order to an earlier date. The Reschedule Out Factor sets the tolerance for recommendations to move an order to a later date. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these factors to automatically approve reschedule recommendations. The message is approved as long as the number of days rescheduled falls within the tolerance factor. As a result, review and approval of these messages aren t necessary. For example, if you set both factors to 5 and your production date is 12/10, PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically approves any order between the reschedule in date of 12/5 and reschedule out date of 12/15 without going to the appropriate review page. This only applies if the change is a reschedule. Expedite Accepted Cutoff Flag Select this check box if you want to review messages that are required before the planning time fence. Select this check box if you want to review messages that have been previously accepted. Select this check box if you want to review messages for items that have messages beyond the planning message fence defined for the item. After you make your entries, click the Search button to display the messages. 8-4 P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

303 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Reviewing the Production Message Summary After you select the production messages, you review them for approval. The details are broken down into three pages: Production Details Details Configuration Code Reviewing the Production Message Summary Production Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Message Summary: Production Details page in the Production Messages component to view the production details for the production messages you want to approve. PL_PROD_MSG_SUM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages, Message Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages, Message Summary Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Messages, Message Summary Enter the Business Unit and whether you want a new and/or existing orders. Production Messages - Message Summary: Production Details page At the top of the page, the business Unit is displayed. You can also select one of the following Production Status codes for the business unit: Entered, Firmed, or Released. For more information about production statuses, see PeopleSoft Production Management PeopleBook, Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-5

304 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Click this button (Set Status) to reset the status of all unprocessed planned production displayed; unapproved messages are changed to a status of Approved, and the status of new planned orders changes to the status you select. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Approved check box and Item ID are common to all the tabs. Production Details tab The system displays the production details of the messages for your approval based on the entries you made on the previous page. The Item ID, Description, Start Date, Production ID, Total Qty (total quantity), and PL Status (planning status) values display for each message. Also displayed is one of the following Production Status codes, which you can change by selecting another. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Details tab Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Viewing the Details tab The system displays the details of the messages for your approval based on the entries you made on the previous page. The Item ID and a notification of whether the item has been Processed display for each message. Also displayed are whether the item has a New Order or a Route Chg (route change), or a Reschedule, Canceled, or Substitute status. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. 8-6 P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

305 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab The system displays the Configuration Code information of the messages for your approval based on the entries you made on the previous page. The Item ID and Config Code (configuration code) display for each message. Click this button (Set Status) to reset the status of all unprocessed planned production displayed; unapproved messages are changed to a status of Approved, and the status of new planned orders changes to the status you select. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Reviewing Production and Operations Detail Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Production Messages - Production Detail page to display production detail for each recommendation. PL_PROD_MSG_SUM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages, Production Detail Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages, Production Detail Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Messages, Production Detail Enter the Business Unit and indicate whether you want new and/or existing orders. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-7

306 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Production Messages - Production Detail page At the top of the page, the Item, Production ID, Prdn Type (production type), PL Status (planning status), production Area, Prdn DueDt (production due date), and Due Shift values appear. If the item has been approved, the Approved check box is selected. For each item, the Curr Item (current item), Short Desc (short description), Original Item, Short Desc (short description), Production ID, and Per (quantity per assembly) also appear. Click this button (Approved by Auditor) to display the Production Details page. For more information about the Production Details page, see Viewing Additional Production Details. Click this button (Details) to display the Operation Detail page. For more information about the Operation Detail page, see Viewing Operation Details. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Viewing Additional Production Details Usage Object Name Use the Production Details page to display additional production details. PL_SF_HDR_DETAIL1 8-8 P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

307 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Navigation Access Requirements Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Messages, Production Detail Click the Approved by Auditor button on the Production Messages - Production Detail page. Production Details page The Production ID, Total Qty (total quantity), and Production Status fields appear at the top of the page. The Plan Start date, Start Date, Processed, PL Status (planning status), Plan Due date, Due Date, Plan Routing, Routing, Plan BOM, and BOM fields also appear. At the bottom of the page, the Approved, New Order, Route Chg (route change), Canceled, Reschedule, Substitute, and Frozen Substitutes check boxes appear. Viewing Operation Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Operation Detail page to display the details for a production message. PL_SF_HDR_DETAIL1 Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Messages, Production Detail Click the Details button on the Production Messages - Production Detail page. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-9

308 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Operation Detail page The Op Seq (operation sequence), Plan Start, Start Date, Work Center, Task Code, Plan Due, Due Date, and Frozen Code fields appear at the top of the page, along with the Reschedule check box. Resources The Resource Type, Crew/Machine/Tool, Description, and Qty Used (quantity used) fields also appear. Reviewing Production Exceptions When you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, PeopleSoft Production Planning generates exception messages. These exception messages are generated because a change in the production data occurred since the Production DataLink was run, or a violation of a business rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date. The production exception messages are broken down into three pages: Exception Details Dates/Quantity Configuration Code Reviewing Production Exception Details Usage Use the Exception Details page in the Production Exceptions component to view the exception details for production messages. Object Name PL_PROD_EXCEPTION 8-10 P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

309 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Navigation Access Requirements Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning Exceptions Enter the Business Unit and indicate whether you want a new and/or existing order. Production Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Prdn ID (production ID) and Item ID are common to all the tabs. Exception Details tab The system displays the exception details found for the business unit, including Prdn ID (production ID), Item, Description, and exception Message. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-11

310 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Dates/Qty (dates/quantity) tab Viewing the Dates/Qty tab The system displays the date and quantity information of the exceptions found for the business unit, including Prdn ID (production ID), Item, Start Date, Start Time, Due Date, Due Time, and Total Qty (total quantity). Production Exception Configuration Codes tab Viewing Configuration Code tab The system displays the configuration code details found for the business unit, including Prdn ID (production ID), Item, and Config Code (configuration code). Applying Production Messages Once you ve reviewed and approved the planning recommendations, you are ready to apply the production messages to your production data. When applying the planning messages, PeopleSoft Production Management will: Apply any changes to existing production, including rescheduling production, operation rescheduling, and alternate routing changes for production in the Firm status. In addition, production frozen by PeopleSoft Production Planning is automatically applied to production within PeopleSoft Production Management. Cancel any existing production IDs and production schedules recommended for cancellation by PeopleSoft Production Planning P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

311 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Applying Production Messages Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Apply Production Messages page to process the production messages you have approved. SF_PRDN_PLN_REQ Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Apply Production Messages Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Apply Production Messages Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Apply Planning Messages Enter the Run Control ID. SFPAPLNS COBOL, SQL Apply Production Messages page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Schedule. Enter a Request ID and choose the business Unit. Process Frequency Choose one of the following for this request: P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT 8-13

312 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Once Always Don t Run Executes the request the next time this process is scheduled to run. Once the process runs, the process frequency is automatically set to Don t Run. Executes the request every time the process is scheduled to run. Ignores the request when the process is scheduled to run. Planner Code Selection Select All or a Single planner code. If you select Single, enter the Planner Code; only those items belonging to that planner will be processed. Production Selection You can apply messages for production IDs, production schedules, or both by selecting the Process Production IDs and Process Production Schedules check boxes accordingly. Production Message Options Select the appropriate check box to specify whether you want to: Convert Planned Production Apply Production Changes Convert planned production into production IDs and production schedules. Apply production change messages to existing production IDs and production schedules. Click the Run button to apply the planning messages using Process Scheduler P ROCESSING P LANNING M ESSAGES IN P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

313 C HAPTER 9 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory Once the recommendations have come back from PeopleSoft Production Planning and have been received into the system using Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000), you can review, analyze, and apply inventory transfer messages for PeopleSoft Inventory. Overview of the Inventory Messages Review and Application Process PeopleSoft Inventory includes an interface to manage fulfillment of, or changes to, interunit transfer orders from PeopleSoft Production Planning. Managing the information from PeopleSoft Production Planning is a two-phase process; information about changes can be reviewed and analyzed using the Inventory Messages component. Then, the messages you approve are acted on by the Apply Inventory Messages component. PeopleSoft Production Planning analyzes PeopleSoft Inventory supply and demand by reading directly from inventory tables. It then sends interunit transfer messages back to PeopleSoft Inventory through an interface table. If a message can t be processed, it s marked as an exception and viewed in the Inventory Exceptions component. Each time the Apply Planning Messages process runs, it attempts to process all approved messages for the business unit regardless of error codes. Before You Begin Before you begin reviewing and applying inventory messages, you must: Generate your Production Plan. For more information about generating the Production Plan, see Generating the Production Plan and Setting Up the Production DataLink. Receive the inventory messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-1

314 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about receiving planning messages, see Committing the Production Plan. Reviewing Inventory Transfer Messages Before you apply recommended changes from the Planning engine, you ll need to review the inventory transfer messages and select those recommendations you want to apply. Selecting Inventory Transfer Messages for Review Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Messages Search page in the Inventory Messages component to define the selection criteria for the planning inventory transfer messages you want to review. DEM_CHG_SRC_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Search Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Search Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning Messages, Messages Search Inventory Messages - Messages Search page You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following: the inventory Business Unit (required field), Dest Unit (destination business unit), and Item. You can also enter a Planner Code to limit the messages to those for that planner, and a Destination Planner Code to limit to those for the item at the destination business unit. 9-2 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

315 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Schedule Date To limit the messages retrieved to orders in a specific date range, you can enter a From date and To date. Only messages related to orders with scheduled ship dates falling within those dates are retrieved. Schedule Arrival Date To limit the messages retrieved to orders with a scheduled arrival date within a specific date range, you can enter a From date and To date. Priority To limit the messages retrieved to orders within a specific priority range, enter a From priority and To priority. Message Type You can select one or more of the following check boxes to limit the messages displayed: New Reschedule Reprioritize Canceled Select this check box if you want to view messages directing PeopleSoft Inventory to create new material stock requests. Select this check box if you want to view messages recommending rescheduling material stock requests. Select this check box if you want to view messages reprioritized by the Planning engine by a solver. Select this check box if you want to view messages suggesting cancellations to material stock requests. Status To limit the messages to those with a specific status, you can select one or more of the following check boxes: Unapproved Approved Expedite Accepted Rescheduled w/in Tolerance (rescheduled within tolerance) Select this check box if you want to view messages not previously approved in prior review sessions. Select this check box if you want to view messages previously approved but not processed. Select this check box if you want to view messages required before the planning time fence. Select this check box if you want to view messages that have been previously accepted. Select this check box if you want to apply planning rescheduling tolerances to messages you review. If you select this option, the system will filter out any messages that fall within the schedule in and out tolerances defined for the items selected. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-3

316 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Processed Cutoff Select this check box if you want to view messages that were previously approved and processed. In this case, these messages and the production data has been updated with PeopleSoft Production Planning s recommended changes. Select this check box if you want to view messages for items that have messages beyond the planning message fence defined for them. The default setting is to review unapproved messages only. After you make your selections, click the Search button to display the messages. Reviewing the Inventory Transfer Message Summary Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Messages Summary: Message Details page in the Inventory Messages component to review the message detail information for inventory transfer messages. DEM_CHG_SUM_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Summary Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning Messages, Messages Summary Enter a Business Unit 9-4 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

317 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Inventory Messages - Messages Summary: Message Detail page At the top of the page, the Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination business unit), Planner Code, Destination Planner Code, and Item ID appear. Also displayed are the Schedule Date, Arrival Date, Priority, Status, and Message Type group boxes. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Approved check box and message Type are common to all the tabs. Message Detail tab For each item message, the message Type, Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination business unit), Source, Msg ID(message ID), PL Status (planning status), Frozen, Sched Date (schedule date), and Priority columns appear. You can display the details for the item by clicking the Details button to display the Message Detail page. For more information about the Details button, see Displaying Message Details. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-5

318 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Item Information tab Viewing the Item Information tab At the top of the page, the Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination unit), Planner Code, Destination Planner Code, and Item ID appear. Also displayed are the Schedule Date, Arrival Date, Priority, Status, and Message Type group boxes. For each message, the Type, Sched Arrv (scheduled arrival), Item, Description, and Qty Base (quantity base) appear. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Displaying Message Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Message Detail page to view details for a specific inventory message line. DEM_CHG_MSD_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory Messages, Messages Summary Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning Messages, Messages Summary Enter Control ID, then click the Details button for a message on the Inventory Messages - Messages Summary: Message Detail page. 9-6 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

319 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Message Detail page The Msg ID (message ID), Status, Msg Type(message type), and Source appear for the inventory message. In the Order Details group box, the Unit, Destination Unit, Order No (order number), Order Line, Sch Line (schedule line), Demand Line, Priority, Item, Planner Cd (planner code), Dest Planner Cd (destination planner code), Ship Via, Sched Date (schedule date), Sched Arrv (scheduled arrival), and Qty Base (quantity base) appear for the item. Click the Return button to go back to the Messages Summary - Message Detail page. Applying Inventory Transfer Messages Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Process Name Process Type Use the Apply Inventory Messages page to process the inventory messages you have approved. This process applies the messages so PeopleSoft Inventory can act on the suggestions made by the Planning engine. DEM_CHG_REQ_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Apply Inventory Messages, Apply Planning Messages Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Apply Inventory Messages, Apply Planning Messages Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Process, Apply Planning Messages Enter Control ID. INPAPLAN COBOL, SQL P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-7

320 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Apply Inventory Messages page The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, Process Monitor, and Schedule. Process Frequency Select one of the following options for the request: Once Always Don t Run Executes the request the next time this process is scheduled to run. Once the process runs, the process frequency is automatically set to Don t Run. Executes the request every time the process is scheduled to run. Ignores the request when the process is scheduled to run. Enter a Request ID and Description and choose the business Unit and Destination Unit. Planner Code For the Source and Destination planner codes, select All or a Single planner code. If you select Single, enter the Planner Code in the field provided; only those items belonging to that planner will be processed. Item Selection Select All or a Single item. If you select Single, enter the Item in the field provided; only those items will be processed. Click the Run button to apply the planning messages using Process Scheduler. 9-8 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

321 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Reviewing Inventory Exceptions When you apply the inventory messages and the system finds data errors, exception messages are generated. These exception messages might have been generated because a change in the production data occurred since the Production DataLink was run, or because a violation of a business rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date. Reviewing Inventory Planning Exceptions Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Review Planning Exception: Planning Exceptions page in the Inventory Exceptions component to view the exception details for production messages. DEM_CHG_EXD_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory Exceptions, Review Planning Exception Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory Exceptions, Review Planning Exception Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning Exceptions Enter an inventory business unit. Inventory Exceptions - Review Planning Exception: Planning Exceptions page The inventory business Unit appears. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Msg ID (message ID) is common to all the tabs. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-9

322 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Planning Exceptions tab For each line, the system displays the Msg ID (message ID), message Type, Status, Source, Dest Unit (destination business unit), and Item. Click the Details link to view more information about the message on the Exception Detail page. For more information about the Details link, see Viewing Inventory Exception Details. Exception Details tab Viewing the Exception Details tab For each line the system displays the Msg ID (message ID), Description, Order No (order number), Order Line, Sched Date (schedule date), Priority, Sch Line (schedule line), and Demand Ln (demand line). Viewing Inventory Exception Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Exception Detail page to display the details for an inventory exception message. DEM_CHG_EXD_INV Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory Exceptions, Review Planning Exception, Planning Exceptions Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory Exceptions, Review Planning Exception, Planning Exceptions Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning Exceptions Click the Details link on the Inventory Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Planning Exceptions page P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

323 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Exception Detail page The inventory business Unit, Destination Unit, Order No (order number), Order Line, Sch Line (schedule line), Demand Line, Item code and description, Source, Planner Cd (planner code), Dest Planner Cd (destination planner code), Ship Via, Sched Date (schedule date), Schedule Arrv (scheduled arrival), Qty Base (quantity base), and Priority appear. Click the OK button to return to the Inventory Exceptions - Planning Exceptions page. Reviewing Material Stock Request Messages Before you can reserve inventory to fulfill an order from any source, you must approve it. To approve any of the material stock requests recommended by PeopleSoft Production Planning, you select and review the material stock request messages. Selecting Material Stock Request Messages Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Messages Search page in the External MSR Messages component to define the selection criteria for the material stock request messages you want to review. PL_SO_INMSG_SRCH Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External MSR Messages, Messages Search Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR Messages, Messages Search Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date Changes, Message Search P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-11

324 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 External MSR Messages - Messages Search page You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following: The inventory business Unit (a required field), Order No (order number), Customer ID, or Item ID. Schedule Date To limit the messages retrieved to orders in a specific date range, you can enter a From date and To date. Only messages related to orders with scheduled ship dates falling within those dates are retrieved. After you make your selections, click the Search button to display the messages. Reviewing the Material Stock Message Summary MSR Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Messages Summary: MSR Details page in the External MSR Messages component to review the details of the material stock request messages. PL_SO_INMSG_SUM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External MSR Messages, Messages Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR Messages, Messages Summary Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date Changes, Message Summary Enter a Business Unit P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

325 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK External MSR Messages - Messages Summary: MSR Details page At the top of the page, the business Unit and number of Rows appear. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Order No (Order Number), Line number and Schedule number are common to all the tabs. MSR Details tab For each item message, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand line number), IN Sched DT/TM (inventory schedule date/time), PL Sched DT/TM (planning schedule date/time), Customer ID, and Qty Requested (quantity requested) appear. Item/Config Code tab Viewing the Item/Config Code tab At the top of the page, the business Unit and number of Rows appear. For each message, the Order Number, Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand line number), Item, Description, and Config Code (configuration code) appear. Reviewing Material Stock Request Exceptions After you review the material stock request messages, there might be exception messages that were generated. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-13

326 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Viewing Material Stock Request Exception Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Exception Details page in the External MSR Exceptions component to view inventory planning message exceptions. PL_SO_EXCEP_IN Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External MSR Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date Errors, Review Planning Exceptions Enter the Business Unit External MSR Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page The business Unit appears at the top of the page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Order No (order number), Line number and Schedule number are common to all the tabs. Exception Details tab For each exception, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand line number), Message, IN Scheduled Date/Time (inventory schedule date/time), PL Scheduled Date/Time (planning schedule date/time), and Item appear P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

327 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab For each exception, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand line number), and Configuration Code appear. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT I NVENTORY 9-15

328

329 C HAPTER 10 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing Once you ve run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can review the recommendations made by the Planning engine in the form of purchasing messages. Overview of the Purchasing Planning Messages Review and Application Process Both Peoplesoft Production Management and PeopleSoft Production Planning write their requested purchase orders to a staging area that is scanned by the background process POStage. POStage writes the inputs to a temporary staging area called PO Staging tables in preparation for sourcing to a purchase order. When PeopleSoft Production Planning has made an adjustment to an existing purchase order, or has suggested that a purchase order be created, a message is loaded into PeopleSoft Purchasing. You review and approve these messages in much the same way that you handle production messages. After you approve the purchasing messages, they are applied in PeopleSoft Purchasing by loading them into purchase order staging tables. If new purchase orders need to be created, they are built using the purchase order build process. Changes can be made from approved change order requests using the change order process. Before You Begin Before you begin reviewing and applying purchasing messages, you must: Generate your Production Plan. For more information about generating the Production Plan, see Generating the Production Plan and Setting Up the Production DataLink. Receive the purchasing messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING 10-1

330 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 For more information about receiving planning messages, see Committing the Production Plan. Reviewing Purchasing Messages Before you apply the recommended changes from the Planning engine for your purchase orders, you might need to review the purchasing messages and indicate which recommendations are approved for further processing. Use the Purchasing Messages component to review and approved the planning recommendations. Selecting Purchasing Messages for Review Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Message Search page in the Purchasing Messages component to define the selection criteria for the purchasing messages you want to view. PL_PO_MSG_SRCH Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing Messages, Messages Search Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing Messages, Messages Search Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review Planning Messages, Message Search Purchasing Messages - Message Search page You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following: Inventory Unit (required field), Item ID, or Buyer Name P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

331 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK You can also select a Planner Code to access information more efficiently. Planner codes are used to filter information in most pages and processes in PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can select the start range by entering From and To dates to limit the messages displayed to that date range. Msg Selection (message selection) You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the New Order or the Existing Order check box, or both. You must select at least one check box here. Message Type You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the Reschedule or the Canceled check box. Status You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the Unapproved or the Approved check box, or both. You must select at least one check box here. Unapproved Approved Select this check box if you want to view messages that weren t approved in previous review sessions. Select this check box if you want to view messages that were previously approved but not processed. In addition, you can select one or more of the following: Processed Select this check box if you want to view messages that were previously approved and processed. In this case, these messages and the purchasing data have been updated with PeopleSoft Production Planning s recommended changes. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING 10-3

332 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reschedule w/in Tolerance (reschedule within tolerance) Select this check box if you want to apply rescheduling tolerances to the messages you review. If you select this option, the system filters out any messages that fall within the schedule in and out tolerances defined for the items selected. The Reschedule In Factor sets the tolerance for recommendations to move an order to an earlier date. The Reschedule Out Factor sets the tolerance for recommendations to move an order to a later date. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these factors to automatically approve reschedule recommendations. The message is approved as long as the number of days rescheduled falls within the tolerance factor. As a result, review and approval of these messages isn t necessary. For example, if you set both factors to 5 and your production date is 12/10, PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically approves any order between the reschedule in date of 12/5 and reschedule out date of 12/15 without going to the appropriate review page. This applies only if the change is a reschedule. Expedite Accepted Cutoff Flag Select this check box if you want to review messages that are required before the planning time fence. Select this check box if you want to review messages that have been previously accepted. Select this check box if you want to review messages for items that have messages beyond the planning message fence defined for the item. After you make your entries, click the Search button to display the messages. Reviewing the Purchasing Message Summary: PO Details Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Message Summary: PO Details page in the Purchasing Messages component to review purchase order details of the purchasing messages for approval. PL_PO_MSG_SUM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing Messages, Messages Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing Messages, Messages Summary Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review Planning Messages, Message Summary 10-4 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

333 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Access Requirements Enter a Business Unit and whether to view new and/or existing orders. Purchasing Messages - Message Summary: PO Details page At the top of the page, the Business Unit and number of Rows appear. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Approved check box and PO type are common to all the tabs. PO Details tab For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number) Item ID, Description, Rel Date (release date), and Due Date appear. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING 10-5

334 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Qty/Status Details tab Viewing the Qty/Status Details tab For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number), Plan d Qty (planned quantity), Std UOM (standard unit of measure), Frozen status, and PL Status (planning status) appear. Also displayed are Ovr Vendor (override vendor), Reschedule, Canceled, and Processed check boxes. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed. Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number), and Config Code (configuration code) appear. To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line. Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

335 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved. Reviewing Purchasing Exceptions When you run the Receive Planning Messages page in the Run PO process, PeopleSoft Purchasing generates exception messages. These exception messages are generated because a change in the purchasing data occurred since the PO process was run, or because a violation of a business rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date. Information about the purchasing exception messages is provided in three pages: Exception Details PO Dates Configuration Code Reviewing Purchasing Exception Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Exception Details page in the PO Exceptions component to view the purchasing message exceptions. PL_PROD_EXCEPTION Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing Exceptions, PO Exceptions Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing Exceptions, PO Exceptions Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review Planning Exceptions, PO Exceptions Enter a Business Unit. Purchasing Exceptions - PO Exceptions: Exception Details page P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING 10-7

336 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Item number, Description, PO type, Line number and Sched Num (schedule number) are common to all tabs. Exception Details tab The system displays the exception details found for the business unit, including Item, Description, PO number (purchase order number), Line number, Sched Num (schedule number), and exception Message. PO Dates tab Viewing the PO Dates tab The system displays the date and quantity information of the exceptions found for the business unit, including Item, Description, PO number (purchase order number), Line, Sched Num (schedule number), Release Date, and Delivery Due Date from PO (delivery due date from purchase order). Configuration Code Viewing the Configuration Code tab The system displays the configuration code details found for the business unit, including Item, Description, PO (purchase order), Line, Sched Num (schedule number), and Config Code (configuration code). Applying Purchase Messages After you have reviewed and approved the purchasing messages, the data is applied as follows: 10-8 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

337 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK The PO Stage Load process (PO_POSTAGE) in PeopleSoft Purchasing looks for purchase order and change order requests. Purchase order requests are loaded onto the purchase order stage tables. Change order requests are loaded onto the change request stage tables. The rows for purchase order requests on the purchase order stage tables are converted into purchase orders by the PO Calculations process (PO_POCALC) and the Create Purchase Orders (PO_POCREATE) process. The rows for change order requests on the change request stage tables are converted into change orders by the Change Purchase Order process (PO_POCHNG). For more information about the PO Stage Load process, see PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook, Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing. For more information about the PO Calculations process, see PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook, Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing. For more information about the Create Purchase Orders process, see PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook, Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing. For more information about the Change Purchase Order process, see PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook, Creating Change Orders P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT P URCHASING 10-9

338

339 C HAPTER 11 Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management Once you ve run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can review the recommendations made by the Planning engine. When demand outpaces supply, it might become necessary for the planning solvers to make scheduling changes to a customer order while making a feasible plan. In addition, the Planner might have manually made changes to the customer orders within the planning model. Overview of the Order Management Planning Messages Review Process Using the inquiry pages in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can review these rescheduled shipment dates. Additionally, you can view the date change exceptions based on the customer calendar or changes in the transaction system. The sales order message pages are used for inquiry only; you must use the features in PeopleSoft Order Management to make any changes. Before You Begin Before you begin reviewing and applying sales order messages, you must: Generate your Production Plan. For more information about generating the Production Plan, see Generating the Production Plan and Setting Up the Production DataLink. Receive the sales order messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. For more information about receiving planning messages, Committing the Production Plan. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT 11-1

340 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Reviewing Sales Order Messages During the Receive Planning Message process, the system compares the exported sales order from PeopleSoft Production Planning with the actual sales orders in PeopleSoft Order Management. Based on material and capacity constraints, PeopleSoft Production Planning will suggest rescheduling ship dates for orders that can t be shipped on the customer-requested ship date or the promise date. You can direct rescheduling of demand by establishing demand priorities and lateness tolerance rules. For more information about demand prioritization, see Setting Up Production Planning. For more information about lateness tolerance rules, see Setting Up Production Planning. You can select and review the Sales Order Messages component. Selecting Sales Order Messages for Review Usage Object Name Navigation Use the Message Search page in the Sales Order Messages component to define the selection criteria for the sales order messages you want to review. PL_SO_OMMSG_SRCH Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order Messages, Message Search Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order Messages, Message Search Sales Order Messages - Message Search page 11-2 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

341 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following: Select the OM Unit (Order Management business unit) for the sales order messages you want to review. This is a required field. Select the Order Number, Ship From business unit, and Ship To Customer to limit the messages to orders with those parameters. You can also enter a Product ID. Schedule Date You can enter a From date and To date to narrow your search. After you have made your selections, click the Search button to view the data. Reviewing the Sales Order Message Summary After you select the sales messages, you review them for approval. The details are provided on three pages: Sales Order Details Customer/Product ID Configuration Code Reviewing Message Summary: Sales Order Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Message Summary: Sales Order Details page in the Sales Order Messages component to review sales order details of the sales order messages for approval. PL_SO_OMMSG_SUM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order Messages, Message Summary Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order Messages, Message Summary Enter an Order Management Business Unit. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT 11-3

342 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Sales Order Messages - Message Summary: Sales Order Details page For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, OM Sched DT/TM (Order Management scheduled date/time), PL Sched DT/TM (Planning scheduled date/time), Schedule Status, and Qty Sched (quantity scheduled) appear. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. Common Page Information The Ship From, Order No (order number), Line number, and Schedule number are common to all tabs. Customer/Product ID tab Viewing the Customer/Product ID tab For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Ship To Customer, Product ID, and Req Ship (requested ship) appear. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab 11-4 P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

343 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, and Config Code (configuration code) appear. Reviewing Sales Order Exceptions The Planning engine generates exception messages when the rescheduled shipment date of a sales order is invalid based on the shipment exception calendar defined at the inventory business unit and customer levels. Additionally, net change conditions (when, for example, a sales order is modified after being extracted into the planning model) also appear as exceptions. Reviewing the Sales Order Exception Details Usage Object Name Navigation Access Requirements Use the Exception Details page in the Sales Order Exceptions component to review information about exceptions for your sales orders. PL_SO_EXCEP_OM Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions Enter an Order Management Business Unit. Sales Order Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page The Order Management business Unit appears at the top of the page. Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We document fields common to all views first. P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT 11-5

344 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Common Page Information The Ship From, Order No (order number) Line number, and Schedule number are common to all tabs. Exception Details tab For each line the system displays the Ship From business unit, Order No (order number), Line number, Schedule number, a brief Message, OM Scheduled Date/Time (Order Management scheduled date/time), and PL Scheduled Date/Time (Planning scheduled date/time), and Product ID. Configuration Code tab Viewing the Configuration Code tab For each line the system displays the Ship From business unit, Order No (order number), Line number, Schedule number, and Configuration Code P ROCESSING P LANNING R ECOMMENDATIONS IN P EOPLES OFT O RDER M ANAGEMENT P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

345 C HAPTER 12 PeopleSoft Production Planning Report Descriptions PeopleSoft applications offer a wide range of query and reporting possibilities. In addition to the standard reports that we deliver, we also provide reporting tools that you can use to create new reports from scratch. In this chapter, we provide you with a list of reports provided with PeopleSoft Production Planning. For more information about the reporting tools used to generate reports using PeopleSoft applications, see PeopleTools 8.12 Introduction to PeopleSoft Reporting PeopleBook, PeopleSoft Reporting Tools. PeopleSoft Production Planning Standard Reports The following is a list of the reports provided with PeopleSoft Production Planning: Report ID Report Name Report Description Report Type PLS3000 Planning Data Inconsistency Report Lists items to be planned and validates items currently planned. Can identify planned components with invalid routing sequence numbers, manufactured items with no routing in the routing table, item/production areas with no valid routing, routings with no item/production area, routings with no planning times, items with routings with no default production areas. Also verifies if Master Plan items only have master and material components, or only have material components. SQR P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING R EPORT D ESCRIPTIONS 12-1

346 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Report ID Report Name Report Description Report Type PLS2001 PLS4001 PLS4002 Planning Report Planning Messages Report Item Use-up Report Lists all the information for business unit, and can include as much or as little information needed to make scheduling and forecasting decisions. Can create custom layouts, generate supply and demand pegging detail, and generate reports based on simulation or actual plan data. Lists messages brought over from the Planning engine as recommendations for PeopleSoft Production Management, PeopleSoft Inventory, PeopleSoft Purchasing, and PeopleSoft Order Management. Can include new or existing orders; production, transfer, or purchasing messages; unapproved, approved, processed, expedited, or tolerance messages; and rescheduled, cancelled, routing change, and substitute types. Further parameters that can be selected include order status, production class, production start and end dates, destination business unit, destination planner code, schedule date, schedule arrival date, and purchase start date. Lists all discontinued items with the projected use-up dates. For each item, lists short description, substitute item priority, and quantity available. SQR SQR SQR Standard Financial Reports For more information about standard financial reports, see PeopleSoft Setting Up Your Manufacturing System PeopleBook, PeopleSoft Manufacturing Report Descriptions P EOPLES OFT P RODUCTION P LANNING R EPORT D ESCRIPTIONS P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

347 Index A active Roll Forward phase 2-18 Actual Supply row type 5-9 Add Production button 5-21 Add Production page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-9 Add Production page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-22 Add Purchase button 5-21 Add Purchases page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-24 Add Row Type button 5-13 Add Transfer button 5-21 Add Transfers page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-25 Advanced Filters page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions component 5-39 advantages of PeopleSoft Production Planning 1-4 aggregate capacity using constraints 5-60 violations 5-59 Aggregate Capacity Violations Configuration Code page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-17 Aggregate Capacity Violations Details page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-17 Aggregate Capacity Violations Item ID page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-17 Aggregate Capacity Violations page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-15 Aggregate Capacity Violations Resource page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-16 Aggregate Items page 2-10 aggregate items, maintaining 2-10 aggregate resources, using 2-10 Apply button 5-27 Apply Inventory Messages page 9-7 Apply Production Messages page 8-13 attributes defining planning 2-21 setting up for production planning 2-10 B back-loaded forecast 3-38 Balancing page - Line Schedule Editor component 2-58 balancing resource defaults, setting up 2-58 bar colors defining 2-60 setting up filters 2-62 Bar Colors Filters page - Line Schedule Editor - Filters component 2-62 Bar Colors page - Line Schedule Editor component 2-60 Bar Item Filters page - Line Schedule Editor - Filters component 2-61 bar item filters, setting up 2-61 bar split duration, setting 2-51 BI (buildable inventory) shortages using constraints 5-56 violations 5-55 BOM (bill of material), description 2-8 business process for Production Planning 1-5 business units, setting up 2-2 buttons Add Production 5-21 Add Purchase 5-21 Add Row Type 5-13 Add Transfer 5-21 Apply 5-27 Change Server Settings 5-11 Remove Row Type 5-13 Return 5-27 Search 5-32 Sourcing Template Load 2-31 Update Production Options 2-31 Update Purchasing Options 2-31 Update Transfer Options 2-31 View Outputs 5-27 Workbench Link 5-40 C canceled forecast quantities 5-63 capacity feasibility 3-15 capacity fence 3-6, 3-31 capacity load start date and time, description 5-61 capacity model 1-13 capacity plan analyzing 6-12 maintaining 6-1 managing 6-1 prerequisites 6-1 reviewing summary 6-12 using 6-4 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 1

348 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 using the Planning Scorecard 6-14 Capacity Plan Summary - Capacity Summary page 6-12 capacity planning process, overview 6-1 Capacity Summary page 6-4 carrying cost rate 3-32 cell over maximum, setting 2-51 Change Row Types page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-12 Change Server Settings button 5-11 changeover families 2-49 changeover penalties, defining 2-9 color schemes, Line Schedule Editor 2-49 Color Settings page - Line Schedule Editor - General component 2-53 command file data, setting up 3-55 Command Files page - Production DataLink component 3-55 commit plan process overview 7-1 Common page - Production DataLink - Solvers component 3-42 Compress utility 3-6 concatenation codes, defining 2-2 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Detail component 5-36 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-43 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-61 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory) Shortages component 5-57 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Excess Stock component 5-55 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates component 5-53 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Request Dates component 5-49 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages component 5-59 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Demand component 5-20 Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Supply component 5-18 configured items, defining concatenation codes 2-2 constraint violations, descriptions 5-46 constraints 1-11 converting costs 3-29 co-products, description 5-28 cost conversion 3-29 Criteria report page - Planning Report component 7-14 Criteria2 report page - Planning Report component 7-16 currency code 3-29 current time 3-6 Customer Orders row type 5-9 D data verification process, using 2-63 Date/Customer page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates component 5-51 Date/Customer page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Request Dates component 5-47 Dates/Task Name page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Demand component 5-20 Dates/Vendor/Task Name page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Supply component 5-17 delayed forecast quantities 5-63 demand defining for DataLink 3-36 prioritizing 2-22 setting options 3-36 sourcing 2-27 demand and supply data input example 1-4 demand for consumption, exploding 3-39 demand options, setting for Production DataLink 3-36 Demand page - Production DataLink - Demand/Supply component 3-36 demand priorities defining rules 2-24 setting up families 2-6 demand sources for creating prioritization rules 2-25 Dependent Demand row type 5-9 detail resources, using 2-10 Details page - Material or Master Plan Detail component 5-33 Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-61 Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory) Shortages component 5-57 Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages component 5-59 Dimensions page - Line Schedule Editor - General component 2-52 dynamic data 3-2 E early fence 3-31 end fence 3-30 end-of-time 3-6 I NDEX 2 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

349 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Exception Details page 9-10 Exception Details page - External MSR Exceptions component 9-14 Exception Details page - PO Exceptions component 10-7 Exception Details page - Production Exceptions component 8-10 Exception Details page - Sales Order Exceptions component 11-5 Exception Specific Details page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-42 exceptions reviewing Inventory 9-9 reviewing Inventory Planning 9-9 reviewing material stock request 9-13 reviewing Production 8-10 reviewing Production details 8-10 reviewing Purchasing 10-7 reviewing Purchasing details 10-7 reviewing sales order 11-5 reviewing sales order details 11-5 viewing inventory details 9-10 viewing material stock request details 9-14 Exceptions page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-40 Excess Inventory row type 5-9 excess stock using constraints 5-54 violations 5-54 Expand utility 3-6 exploding demand for consumption 3-39 External MSR Exceptions component - Exception Details page 9-14 External MSR Messages component - Messages Search page 9-11 External MSR Messages component - Messages Summary - MSR Details page 9-12 F Feasibility Solver page - Production DataLink - Solvers component 3-47 Feasible Planning page - Generate Plan component 4-8 Feasible Planning Solver 3-12, 3-47 allocating resources 3-17 allowing alternate routings 3-49 allowing item substitution 3-49 allowing material reallocation 3-48 allowing rescheduling of tasks 3-48 checking effectivities 3-20 computing lateness tolerance 3-18 computing weighted priorities 3-18 defining DataLink options 3-47 description 3-4 determining weighted priorities 3-17 ensuring positive on-hand quantity 3-14 ignoring safety stock 3-48 making a plan capacity-feasible 3-48 overview 3-12 planning for capacity feasibility 3-15 proportionally allocating resources 3-17 reducing excess inventory 3-15 reducing lead time 3-14 rescheduling tasks 3-48 satisfying unmet demand 3-13 sourcing allocations 3-14 using the Lateness Phase 3-19 using the Stock Adjustment Phase 3-19 verifying demand priority for frozen tasks 3-13 verifying supply and demand quantities 3-13 filled forecast quantities 5-63 filtered scorecard score 5-45 filtering Planning Scorecard data 5-66 filters defaults, defining 2-61 financial reports 12-2 firm production fence 3-34 forecast consumption 3-38 forecast demand priority 2-25 forecast fulfillment 3-23 using constraints 5-62 violations 5-62 forecast fulfillment fence 3-38 Forecast Items page 2-5 forecast items, defining 2-5 Forecast Percentages page 2-11 forecast product data, defining 2-6 Forecast Products page 2-6 front-loaded forecast 3-38 Frozen Details page - Production DataLink - General component 3-33 frozen fence offsets, setting 3-33 G Gantt charts 3-10 General Filters page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard component 5-66 general options, defining 2-1 General page - Line Schedule Editor - General component 2-50 General page - Production DataLink - General component 3-27 generating production plans, prerequisites 4-2 generating the Planning Report (PLS2001) defining selection criteria 7-14 prerequisites 7-14 global collaboration 1-19 Global Preferences page - Generate Plan component 4-3 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 3

350 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 H histogram period of supply 3-41 I Independent Demand row type 5-9 in-memory plans 1-10 installation options, PeopleSoft Production Planning 2-1 integrated material model 1-13 interactive-planning approach 1-11 inter-unit transfer demand priority 2-25 inventory attributes, defining 2-3 inventory consumption 1-14 Inventory exceptions reviewing 9-9 viewing details 9-10 Inventory Message component - Message Search page 9-2 Inventory Message component - Message Summary - Message Detail page 9-4 Inventory message details displaying 9-6 inventory options, establishing 2-3 Inventory Planning component - Planning Exceptions page 9-9 inventory supply 1-14 Inventory transfer messages applying 9-7 reviewing 9-2 reviewing summary details 9-4 selecting for review 9-2 item attributes by unit, defining 2-4 item changeover families, setting up 2-49 Item Changeover Family page 2-49 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Safety Stock component 5-50 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-61 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory) Shortages component 5-55 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Excess Stock component 5-54 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment component 5-62 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates component 5-53 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Request Dates component 5-49 Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages component 5-57 Item Planning Inquiry page 2-41 item substitution 3-22 Item Use-up Report (PLS4002) 12-2 Iterative Repair page - Production DataLink - Solvers component 3-52 Iterative Repair Solver 3-5, 3-24 defining run time 3-54 processing features 3-25 selecting optimization templates 3-54 setting up 3-52 using iterations 3-53 L late beyond tolerance, description 2-24 late fence 3-6, 3-31 Late Supplies Inquiry 3-11 late within tolerance, description 2-24 lateness tolerance computing formulas 3-18 processing conditions 2-24 Lateness Tolerance Rules page 2-26 lateness tolerances defining 2-26 overview 2-23 level fence 3-31 Line Schedule Color page 2-49 Line Schedule Editor defining bar colors defaults 2-60 defining color settings 2-53 defining defaults 2-48 defining dimensions 2-52 defining filter defaults 2-61 defining general settings 2-50 defining time periods 2-55 establishing color schemes 2-49 setting up time period for detailed LSE 2-55 using with solvers 3-11 viewing the Line Schedule Editor chart 2-62 Line Schedule Editor, setting up aggregate time period 2-56 bar color filters 2-62 bar item filters 2-61 resource balances 2-58 resource entry defaults 2-57 Linear Programming (LP) Solver 3-4, 3-20, 3-50 canceling firm-planned orders 3-24 controlling the LP model 3-20 defining DataLink options 3-50 defining plan periods 3-52, 4-14 enforcing constraints 3-21 fulfilling forecasts 3-23 minimizing inventory without excess stock constraints 3-24 modeling co- and by-products 3-23 modifying LP parameters 3-52 post processing 3-20, 4-13 processing alternate BOMs and routings 3-23 querying variable capacity over time 3-23 rescheduling firm-planned orders 3-24 I NDEX 4 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

351 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK setting the carrying cost rate 3-52, 4-14 setting the late shipment penalty 3-52, 4-14 sourcing partial orders 3-24 substituting items 3-22 using multiple effectivities with production options 3-23 using objective functions 3-22 using supply and demand transfers 3-24 using-up components 3-22 low-level codes 3-46 LP (linear programming) Solver 3-4, See also Linear Programming (LP) Solver LP Planning page - Generate Plan component 4-12 LP Solver page - Production DataLink - Solvers component 3-50 LSE See Line Schedule Editor M manufacturing objectives 1-8 manufacturing options, defining 2-8 master plan analyzing 5-31 changing row types 5-12 changing servers 5-11 creating with the Datalink 3-25 defining advanced filters for exceptions 5-39 defining workbench parameters 5-5 generating 4-1 generation process 4-1 implementing 5-3 maintaining 5-5 maintaining planned orders 5-20 maintaining scheduled receipts 5-13 managing 5-1 overview 5-1 prerequisites 4-2 reporting 7-13 reviewing exceptions 5-36 reviewing the summary 5-32 showing demand 5-18 showing supply 5-15 using the summary 5-7 viewing plan details 5-33 Master Plan Data page 7-9 Master Plan Data page, (defining) 2-12 Master Plan Detail page 5-33 Master Plan Summary page 5-7 Master Plan Workbench page 5-5 master-planning data items, defining data 2-12 material feasible planning options 3-44 material model 1-13 material plan analyzing 5-31 changing row types 5-12 changing servers 5-11 creating with the Datalink 3-25 defining advanced filters for exceptions 5-39 defining workbench parameters 5-5 generating 4-1 generation process 4-1 implementing 5-4 maintaining 5-5 maintaining planned orders 5-20 maintaining scheduled receipts 5-13 managing 5-1 overview 5-1 prerequisites 4-2 reviewing exceptions 5-36 reviewing the summary 5-32 showing demand 5-18 showing supply 5-15 using the summary 5-7 viewing plan details 5-33 Material Plan Detail page 5-33 Material Plan Summary page 5-7 Material Plan Workbench page 5-5 Material Planning page - Generate Plan component 4-5 Material Planning page - Production DataLink - Solvers component 3-44 Material Planning Solver 3-4, 3-11, 3-44 calculating low-level codes 3-46 consolidating planned purchase orders 3-45 ignoring safety stock 3-46 including capacity in the plan 3-46 overview 3-11 using fixed periods of supply 3-46 using the net-change mode 3-12 using the regenerative mode 3-12 material reallocation 3-48 material requirements planning 1-2. See also MRP material stock request demand priority 2-25 material stock request exception details 9-14 material stock request messages reviewing 9-11 reviewing details 9-12 reviewing exceptions 9-13 selecting 9-11 maximum deviation, description 5-55 maximum rows to retrieve, using 5-34 Message Details page 9-6 Message Search page - External MSR Messages component 9-11 Message Search page - Inventory Messages component 9-2 Message Search page - Production Message component 8-2 Message Search page - Purchasing Message component 10-2 Message Search page - Sales Order Messages component 11-2 Message Summary - Message Details page - Inventory Messages component 9-4 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 5

352 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 Message Summary - MSR Details page - External MSR Messages component 9-12 Message Summary - PO Details page - Purchasing Messages component 10-4 Message Summary - Production Details page - Production Messages component 8-5 Message Summary - Sales Order Details page - Sales Order Messages component 11-3 messages overview process prerequisites for Inventory 9-1 prerequisites for Order Management 11-1 prerequisites for Production Management 8-2 prerequisites for Purchasing 10-1 Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer report page - Planning Message component 7-23 model ID, creating 3-28 Modify Resources to Repair option 3-11 MRP approaches to planning 1-2 MRP II process flow example 1-3 N New Planned Orders row type 5-9 O objective function 3-20, 3-22 Operation Detail page 8-9 optimization template options 3-54 Optimizer See Iterative Repair Solver Optimizer/Iterative Repair 3-5, See also Iterative Repair Solver Optimizer/Iterative Repair Solver 3-24 order management options establishing 2-3 using 2-6 order modifiers, enforcing 3-31 Order/Operation Details page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-41 P partial-order sourcing 3-24 pegged chains advantages 3-8 description 3-7 example 3-7 reviewing relationships 3-10 top-level demand 3-8 Pegging Gantt charts 3-10 penalties, changeover 2-9 penalty factor, description 2-15 PeopleSoft Inventory message application overview of process 9-1 prerequisites 9-1 PeopleSoft Inventory message review overview of process 9-1 prerequisites 9-1 PeopleSoft Inventory, processing Planning recommendations 9-1 PeopleSoft Order Management message review overview of process 11-1 prerequisites 11-1 PeopleSoft Order Management, processing Planning recommendations 11-1 PeopleSoft Production Management message application overview of process 8-1 prerequisites 8-2 PeopleSoft Production Management message review overview of process 8-1 prerequisites 8-2 PeopleSoft Production Management, processing Planning recommendations 8-1 PeopleSoft Production Planning advantages 1-4 analyzing the supply chain model 1-20 collaborating 1-18 consuming inventory 1-14 establishing supply and demand 1-19 integrating material and capacity models 1-13 linking to the enterprise 1-14 maintaining plan data 1-22 managing business processes 1-5 managing capacity plans 6-1. See also capacity plan managing master plans 5-1. See also master plan managing material plans 5-1. See also material plan managing shop floors 1-8 moving and balancing the supply chain 1-8 overview 1-1 planning for resources 1-3 reports 12-1 resolving plan constraints 1-17 reviewing plan details 5-33 reviewing plan exceptions 5-36 setting up 2-1 solving factory-specific plans 1-9 supplying inventory 1-14 understanding data flow 1-5 using interactive planning 1-11 using material- and master-planning inquiries 5-2 using plan summaries 5-7 using planning stages 1-5 using production plans 1-10 using reports 1-22 using resources 1-14 using seamless integration 1-6 using the capacity-planning process 1-5 using the master-planning process 1-5 using the material-planning process 1-5 I NDEX 6 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

353 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK using the Planning Scorecard 5-43 using the Production DataLink 1-16 using the system of record 1-15 using workbenches 5-5 working with constraints 1-11 PeopleSoft Production Planning reports Item Use-up 12-2 Planning 12-2 Planning Data Inconsistency 12-1 Planning Messages 12-2 standard financial reports 12-2 PeopleSoft Production Planning, use creating reports 7-10 defining general options 2-1 defining manufacturing data 2-8 defining planning attributes 2-10 generating plans 4-1 setting up business units 2-2 setting up the DataLink 3-1 PeopleSoft Purchasing message review overview of process 10-1 prerequisites 10-1 PeopleSoft Purchasing, processing Planning recommendations 10-1 period duration settings 5-8, 5-33 period duration, using with detailed resources 6-5 period of supply 3-41 Periods of Supply row type 5-10 plan currency 3-29 plan details, reviewing 5-33 plan exceptions, reviewing 5-36 plan generation creating a feasible plans 4-8 creating material-feasible plans 4-5 defining global preferences 4-3 generating plans using the LP Solver 4-12 overview 4-1 selecting a solver 3-42 plan summaries, using 5-7 Plan Summary page - Material or Master Plan Summary 5-32 plan types master plan 3-29 setting up for DataLink 3-26 simulation plan 3-29 Planned On Hand row type 5-10 planned orders before planning time fence display 5-38 Planned Orders page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-20 Planned Production row type 5-10 Planned Purchase (maintenance) page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-29 Planned Purchases row type 5-10 Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment component 5-63 Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Safety Stock component 5-51 Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates component 5-66 planning attributes defining 2-21 defining forecast items 2-5 defining forecast product data 2-6 defining inventory 2-3 defining item attributes by units 2-4 defining Manufacturing data 2-8 defining manufacturing options 2-8 defining master-planning data 2-12 defining order management options 2-6 defining product forecast percentages 2-11 defining promise and request dates 2-14 defining purchasing 2-7 defining resource changeover penalties 2-9 defining resources 2-9 defining Roll Forward phases 2-15 defining transfer 2-4 defining work centers 2-22 maintaining aggregate items 2-10 setting up demand priority families 2-6 setting up roll forward parameters 2-16 setting up Roll Forward phases 2-18 setting up stocking periods 2-6 using aggregate resources 2-10 using detail resources 2-10 Planning Attributes page 2-21 planning constraints 1-11 Planning Data Inconsistency Report 12-1 Planning Data Inconsistency Report page 2-63 Planning Data Inconsistency Report, generating 2-63 Planning Data InconsistencyReport (PLS3000) 12-1 Planning Exceptions page - Inventory Exceptions component 9-9 Planning message options, identifying 7-3 Planning Message Report page defining inventory transfer message options 7-23 defining production message options 7-23 defining purchase order message options 7-23 Planning Message Report page - Planning Message component 7-21 Planning messages application overview of Inventory process 9-1 overview of Production Management process 8-1 Planning Messages component - Message Prdn/PO/Transfer report page 7-23 Planning Messages component - Planning Messages report page 7-21 Planning Messages Report (PLS4001) 7-21, 12-2 Planning messages review overview of Inventory process 9-1 overview of Order Management process 11-1 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 7

354 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 overview of Production Management process 8-1 overview of Purchasing process 10-1 Planning messages, receiving 7-3 planning model 1-5 planning periods display, setting 5-33 Planning recommendations processing in PeopleSoft Inventory 9-1 processing in PeopleSoft Order Management 11-1 processing in PeopleSoft Production Management 8-1 processing in PeopleSoft Purchasing 10-1 Planning report defining report options 7-16 generating 7-13 specifying row types 7-17 Planning Report (PLS2001) 12-2 Planning Report component - Criteria report page 7-14 Planning Report component - Criteria2 report page 7-16 Planning Report component - Row Types report page 7-17 Planning reports creating layouts 7-11 generating supply and demand detail 7-12 understanding simulation and master plan reporting 7-13 Planning reports options 7-10 Planning Scorecard filtering data 5-66 implementing 5-44 overview 5-43 using 5-43 Planning Scorecard page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-14 Planning Scorecard page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard component 5-44 Planning Scorecard, reviewing aggregate capacity violations 5-59 buildable inventory (BI) violations 5-55 excess stock violations 5-54 forecast fulfillment violations 5-62 promise date violations 5-51 raw material (RM) violations 5-57 request date violations 5-47 safety-stock violations 5-50 transfer shipment date violations 5-64 Planning Server page - Production DataLink component 3-58 Planning Server page - Receive Planning Messages component 7-5 Planning server settings, verifying 3-58, 7-5 Planning server template 3-59 PLS2000, Receive Planning Messages 7-3 PLS2001, generating 7-13 PLS3000, Planning Inconsistency Report 2-63 PLS4001 Planning Message Report 7-21 PLS5000, Sourcing Template generation 2-38 PO Exceptions component - Exception Details page 10-7 post processing, LP Solver 3-20 previous master plan 3-30 previous plan, using unprocessed messages 7-9 primary items, description 5-28 priority rank 2-25 priority rules 2-23 defining demand sources 2-25 ranking priority 2-25 Priority Rules page 2-24 product forecast percentages, setting 2-11 production viewing details 6-10 viewing outputs 6-11 Production DataLink 1-16 components 3-1 connecting Planning servers 3-58 controlling data 3-2 including demand and supply 3-36 model data 3-3 process overview 3-1 setting up 3-1 solvers 3-3 Production Demand row type 5-10 Production Detail page - Production Messages component 8-7 Production Details page 8-8 Production exception details, reviewing 8-10 Production Exceptions component - Exception Details page 8-10 Production Message component - Message Search page 8-2 Production message summary reviewing 8-5 reviewing details 8-5 reviewing production and operations details 8-7 Production messages applying 8-12, 8-13 reviewing 8-2 reviewing exceptions 8-10 selecting for review 8-2 viewing details 8-8 Production Messages component - Message Summary - Production Details page 8-5 Production Messages component - Production Detail page 8-7 Production Options page - Sourcing Inquiry component 2-44 Production Orders (maintenance) page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-26 Production Orders page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-10 production plan committing 7-1 creating reports 7-10 production plan constraints, resolving 1-17 I NDEX 8 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

355 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Production Planning run options, setting 3-42 Production Supply row type 5-10 Projected On Hand row type 5-10 promise dates defining 2-14 using constraints 5-52 violations 5-51 Promise/Request Dates page 2-14 proportional allocation by unit or time 3-17 purchase fence 3-30, 3-34 Purchase Options page - Sourcing Inquiry component 2-46 Purchase Supply row type 5-10 purchasing attributes, defining 2-7 Purchasing messages applying 10-8 reviewing 10-2 reviewing exception details 10-7 reviewing exceptions 10-7 reviewing PO details 10-4 selecting for review 10-2 Purchasing Messages component - Message Search page 10-2 Purchasing Messages component - Message Summary - PO Details page 10-4 purchasing options, establishing 2-3 Q quotation demand priority 2-25 R rate type 3-29 raw material (RM) violations 5-57 Receive Planning Messages component - Planning Server page 7-5 Receive Planning Messages component - Receiving Planning Messages page 7-3 Receive Planning Messages page - Receive Planning Messages component 7-3 receiving and shipping calendars, description 5-31 recycle by-products, description 5-28 regenerate sourcing templates 3-31 relative lateness 3-18 released production fence 3-34 Remove Row Type button 5-13 reports 1-22 Item Use-up 12-2 Planning 12-2 Planning Data Inconsistency 12-1 Planning Messages 12-2 standard financial 12-2 request dates defining 2-14 using constraints 5-48 violations 5-47 reschedule early limit days, description 2-30 resolving production plan constraints 1-17 resource allocation at start or finish of bucket 3-17 resource attributes, defining 2-9 resource changeover penalties, defining 2-9 Resource Load - Configuration Code page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-9 Resource Load - Item/Qty page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-8 Resource Load - Operation Details page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-6, 6-8 resource load, viewing 6-6 Resource page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-59 resource planning 1-3 Resource Workbench page 6-2 Resource Workbench, defining search parameters 6-2 Resources page - Line Schedule Editor component 2-57 resources, description 2-8 retrieving rows of data, description 5-34 Return button, 5-27 RM (raw material) shortages using constraints 5-58 violations 5-57 roll forward defining details 3-34 setting up for DataLink 3-26 Roll Forward Phase page 2-18 Roll Forward phases defining 2-15 setting up 2-18 Roll Forward utility defining parameters 2-16 defining phases 2-15 scheduling example 2-16 selecting supply and demand tasks 2-18 setting up planning attributes 2-16 setting up targets 2-20 tasks available for reschedule 2-19 using time fences 2-19 round component demand 3-41 routings, description 2-8 Row Type report page - Planning Report component 7-17 row types changing 5-12 descriptions 5-9 summaries 5-8 using 5-13 run types defining the net-change type 3-29 defining the regenerative type 3-28 setting up for DataLink 3-26 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 9

356 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK J ANUARY 2001 S safety stock using constraints 5-50 violations 5-50 Safety Stock row type 5-10 safety-stock demand priority 2-25 sales order demand priority 2-25 sales order exceptions reviewing 11-5 reviewing details 11-5 Sales Order Exceptions component - Exception Details page 11-5 sales order messages reviewing 11-2 reviewing summary 11-3 reviewing summary details 11-3 selecting for review 11-2 Sales Order Messages component - Message Search page 11-2 Sales Order messages component - Message Summary - Sales Order Details page 11-3 Scheduled Production row type 5-10 Scheduled Purchases row type 5-10 scheduled receipts before current time display 5-38 Scheduled Receipts page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-13 Scheduled Receipts row type 5-10 Scheduled Transfers row type 5-11 seamless integration 1-6 Search button 5-32 search depth 3-32 Selection Criteria page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions component 5-37 server configuration settings 5-11 Server Configuration Settings page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-11 shipment task fence 3-34 shipping and receiving calendars, description 5-31 solvers descriptions 3-4 example 3-9 Feasible Planning 3-4 Feasible Planning Solver overview 3-12 improving plan quality 3-19 Iterative Repair Solver overview 3-24 Iterative Repair/Optimizer 3-5 LP (Linear Programming) Solver overview 3-20 Material Planning 3-4 Material Planning Solver overview 3-11 net-change mode 3-12 pegged-chain processing 3-7 processing sourcing templates 2-28, 2-30 processing steps 3-8 regenerative mode 3-12 running 4-3 selecting for plan generation 3-42 setting DataLink run options 3-42 using time fences 3-5 using with the Production DataLink 3-3 source file data, setting up 3-55 Sourcing Details page 2-29 sourcing inquiry selection criteria, defining 2-41 sourcing options loading 2-34 using production options 2-27 using purchase options 2-28 using transfer options 2-27 verifying 2-41 Sourcing Template Inquiry page 2-42 Sourcing Template Load button 2-31 sourcing template, viewing details 2-42 sourcing templates defining 2-29 generating 2-38 generation options 2-28 maintaining manually 2-30 overview 2-27 processing data using solvers 2-28 rescheduling early limit days 2-30 search depth 2-30 setting up 2-28 viewing production option details 2-44 viewing purchase option details 2-46 viewing transfer option details 2-47 Sourcing Templates page 2-38 spreadsheets 3-10 stages of planning 1-5 start fence 3-30 start of time 3-5 Starting On Hand row type 5-11 start-of-time purge 3-31 stocking periods, setting up 2-6 substitute item options 3-41 supply defining for DataLink 3-40 setting options 3-40 supply and demand data input example 1-4 supply and demand planning 1-19 supply chain analyzing 1-20 balancing 1-8 moving 1-8 planning for material requirements 1-2 planning for resources 1-2 Supply Chain Viewer 1-21 supply options, setting for DataLink 3-40 Supply page - Production DataLink - Demand/Supply component 3-40 system of record 1-15 T Target Inventory Level row type 5-11 I NDEX 10 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL

357 J ANUARY 2001 P EOPLES OFT PRODUCTION P LANNING P EOPLEB OOK Task page - Material or Master Plan Detail component 5-36 task property sheets 3-10 task, description 1-10 teardowns, description 5-28 time fences setting 3-27 setting up for DataLink 3-26 time fences used by solvers 3-5 time period for detailed LSE, setting up 2-55 Time Periods (aggregate) page - Line Schedule Editor - General component 2-56 Time Periods (detail) page - Line Schedule Editor - General component 2-55 top-level demand 3-8 Total Demand row type 5-11 Total Forecast row type 5-11 Total Orders row type 5-11 total scorecard count 5-45 total scorecard score 5-45 Total Supply row type 5-11 traditional material requirements planning vs. PeopleSoft Production Planning advanced planning 1-8 traditional material requirements planning, description 1-2 transfer attributes, defining 2-4 transfer demand fence 3-34 transfer demand priority 2-25 Transfer Demand row type 5-11 Transfer Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates component 5-64 transfer option, description 5-26 Transfer Options page - Sourcing Inquiry component 2-47 Transfer Orders (maintenance) page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-30 transfer shipment dates using constraints 5-64 violations 5-64 transfer supply fence 3-34 Transfer Supply row type 5-11 Transfer Task page - Material or Master Plan Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates component 5-65 Type/Item page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Demand component 5-18 Type/Item page - Material or Master Plan Summary - Show Supply component 5-15 U Unfulfilled Demand Inquiry 3-11 unprocessed messages 7-9 Update Production Options button 2-31 Update Purchasing Options button 2-31 Update Transfer Options button 2-31 user options, establishing 2-1 V View Outputs button 5-27 View Outputs page - Capacity Plan Summary component 6-11 View Outputs page - Material or Master Plan Summary component 5-27 W waste by-products, description 5-28 Web-based planning 1-7 weighted priority computation 3-18 WIP (work in progress) details, defining 3-34 WIP/Roll Forward Details page - Production DataLink - General component 3-34 Work Center Attributes page 2-22 work center attributes, defining 2-22 work center, description 2-8 Workbench Link button 5-40 workbenches, using 5-5 P EOPLES OFT P ROPRIETARY AND C ONFIDENTIAL I NDEX 11

358